OF  THE 

University  of  California. 


Class 


STUDIES   IN 
INVALID   OCCUPATION 


A  Manual  for  Nurses  and 
Attendants 


BY 

SUSAN   E.  TRACY 


WHITCOMB   &    BARROWS 
BOSTON  1910 


Copyright  1910  by 
Susan  E.  Tracy 


THOMAS  TODD  CO. 

PRINTERS 

14  Beacon  Street,  Boston,  Mass. 


(J" 


DEDICATED 

TO 

WILLIAM    MAXWELL    HOUGHTON 

IN   LOVING   RECOGNITION    OF 

GREAT   LESSONS    TAUGHT 

BY   A   LITTLE   CHILD 


223157 


FOREWORD 

These  studies  were  brought  into  systematized  form  and  first 
tested  by  practical  application  in  the  classes  of  the  Training 
School  for  Nurses  of  the  Adams  Nervine  Asylum,  Jamaica  Plain, 
Massachusetts,  with  the  interest  and  unfailing  sympathy  of  its 
superintendent.  Dr.  Daniel  H.  Fuller,  who  courteously  writes 
the  introduction  to  this  book. 

The  closing  chapter  relating  to  the  work  for  the  insane  is 
supplied  in  great  kindness  by  Dr.  E.  Stanley  Abbot,  of  McLean 
Hospital,  Waverley,  Massachusetts. 

For  the  assistance  of  these  two  earnest  supporters  of  all 
helpful  methods  I  wish  to  express  my  sincere  thanks. 

Susan  E.  Tracy. 
Boston,  September  lo,  1910. 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

Introduction i 

The  Need  of  Instruction  for  Nurses  in  Occupations  for 
the  Sick 

1.     Methods  of  Teaching ii 

II.     The  Teacher i6 

III.  Necessary  Equipment 20 

TYPICAL    INVALIDS 

IV.  The  Child  of  Poverty  and  the  Child  of  Wealth      .        .  22 
V.     Restricted  Positions 47 

VI.     In  Quarantine 58 

VII.     One-Hand  Lessons 67 

VIII.     The  Impatient  Boy 76 

IX.     In  the  Hospital 81 

X.     Grandmother 95 

XI.     The  Business  Man 109 

XII.     With  Waning  Powers 124 

XIII.  In  Waiting  Time 132 

XIV.  Without  Sight 138 

XV.     The  Clouded  Mind 151 

Conclusion 170 

List  of  Occupations 173 


ILLUSTRATIONS 
A  Group  of  Colonial  Clothespins Frontispiece 

FACING   PAGE 

Paper-Box  House        . 24 

Furniture  from  Paper  Boxes 44 

Cloth  Animals .        ,        -50 

CuT-OuT  Picture  Work 58 

Bed-Desk 68 

Reed,  Raffia  and  Pine-Needle  Baskets 80 

Practical  Suggestions  for  an  Old  Lady's  Work       ....  100 

Examples  of  Bookbinding  without  Tools 112 

Miniature  Fowls 122 

Rake  Knitting.     An  Acadian  Basket 128 

Eggshell  Toys 132 

Full-page  photographs  by  Frank  A.  Rugg. 


INTRODUCTION 

The  Need  of  Instruction  for  Nurses  in  Occupations 
FOR  THE  Sick 

By  Daniel  H.  Fuller,  M.D. 

There  is  a  growing  tendency  on  the  part  of  many  physicians 
to  depart  from  the  custom  of  the  past  generation  by  prescribing 
fewer  drugs  and  these  more  rationally.  Other  means  of  treat- 
ment are  widely  employed,  not  all  new,  to  be  sure,  but  exploited 
with  renewed  emphasis,  and  practically  new  to  those  who  have 
been  educated  to  other  methods  or  who  have  heretofore  given 
little  thought  to  such  matters.  Among  these  important  adjuncts 
to  drug  treatment,  and  in  many  cases  substitutes  for  it,  may  be 
mentioned  massage,  electricity,  gymnastics,  dietary  regimes, 
hydrotherapy,  the  use  of  light,  heat  and  fresh  air  in  various 
ways,  occupations,  instructions  in  methods  of  self-help  and 
multitudes  of  ways  of  using  suggestion  or  psychotherapy. 

Each  one  of  these  methods  of  treatment  has  been  vaunted 
from  time  to  time  by  successful  enthusiasts  as  a  panacea  for 
so-called  functional  diseases,  and  not  infrequently  for  organic 
troubles  also.  Enthusiastic  confidence  in  a  method  of  treatment 
always  brings  a  measure  of  success,  somewhat  in  proportion  to 
the  enthusiasm,  and  every  physician  can  recall  occasions  where 
his  method  was  entirely  subordinate  to  his  enthusiastic  main- 
tenance of  confidence  in  the  method  being  used. 

It  is  the  belief  of  the  writer  of  this  chapter  that  suitable 
occupation  is  a  valuable  agent  in  the  treatment  of  the  sick.  It 
has  its  place,  not  as  a  panacea,  but  as  an  important  adjunct 
to  other  forms  of  treatment,  and  sometimes  it  is  quite  all  the 
treatment  necessary.  It  has  been  used  too  exclusively  by  the 
specialist,   and  too  little  by   the   general  practitioner,   although 


2    ,^  X  <;  </-    '■     .  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

there  is  much  clever  use  of  it  by  resourceful  doctors  and  nurses 
which  is  never  widely  published. 

Occupation  for  the  sick  is  not  employed  so  much  as  it  might 
be  profitably,  partly  because  of  ignorance  of  the  great  good  that 
may  be  accomplished  thereby  and  partly  because  of  the  difficul- 
ties which  appear  to  stand  in  the  way  of  its  satisfactory  use. 
The  busy  doctor  and  the  busy  nurse  may  feel  that  they  have 
not  time  to  initiate  any  regime  of  this  kind  even  if  the  useful- 
ness of  it  is  apparent.  More  frequently  perhaps,  through  lack 
of  experience  or  ingenuity,  an  occupation  cannot  be  provided, 
much  less  maintained  by  either  the  physician  or  nurse. 

The  psychology  of  work  is  a  subject  of  importance  and 
interest,  but  it  is  not  necessary  for  the  physician  to  be  a  psy- 
chologist to  prescribe  work  wisely  for  the  patient  whose  physical, 
nervous,  mental  and  moral  characteristics  he  has  made  the 
object  of  keen  observation  and  study. 

It  must  not  be  inferred  from  the  above  that  occupation  can 
be  used  successfully  in  a  haphazard  manner.  Not  only  must 
the  nervous  and  physical  strength  be  carefully  estimated,  but  the 
temperament,  natural  tastes  and  disposition  have  to  be  taken 
into  account  in  the  kind  and  amount  of  occupation  suggested, 
as  well  as  in  the  manner  and  place  in  which  it  is  presented. 
Different  physicians  will  have  different  theories  as  to  the  psychic 
processes  involved.  Immediate  or  more  remote  results  may  be 
aimed  at,  and  the  precise  conditions  to  be  treated  may  be  of  a 
subtle  nature. 

The  elimination  from  the  patient's  mind  of  the  idea  of 
"prescription"  or  "remedy"  in  connection  with  the  occupation 
is  doubtless  often  much  to  be  desired.  When  the  work  is  fol- 
lowed for  its  own  sake,  wholesome  interests  are  substituted  for 
morbid  ones  and  gradually  the  attention  is  shifted  to  and  absorbed 
by  the  new  lines  of  thought  aroused,  so  that,  instead  of  being 
a  medicine  that  can  be  dropped  when  the  patient  is  cured,  it  has 
become  rather  a  part  of  the  restored  individual's  life,  to  be 
retained  in  some  form  so  lonsf  as  health  exists. 


INTRODUCTION  3 

Then,  too,  the  use  of  occupation  in  a  sanitarium  or  hospital 
is  quite  a  different  matter  from  its  use  in  the  home  or  away 
from  the  association  with  sicl<ness  and  treatment. 

The  conditions  in  a  well  organized  and  wisely  administered 
sanitarium  furnish  many  invaluable  advantages  and  possibilities 
for  the  treatment  of  the  sick,  so  that  it  is  difficult  to  see  how  such 
institutions  could  be  dispensed  with.  Nevertheless  it  is  and  doubt- 
less always  will  be  true  that  the  association  of  invalids  together 
will  be  attended  with  undesirable  reactions  to  their  environment 
on  the  part  of  some.  Occasionally  absolute  harm  may  result, 
necessitating  the  removal  of  the  patient.  In  a  hospital  or  sani- 
tarium for  nervous  invalids  there  are  usually  a  number  of  patients 
who  really  need  treatment  other  than  occupation.  Hence  it 
becomes  a  necessity  to  combine  occupation,  as  there  offered, 
with  other  remedial  treatment.  On  the  other  hand  the  remedial 
element  in  the  idea  of  work  becomes  a  compelling  argument 
with  others  to  whom  it  appeals  and  whose  confidence  in  the 
physician  leads  to  the  eager  grasping  of  any  suggestion  which 
presents  the  possibility  of  a  restoration  to  health.  But  even  in 
such  cases  the  remedial  effect  is  most  completely  attained  when 
the  occupation  is  followed  from  a  gradually  acquired  ability  and 
interest,  and  no  longer  simply  because  it  is  prescribed.  Such 
a  result  means  a  cure  in  the  broadest  sense,  in  that  the  mental 
attitude  toward  life  has  been  changed.  Wholesome  interests 
have  been  aroused,  and  a  conscious  poise  and  control  in  the  use 
of  one's  strength  in  the  accomplishment  of  work  has  made  work 
a  pleasure  and  Hfe  satisfying. 

There  is  danger  also,  in  the  sanitarium,  of  permitting  the 
occupations  furnished  to  fall  into  the  category  of  other  methods 
of  routine  treatment,  so  that  many  who  can  hardly  expect  to  be 
benefited  thereby  will  beg  to  be  allowed  to  dabble  in  them,  some- 
times from  curiosity  and  sometimes  with  that  peculiar  desire, 
which  some  dwellers  in  sanitaria  have,  to  try  everything  the  place 
affords,  more  for  the  sake  of  adding  another  to  the  ever  increas- 
ing number  of  treatments  which  they  have  taken  than  for  an)' 


4  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

desire  or  expectancy  of  being  benefited.  Again,  the  value  of 
occupation  may  be  discredited  by  some  who  feel  that  unfair 
discrimination  is  made  if  they  are  denied  what  their  neighbors 
have,  while  yet  others,  with  better  intent,  are  prone  to  rush  fever- 
ishly into  any  occupation  offered,  in  their  earnest  and  genuine 
determination  to  leave  nothing  untried  in  the  search  for  health. 
Unless  such  misuse  of  occupations  is  carefully  guarded  against, 
its  wholesome  influence  is  greatly  diminished. 

But  in  spite  of  the  possibilities  of  ill  effects  from  the  associa- 
tion of  nervous  invalids,  and  of  the  dangers  of  misuse  of  the 
occupation  room,  there  are  many  advantages  to  those  who  gather 
there  from  day  to  day  with  an  earnest  purpose  and  a  growing 
interest.  The  occupation  room  offers  a  new  environment.  It 
takes  the  patient  away  from  his  individual  apartment  and  from 
the  living  rooms  of  the  institution  which  may  be  filled  with  the 
suggestion  of  invalidism.  It  presents  a  cheerful  atmosphere  of 
quiet  activity  and  a  satisfying  sense  of  something  worth  while 
being  accomplished,  which  is  stimulating  to  interest  and  effort. 
All  talk  of  sickness,  invalidism,  treatment,  past  experiences  and 
symptoms  should  be  rigidly  excluded,  and  here  is  one  place  where 
this  can  be  accomplished  effectually  by  a  tactful  and  watchful 
teacher.  This  is  most  important.  The  working  together  with 
others  under  these  conditions  often  proves  an  inspiration.  The 
example  of  one  who  is  interested  and  happy  in  his  work  is  a 
strong  and  natural  incentive  to  the  discouraged  and  fearful  one. 
The  willing  and  kindly  effort  to  assist  another  who  finds  the  tasks 
perplexing  and  discouraging  is  sometimes  wonderfully  helpful 
to  both.  Again,  for  many  nervous  invalids  who  have  gradually 
shut  themselves  away  from  all  association  with  others  and  whose 
self-seclusion  has  become  a  habit — the  result  of  morbid  fear — 
the  occupation  room  offers  a  most  effective  opportunity  for  anni- 
hilating this  fear  and  establishing  the  patient  again  in  normal 
habits  and  natural  relations  with  his  fellow-beings.  The  activi- 
ties of  the  occupation  room  become  the  subject  of  wholesome 
interest  and  conversation  outside  of  the  room  itself  and  so  react 


INTRODUCTION  5 

favorably  on  the  whole  institution.  In  many  instances  entirely 
new  ambitions  have  been  permanently  aroused.  The  possibilities 
of  the  continued  use  of  some  of  the  work  outside  of  the  insti- 
tution have  been  eagerly  developed  and  profitably  followed  as 
strength  returned,  and  so  have  helped  the  solution  of  the  always 
perplexing  question  for  the  person  whose  nervous  strength  is 
small  but  who  longs  to  use  effectively  what  little  he  has. 

In  some  cases  the  beginning  of  work  must  be  apart  from 
others  and  under  individual  instruction.  Even  in  these  cases, 
it  is  important,  if  possible,  to  bring  the  patient  to  the  occupation 
room  at  times  when  it  is  not  in  use  by  others,  so  that  he  may 
become  accustomed  to  the  new  surroundings  and  interested  in 
the  opportunities  there  presented.  If  he  gets  started  in  some 
work  which  requires  the  apparatus  of  the  room,  so  much  the 
better,  as  he  will  eventually  the  more  easily  merge  with  the 
general  activities  and  life  of  the  room. 

Perhaps  the  most  essential  element  in  the  success  either  of 
an  occupation  room  in  an  institution  or  in  the  use  of  manual 
work  as  a  therapeutic  agent  with  the  individual  patient  in  the 
home  or  elsewhere  outside  of  institutions  is  the  teacher  on 
the  one  hand,  or  the  nurse  on  the  other.  Leadership  and  example 
are  necessary.  The  German  physician  who  always  worked  in  the 
garden  with  his  patients  recognized  the  surest  way  of  keep- 
ing them  interested.  It  is  futile  to  put  work  into  the  hands  of 
the  sick  and  expect  them  to  create  an  interest  in  it.  A  dozen 
kinds  of  occupation  may  be  suggested,  material  furnished  and 
explanations  and  directions  given,  but  without  the  constant  co- 
operation of  the  teacher  or  nurse,  without  the  daily  expression 
of  interest  and  the  stimulus  of  example,  the  work  is  either  never 
begun,  or,  if  begun,  is  soon  thrown  aside.  The  personality  of 
the  teacher  and  nurse  therefore  becomes  an  important  factor. 
Her  real  enthusiasm  and  love  for  the  work  react  most  power- 
fully on  the  patient.  The  daily  support  of  the  leader,  the  devel- 
opment of  a  common  interest  in  the  work,  a  judicious  arrange- 
ment of  the  times  and  seasons  and  resourcefulness  in  suggestions 
are  among  the  desirable  requirements  for  success. 


6  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

The  physician's  function  is  primarily  to  determine  the  question 
of  the  need  and  advisabiHty  of  manual  work  and  then  to  pre- 
scribe carefully  the  amount,  watch  the  results,  guard  against 
fatigue,  appreciate  the  work  accomplished  and  encourage  the 
wise  persistence  in  it.  There  should  be  the  closest  cooperation 
between  the  doctor  and  nurse  or  teacher.  While  of  necessity 
much  latitude  is  given  the  latter,  she  should  be  trained  in  the 
keen  observation  of  signs  of  overfatigue,  and  be  able  to  analyze 
her  patient  sufficiently  to  determine  whether  the  fatigue  comes 
from  the  too  great  strain  of  the  mechanical  effort  or  from  more 
subtle  causes  of  worry,  discontent,  unnecessary  friction  with  her 
environment,  etc.  Failure  and  even  harm  may  result  by  the  pro- 
longed effort  of  a  conscientious  person  to  peg  away  at  some 
kind  of  work  because  he  doesn't  want  to  offend  the  doctor  or 
nurse,  but  which  is  in  itself  distasteful  and  entirely  wanting 
in  interest  for  him.  The  observing  nurse  will  note  such  a  con- 
dition and  substitute  some  different  work  which  will  appeal  to 
the  patient.  It  must  always  be  borne  in  mind  that  a  loss 
of  interest  in  all  kinds  of  activity  and  a  loss  of  the  power  of 
initiative  are  frequently  symptoms  of  the  condition  which  is  being 
treated.  It  is  therefore  a  part  of  the  problem  to  arouse  and 
foster  interest  and  fan  the  flame  into  real  enthusiasm  at  last. 
It  will  sometimes  be  the  task  of  the  nurse  to  prevent  the  patient 
from  overdoing  when  his  interest  develops  faster  than  his 
strength;  and  here,  too,  tact  and  care  are  requisite  to  keep  the 
patient  within  his  limitations  without  discouragement. 

The  recognition  of  the  need  as  well  as  the  practicability  of 
instructing  nurses  in  various  ways  of  occupying  their  patients 
was  a  direct  outgrowth  of  the  attempt  to  furnish  occupation  to 
the  patients  in  the  sanitarium. 

There  is  nothing  in  the  life  of  the  modern  sanitarium  which 
calls  for  louder  protest  than  the  unemployed  hours  which  furnish 
the  patients  opportunity  for  self-analysis  and  morbid  brooding, 
or,  what  is  equally  if  not  more  insidious  in  its  baneful  effects,  an 
opportunity  for  the  exercise  of  a  natural  tendency  to  get  con- 


INTRODUCTION  7 

fidential  and  discuss  in  minute  detail  symptoms,  experiences, 
doctors,  nurses,  treatments,  causes,  mistakes,  theories  and  con- 
clusions, conduct,  food,  management,  etc.,  ad  infinitum  et  ad 
nauseam.  The  opportunity  to  discuss  these  petty  matters,  the 
lack  of  stimulating  thought,  the  narrowness  of  the  horizon, 
the  prevailing  sentiment  among  a  large  number  of  invalids  that 
there  is  nothing  for  the  patients  to  do  but  lie  back  and  wait 
and  that  somebody  or  something  will  do  all  the  rest  for  them — 
this,  as  a  part  of  sanitarium  life,  led  to  an  eflfort  at  the  Adams 
Nervine  Asylum  to  meet  the  demand  in  part  by  the  building 
and  equipping  of  a  house  devoted  to  the  occupation  and  treat- 
ment of  patients.  Much  importance  was  placed  on  the  occupa- 
tion room,  wherein  opportunity  was  provided  for  various  forms 
of  interesting  and  useful  work.  Weaving  rugs  and  finer  fabrics, 
basket  work,  bookbinding  and  clay  modeling  were  employed  at 
the  start.  Fortunately  there  was  secured  an  excellent  leader, 
trained  in  teaching,  conversant  with  the  work  to  be  taken  up 
and  interested  in  it.  The  room  was  open  at  definite  hours  each 
day,  but  at  other  times  those  who  wished  could  work  without 
the  presence  of  the  teacher  if  their  condition  permitted.  A  rigid 
rule  against  the  discussion  of  symptoms  or  any  matters  relating 
to  illness  or  treatment  was  enforced  and  the  room  became  at 
once  a  cheery  and  attractive  place.  The  atmosphere  of  inter- 
ested activity  prevailed.  The  work  became  the  source  of  new 
purposes,  of  changed  avenues  of  thought  and  of  stimulated 
ambitions.  Other  kinds  of  work  were  introduced  from  time  to 
time,  such  as  leather  work,  brass  work,  free-hand  drawing,  chair 
caning,  the  manufacture  of  photograph  albums,  notebooks,  etc. 
The  department  was  a  success.  The  evils  of  the  idle  association 
of  nervous  invalids  were  in  a  measure  remedied,  and  a  more 
positively  wholesome  spirit  pervaded  the  institution. 

As  this  department  developed  under  its  efficient  leader,  it  was 
noticed  that  the  nurses  became  interested  in  the  activities  of  the 
occupation  room.  The  results  attracted  their  attention.  Some- 
times they  were  allowed  and  at  other  times  requested  to  come 


8  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

with  their  patients  and  work  with  them.  Requests  for  permis- 
sion to  use  the  room  when  off  duty  were  granted.  Nurses  and 
patients  became  interested  in  the  same  kind  of  work  and  the 
mutual  interest  was  stimulating  to  both.  Graduate  nurses,  con- 
scious of  the  value  of  occupation  for  their  private  patients,  began 
to  return  to  the  sanitarium  for  suggestions  and  instructions. 
Most  nurses  felt  keenly  their  lack  of  resourcefulness  in  supply- 
ing some  kind  of  occupation  for  their  convalescing  and  nervous 
patients.  The  sanitarium  equipment  provided  opportunity  for 
instruction  in  many  forms  of  simple  work.  Practical  teaching 
in  ministering  to  the  sick  was  furnished  in  the  training  school 
for  nurses,  why  should  not  lessons  in  occupations  for  invalids 
be  included  also  in  this  curriculum?  The  author  of  this  book, 
being  the  Superintendent  of  Nurses,  saw  the  need  and  the 
opportunity.  The  hours  available  for  instruction  of  nurses  were 
already  full,  but  the  summer  months  were  comparatively  free 
from  training  school  exercises,  and  the  nurses  were  found  will- 
ing to  devote  an  afternoon  each  week  to  talks  and  practical 
work  in  this  line.  The  interest  deepened.  Nurses  were  found 
employing  their  off-duty  time  in  the  practical  working  out  of 
the  ideas  suggested  and  demonstrated  in  the  lessons.  The  occu- 
pation room  was  placed  at  their  disposal  at  certain  hours  and 
one  or  more  of  the  nurses  could  often  be  found  there  busily 
interested  in  some  work  which  had  been  assigned  or  which 
had  been  taken  up  voluntarily.  Problems  were  given  and  worked 
out  involving  the  question  of  occupation  for  a  patient  suffering 
from  this  or  that  malady,  or  living  in  a  real  or  imaginary  environ- 
ment under  certain  definite  limitations.  Graduates  in  private 
practice  came  back  with  the  real  problems  of  their  special  patients, 
and  so  the  practical  need  was  verified  and  the  department  in  the 
instruction  of  nurses  in  methods  of  occupying  their  patients  was 
created  and  organized.  Exhibitions  at  the  sanitarium  of  the 
work  accomplished  by  patients  and  nurses  resulted  in  the  awaken- 
ing of  the  interest  of  the  superintendents  of  other  training  schools 
in  this  subject.    Requests  for  talks  to  the  nurses  of  these  schools 


INTRODUCTION  9 

were  received  and  granted.  Soon  came  demands  for  the  exhi- 
bition in  other  cities  and  for  explanatory  talks  and  demonstra- 
tions before  nurses  engaged  in  advanced  courses  of  study,  and 
before  nurses'  alumnae  associations.  The  strong  appeal  which 
the  subject  made  to  the  graduate  nurses  in  active  work  was 
particularly  significant. 

There  are  nurses  and  physicians  who  are  naturally  resourceful 
and  clever  in  providing  useful  diversions  and  occupations  for 
their  patients.  There  are  many  more  who  are  not,  but  who 
recognize  just  as  clearly  the  benefit  to  the  patient  of  such  inter- 
ests, and  experience  a  feeling  of  helplessness  in  their  inability 
to  supply  the  need.  Such  a  feeling  of  helplessness  deadens 
hope  and  enthusiasm.  It  leads  the  nurse  to  regard  as  prac- 
tically hopeless  certain  invalid  states  which  her  reason  tells  her 
ought  to  be  helped,  but  her  own  experience  tells  her  are  rarely 
much  benefited.  If  they  get  better  it  is  because  they  have 
worked  out  their  own  problem,  and  the  nurse  finally  accepts  that 
as  the  only  possible  solution  and  is  content  to  wait  patiently 
for  the  uncertain  result.  Nothing  can  be  more  destructive  of 
the  nurse's  enthusiasm  and  active  interest  in  her  patient  than 
this.  Nothing  can  be  more  destructive  of  the  patient's  ambition 
and  hopeful  efifort  to  recover  than  to  be  left  to  a  monotonous 
succession  of  days  and  weeks  of  waiting  for  something  new  to 
happen. 

By  routine  instruction  in  the  classroom,  by  personal  talks, 
by  advice  showered  upon  them  in  graduation  addresses,  by  text- 
book and  magazine  articles,  by  the  related  experiences  of  recov- 
ered patients,  nurses  are  constantly  being  impressed  with  the 
fact  that  the  technical  and  mechanical  part  of  their  work  is  but 
one  aspect  of  their  professional  duty,  that  a  broader  conception 
must  be  attained — a  sense  of  obligation  to  minister  to  the  indi- 
vidual as  well  as  to  the  disease.  The  value  of  wise  human 
sympathy,  of  cheerfulness  in  word  and  mien,  of  tactful  dealing 
with  unreasonableness  and  irritability,  of  skillful  diversion  of 
thought    from   pessimistic   channels,    and    many   other   desirable 


lo  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

qualifications  are  emphasized  as  essential  parts  of  the  trained 
nurse's  equipment  for  her  work.  All  this  is  right  and  true.  But 
the  best  intentioned  nurse,  who  aspires  to  do  her  full  duty 
.toward  her  patient  and  who  recognizes  pretty  clearly  the  line 
of  action  which  would  help,  has  often  found  herself  bewildered 
and  helpless  in  her  effort  to  meet  the  need. 

The  instruction  of  nurses  in  these  lines  is  therefore  a  matter 
of  practical  value,  and  far-reaching  in  its  influence.  Not  only  is 
the  knowledge  thus  obtained  a  useful  addition  to  the  nurse's 
working  capital,  but  it  serves  efficiently  as  a  reminder  of  the 
wide  scope  of  her  functions,  and  helps  to  make  her  thoughtful 
of  the  deeper  needs  of  her  patient.  A  determination  to  meet 
this  need  will  be  strengthened  by  such  instruction.  The  inventive 
power  will  be  quickened  and  greater  resourcefulness  developed. 

A  nurse  who  has  noted  the  return  of  an  expression  of  interest 
to  one  who  has  long  been  apathetic,  who  has  been  able  to  pre- 
serve this  interest  and  lead  it  on  to  a  desire  to  act,  who  has 
nurtured  this  feeble  desire  into  a  willingness  to  try,  and  who 
finally  has  turned  the  effort  into  an  accomplished  fact  with  a 
tangible  result  will  appreciate  the  value  of  occupation  for  in- 
valids, while  the  larger  possibilities  which  it  holds  out  to  certain 
classes,  particularly  those  whose  obstacle  to  recovery  lies  in 
perverse  fixed  habits  of  thought  or  the  insistence  of  morbid 
fears,  abundantly  justifies  patient  and  interested  effort  for  long 
periods  of  time. 


CHAPTER   I 

METHODS   OF   TEACHING 

The  teaching  of  occupation  lessons  to  nurses  comes  directly 
in  the  line  of  manual  training  but  is  a  newer  adaptation  of  this 
most  valuable  department  of  study.  Just  as  provision  is  made 
in  the  training  school  curriculum  for  cookery,  massage  and 
various  appropriate  branches,  so  a  place  may  be  found  for  this 
also.  A  proper  lesson  in  cookery  requires  a  longer  period  than 
one  in  anatomy,  in  order  that  there  may  be  time  for  some  review 
and  explanatory  work  before  the  actual  constructive  study  begins. 
It  is  likewise  most  desirable  to  secure  for  this  occupation  class 
a  two-hour  period.  If  the  attempt  is  made  to  give  the  explana- 
tory and  theoretical  part  of  the  lesson  while  the  actual  work  is 
being  done  many  interruptions  will  occur  and  less  purposeful 
work  result. 

Materials  being  all  at  hand  and  systematically  arranged  before 
each  pupil,  the  class  may  be  assembled  as  for  other  study.  It 
is  well  for  the  teacher  to  adhere  to  a  single  subject  in  each 
lesson.  It  would  not  be  wise  to  attempt  to  teach  one-half  the 
class  a  lesson  designed  for  a  feeble  old  man  and  the  other  half 
one  for  a  sixteen-year-old  girl.  Although  there  may  be  many 
kinds  of  work  going  on  they  should  all  point  in  one  direction. 
In  all  classes  there  are  the  swift  and  the  slow,  the  clever  and 
the  dull.  One  nurse  will  complete  a  piece  of  work  weekly,  while 
another  will  use  up  an  hour  in  doing  what  the  first  would  com- 
plete in  twenty  minutes,  therefore  it  has  seemed  best  to  draw 
a  sharp  line  between  finished  and  unfinished  work,  one  table 
being  reserved  for  the  laggards  while  the  more  fortunate  are 
sent  to  the  new  work  table.  The  desire  for  promotion  has 
influenced  speed  to  a  considerable  extent. 


12  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

It  is  essential  that  a  carefully  kept  notebook  be  required. 
If  the  work  be  carried  on  without  this  the  pupil  may  produce 
excellent  work  but  when  graduated  will  not  have  proper  direc- 
tions or  patterns,  will  not  know  where  the  necessary  materials 
may  be  obtained,  or  just  how  things  go  together  or  why  they 
are  placed  in  a  given  lesson.  If  the  blackboard  shows  the  sub- 
ject of  the  lesson  and  the  leading  principles  aimed  at  in  its 
presentation,  the  detail  may  follow  in  the  notebooks.  For  the 
most  part  the  instructor  will  do  best  to  watch  the  work  in 
the  hand  of  the  individual  student;  occasionally,  however,  a 
demonstration  before  the  class  of  some  special  work  may  be 
a  saving  in  point  of  time.  In  any  case  it  will  be  an  extremely 
busy  period. 

Leaving  room  for  originality,  the  value  of  models  must  not 
be  forgotten.  If  the  student  can  be  set  down  facing  a  good 
model,  the  instructor  is  relieved  of  a  large  part  of  the  teaching. 
The  models  should,  of  course,  be  of  the  best  and  the  pupils 
cautioned  against,  and  taught  to  observe,  their  defects  and  to 
preserve  their  excellencies.  Pupils  will  be  of  many  sorts;  those 
of  quick  insight  who  select  materials  with  little  hesitation  and 
take  themselves  off  to  some  quiet  corner  to  bring  back  some 
charmingly  worked  out  scheme.  Perhaps  there  will  be  two  out 
of  ten  of  this  class.  The  average  pupil  works  along  rather 
laboriously  but  with  a  certain  interest  and  satisfaction  in  results. 
After  these  come  the  trials,  those  whose  hands  seem  not  to  be 
a  part  of  them,  those  who  work  while  the  instructor  is  beside 
them  and  then  wait  until  she  gets  around  again.  Perhaps  the 
saving  grace  in  this  work  is  its  variety.  The  pupil  who  made 
shipwreck  of  a  Canton  flannel  dog  turns  out  an  excellently  bound 
book;  the  one  who  flounders  and  gasps  over  a  piece  of  paper 
folding  will  knit  a  shawl  with  good,  steady  strokes.  But  because 
they  are  nurses  and  will  be  called  to  suit  all  sorts  of  men  and 
minds  they  must  learn  to  do  the  things  for  which  they  care  little, 
if  by  so  doing  they  can  supply  the  needed  interest  to  the  patient 
dependent  upon  them. 


METHODS    OF   TEACHING  13 

It  is  not  possible  or  desirable  to  have  each  separate  pupil 
attempt  all  the  kinds  of  work.  Choice  may  be  permitted  to  a 
degree  but  not  altogether — the  thing  chosen  may  often  be 
allowed  after  a  less  attractive  piece  of  work  is  completed.  There 
is  danger  that  too  much  time  may  be  spent  on  a  popular  form 
of  work.  Every  pupil  wants  to  make  one  of  these  articles, 
and  in  consequence  an  estimate  of  value  out  of  proportion  to 
the  time  allowed  results. 

The  real  problem  of  the  nurse  is  to  find  means  whereby  she 
may  initiate  and  actually  lead  and  cooperate  in  forms  of  occu- 
pation suited  to  every  invalid  condition  and  any  natural  temper- 
ament. She  must  possess  within  herself  that  which  may  be 
offered  to  young  and  old,  rich  or  poor,  man,  woman  or  child. 
Those  things  popularly  termed  amusements  in  no  sense  supply 
this  place.  In  the  valuable  little  book,  "The  School  and  the 
Child,"  Dr.  Dewey  writes:  "By  occupation  is  not  meant  any 
kind  of  'busy  work'  or  exercise  that  may  be  given  to  the  child 
to  keep  him  out  of  mischief  or  idleness  when  seated  at  his  desk. 
By  occupation  I  mean  a  mode  of  activity  on  the  part  of  the 
child  which  reproduces  or  runs  parallel  to  some  form  of  work 
carried  on  in  the  social  life.  The  fundamental  point  in  the 
psychology  of  an  occupation  is  that  it  maintains  a  balance  between 
the  intellectual  and  the  practical  phases  of  experience."  This 
being  accepted  it  may  be  placed  over  against  the  invalid's  feeling 
of  being  interrupted  in  his  legitimate  work,  of  being  relegated 
to  the  physical  repair  shop.  Here  let  the  occupations  serve  to 
keep  up  the  connection  with  the  social  life.  Although  forbidden 
to  look  into  the  faces  of  his  friends  there  may  still  be  strong 
and  tangible  relation  between  the  invalid  and  other  men  and 
their  needs;  thus  self-respect  is  preserved  and  ambition  fostered. 
Only  by  observation  of  many  examples  of  such  activities  and 
by  consideration  of  all  sorts  of  materials,  especially  those  com- 
monly overlooked,  can  the  pupil  nurse  attain  to  anything  like 
an  equipment  for  this  inestimable  service.  Choice  she  must  be 
allowed,  but  not  to  the  discarding  of  a  single  scrap  of  valuable 


14  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

and  available  material.  Her  choice  will  need  much  education 
before  she  wakens  to  the  sense  of  the  greatness  of  her  resources 
in  any  home,  the  poorest  not  excepted.  She  will  never  be  a  truly- 
good  nurse  until  she  can  produce  something  out  of  what  others 
call  nothing.  She  must  possess  a  prodigality  of  ideas  sufficient 
for  any  demand.  Let  the  thought  be  uppermost  throughout  the 
course  that  the  nurse  is  learning  to  do  these  things  in  order  to 
teach  another  and,  realizing  this,  she  will  work  out  any  problem 
and  truly  rejoice  in  the  finished  product  and  acquired  skill. 

The  arrangement  of  materials  in  such  a  way  that  a  sense  of 
beauty  is  reached  early  in  the  constructive  process  will  be  of  great 
value.  This  is  more  possible  than  may  always  appear  at  first. 
In  the  making  of  what,  for  lack  of  a  better  name,  are  called 
cut-out  pictures,  the  work  may  seem  stupid  in  the  beginning, 
but  if  the  papers  collected  be  grouped  in  harmonious  color  com- 
binations even  before  their  application,  a  color  charm  will  precede 
actual  work  and  hold  to  great  extent  the  pupil's  feeling  until 
the  form  and  general  effect  be  produced  to  strengthen  her  idea 
of  the  value  of  the  work.  There  is  perhaps  no  greater  principle 
to  be  taught  than  that  of  the  quick  recognition  of  beauty  in 
despised  and  discarded  materials.  It  is  really  a  question  if  any 
place  can  be  called  truly  barren  of  such  material,  certainly  no 
home  need  merit  the  term.  The  only  barren  thing  is  the  mind 
which  is  unable  to  recognize  its  resources.  In  a  class  of  unde- 
veloped nurses  there  will  be  a  strong  tendency  to  employ  crude 
colors  and  sharp  contrasts.  The  knowledge  and  appreciation  of 
color  and  its  delicate  gradations  are  productive  of  far-reaching 
effect.  The  student's  own  clothing  will  be  better  chosen,  and  it 
may  not  be  too  much  to  feel  that  even  tones  of  voice  and  muscular 
tension  in  general  may  be  thereby  modified. 

Whatever  the  work  let  it  possess  a  certain  dignity.  Do  not 
encourage  the  employment  of  time  on  unworthy  materials  and 
purposeless  productions.  A  bit  of  waste  paper  may  be  folded 
so  as  to  teach  a  great  principle,  while  ten  sheets  of  wadding 
may  be  gobbled  into  uncleanable  table  covers  and  mats  to  perish 
of  their  own  unworthiness. 


METHODS   OF   TEACHING  15 

Having,  then,  secured  a  proper  lesson  period,  provided  for 
both  bright  and  dull  pupils,  required  well-kept  notes,  secured 
good  models,  arranged  for  great  variety  of  subjects  and  per- 
mitted legitimate  choice,  the  way  is  truly  opened  which  leads  up 
to  beauty  and  dignity  of  the  product  and  the  culminating  sense 
of  time  well  spent,  even  though  it  be  within  the  four  walls  of  a 
sick-room. 


CHAPTER   II 

THE   TEACHER 

The  desire  to  place  occupation  studies  in  the  curriculum  of 
the  training  schools  makes  way  at  once  for  the  question,  Who 
shall  act  as  teachers?  A  very  different  set  of  qualifications  is 
necessary  in  the  teaching  of  the  sick  from  those  that  suffice 
in  teaching  the  well,  therefore  those  attempting  to  teach  nurses 
the  art  of  teaching  the  individual  patient  must  themselves 
possess  like  qualifications.  One  teaching  invalids  should  be 
familiar  with  the  limitations  imposed  by  all  sorts  of  diseases. 
She  should  be  able  to  find  just  the  thing  which  a  person  suffer- 
ing from  chest  troubles  might  safely  do  without  aggravating 
symptoms,  while  she  should  be  no  less  appreciative  of  ortho- 
pedic cases.  She  must  detect  eye  strain,  know  and  heed  the 
early  signs  of  fatigue  before  the  patient  is  himself  conscious 
of  it.  Nervous  disorders  and  temperamental  differences  must  be 
read  and  appreciated  individually.  She  must  be  able  to  observe 
the  patient  closely  for  long  periods  in  order  to  do  really  fine 
work  by  this  method  of  treatment.  All  things  being  considered, 
it  would  seem  that,  given  the  necessary  training,  a  nurse  would 
be  the  one  best  suited  to  this  work.  There  may  be  a  feeling 
that  most  successful  nurses  are  far  too  busy  to  take  time  for 
this  special  training.  The  group  which  promises  well  for  this 
is  made  up  of  those  nurses  who  have  already  had  a  somewhat 
long  experience  in  private  nursing,  who  have  come  to  a  realiza- 
tion of  the  great  need  and  also  feel  the  strain  of  nursing,  so  that 
a  six  months'  course  to  be  followed  by  an  opportunity  to  teach 
sounds  refreshing.  A  class  made  up  in  this  way  would  be  a 
desirable  and  certain  aid  to  the  work.  There  should,  if  possible, 
be   some  natural  ability  along  these  lines ;   still,   given  genuine 

i6 


THE   TEACHER  17 

interest,  the  chances  are  good  even  with  Umited  knowledge  at 
the  start.  Here  and  there  may  be  found  a  kindergartner  or 
craftswoman  who  will  do  good  work  provided  she  can  grasp  the 
conditions,  but  it  will  be  almost  necessary  to  train  her  first  to 
nursing,  for  the  double  reason  of  gaining  free  access  to  the 
patients  and  the  proper  adjustment  of  work  to  abnormal  con- 
ditions. When  patients  are  strong  enough  to  go  to  a  workroom 
or  shop  the  need  for  nurse  teachers  is  not  so  manifest ;  but  when 
the  shop  is  the  sick-room,  and  the  bed  the  bench,  it  is  almost  a 
necessity  that  the  nurse  be  the  teacher.  Certain  eminent  neurol- 
ogists have  prescribed  for  their  wealthy  patients  a  lesson  once 
or  twice  a  week  to  be  given  by  some  qualified  craftswoman.  In 
one  instance  this  was  bookbinding.  This  invalid  was  shut  away 
from  all  with  the  exception  of  physician,  nurse  and  this  teacher 
who  gave  one  lesson  weekly,  leaving  some  one  definite  problem 
to  be  worked  out  by  the  patient  with  the  assistance  of  the  nurse. 
This  proved  a  wise  and  profitable  arrangement.  Teachers  of 
basketry,  chair  caning  and  other  hand-craft  are  employed  by  the 
city  of  New  York  to  visit  and  instruct  the  poor  in  the  various 
city  institutions.  This  is  surely  a  great  step  in  the  right  direction. 
Hospitals  have,  however,  been  singularly  overlooked  in  this  re- 
spect, and  it  is  only  here  and  there  that  the  trustees  of  such 
institutions  are  becoming  cognizant  of  the  need  from  the  stand- 
point of  the  patients'  own  welfare. 

It  is  not  enough  that  the  teacher  be  prepared  with  three  or 
four  forms  of  occupation.  It  is  a  very  great  mistake  to  teach 
basketry  or  any  other  one  thing  to  all  classes  of  invalids.  The 
variety  for  choice  needs  to  be  almost  inexhaustible.  Work  which 
proves  a  distinct  sedative  to  one  patient  will  drive  another  wild. 
One  must  treat  symptoms  by  the  "work  cure"  as  well  as  by 
drug  treatment. 

In  conducting  these  classes  among  nurses  it  sometimes 
happens  that  a  teacher  is  developed  unconsciously.  In  one  class 
three  kinds  of  work  were  going  on ;  this  was  requiring  more 
personal  attention  than  the  one  teacher  could  bestow.     Without 


i8  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

being  asked  one  pupil  quietly  assumed  the  teaching  in  one  of 
these  groups,  carrying  it  along  with  good  success.  It  is  a  cheer- 
ing thing  when  this  takes  place. 

The  field  is  already  well  opened  for  this  work ;  teachers  will 
surely  be  in  demand.  They  must  possess  resourcefulness,  un- 
failing patience,  quick  perception  of  capacities  and  limitations, 
an  enthusiasm  which  can  anticipate  for  the  patient  the  attractive- 
ness of  the  finished  product  and  the  insight  which  substitutes 
a  new  piece  of  work  or  a  new  phase  of  the  old  before  the  patient 
is  conscious  of  weariness  or  distaste.  Such  teachers  exist  and 
may  be  developed,  although  they  are  none  too  frequently  met. 
They  should  receive  quick  recognition  and  careful  training. 

The  first  requirement  then  in  a  teacher  for  this  work  is  that 
she  be  able  to  understand  abnormal  conditions.  Nurses  come 
at  the  head  of  the  list  for  these  reasons:  they  are  of  necessity 
constantly  with  the  patient,  they  have  a  certain  scientific  knowl- 
edge, they  have  been  taught  all  along  through  training  to  work 
with  the  hands,  and  they  themselves  need  the  change  offered  by 
a  newly  developed  phase  of  their  own  work.  Kindergartners 
will  be  of  very  great  service  if  available.  Craftswomen  will  be 
of  highest  value  in  preparing  nurses  in  special  branches  and  in 
teaching  directly  the  accessible  invalids.  Pupil  nurses  may 
receive  a  special  normal  training  under  some  circumstances. 
For  instance,  application  is  made  to  a  small  school  having  done 
this  work  to  teach  the  pupils  of  a  large  school.  These  large 
classes  are  subdivided,  and  under  a  competent  head  teacher  the 
pupils  of  the  smaller  school  are  made  responsible  for  the  in- 
struction of  single  groups  of  the  larger  school.  To  make  this 
possible  the  thing  to  be  taught  should  be  definitely  decided  and 
steadfastly  adhered  to;  the  pupil  nurse  should  know  long  before 
that  she  is  to  teach  this  thing.  Thus  stimulated  few  pupils  will 
fail  to  respond.  The  main  trouble  with  the  pupil  nurse  lies  in 
her  failure  to  make  strong  connections  between  occupation  and 
nursing.  She  feels  that  the  essential  experience  lies  in  witness- 
ing and  assisting  at  unusual  and  striking  surgical  operations,  but 


THE   TEACHER  19 

out  in  the  world  of  private  work  she  will  get  little  of  this;  what 
she  will  get  will  be  the  long  twenty- four  hour  day,  the  seven  day 
week,  the  thirty  day  month,  and  even  the  three  hundred  and 
sixty-five  day  year,  with  only  the  monotony  of  diminished  powers. 
Whatever  renders  these  long  stretches  fertile  and  hangs  even 
the  smallest  fruit  on  the  weak  branches  of  the  tree  of  life  will 
never  be  a  matter  for  regret. 


CHAPTER   III 

NECESSARY   EQUIPMENT 

In  order  to  teach  occupations  in  institutions  certain  equipment 
is  necessary.  This,  however,  may  be  reduced  to  very  simple  forms. 
Much  of  value  might  be  taught  in  a  common  sitting  room  if  no 
other  place  be  available,  but  far  better  would  be  some  rather 
empty  supply  room.  An  attic  may  be  utilized.  Light  is  essential, 
but  beyond  that  other  equipment  may  be  improvised.  Not  less 
than  two  large  tables,  long  and  narrow  rather  than  square,  will 
be  found  practicable.  For  the  stock  a  generous  space  in  the  form 
of  wall  closets  or  shelves  and  a  special  wall-case  to  hold  finished 
work  in  such  a  way  that  it  can  be  displayed  without  continual 
pulling  down  is  much  to  be  desired.  There  should  be  some 
heating  apparatus,  an  electric  or  gas  stove  for  cooking  paste, 
heating  flatirons,  etc.,  for  example.  A  small  letter  press  is  very 
useful,  and  a  patent  paper  cutter  for  cutting  pasteboard  and 
other  materials.  Few  rather  than  many  tools  should  be  employed, 
since  this  training  is  designed  to  teach  nurses  how  to  set  invalids 
to  work  in  their  own  rooms.  The  sick-room  is  to  become  a 
workshop,  therefore  to  bring  in  or  to  demand  a  supply  of  tools 
would  make  the  undertaking  assume  burdensome  characteristics 
in  most  homes.  The  very  zest  of  the  thing  often  turns  upon  its 
being  accomplished  by  a  person  below  par  and  with  small  and 
heretofore  unrecognized  resources.  In  this  way  the  tools  common 
to  every  home  and  almost  to  every  room  are  the  ones  on  which 
the  work  should  depend.  To  scissors,  needle  and  thread,  pen- 
knife, paste  brush,  ruler,  glue  pot,  add  a  pair  of  pliers,  an  awl 
or  two,  a  small  hammer  and  a  few  tacks.  If  fortunate  enough 
to  find  tools  in  the  house  a  nurse  should  show  that  she  knows 
how  to  use  them,  but  if  none  are  found  she  can  be  equally  credited 
with  knowing  how  to  get  along  without  them. 


NECESSARY    EQUIPMENT  21 

The  actual  materials  used  are  many  and  varied.  Here,  too, 
it  is  desirable  to  make  much  of  such  as  may  be  already  at  hand. 
In  institutional  work  great  quantities  of  such  material  will  be 
donated  by  friends  if  the  need  is  made  known.  Some  material, 
as  basket  stock,  leather,  fancy  paper,  etc.,  must  be  bought.  Pupils 
may  be  required  to  pay  for  this  if  they  wish  to  keep  the  product. 

If  the  instructors  have  open  eyes  and  are  ready  to  seize  upon 
anything  which  may  be  converted  into  useful  stock  by  being 
wisely  arranged,  it  may  be  found  on  every  hand — papers  from 
bundles,  backs  of  catalogues,  old  magazines,  bits  of  leather,  paper 
boxes,  newspapers,  soiled  blotters,  scraps  of  cloth,  bits  of  wood, 
and  so  on,  ad  infinitum.  Each  of  these  suggests  a  thing  fashioned 
for  a  purpose  and  capable  of  supplying  some  definite  need.  All 
these  should  be  carefully  classified.  The  workroom  should  never 
present  the  appearance  of  a  general  rubbish  pile,  but  that  of  a 
well-ordered  stock-room.  Paper  boxes  plainly  marked  and  placed 
on  convenient  shelves  may  contain  this  stock  and  much  more  of 
the  valued  material.  A  blackboard  should  be  available.  It  is 
also  desirable  that  a  couch  or  bed  be  included  in  the  outfit,  as  the 
only  satisfactory  way  to  teach  a  lesson  for  restricted  position 
cases  is  to  have  a  model  which  may  be  one  of  the  class.  By  this 
means  it  is  possible  to  put  the  nurse  in  place  of  the  patient,  and 
thus  learn  what  may  really  be  done.  A  simple  bed-desk  or 
inclined  table  will  be  described  later. 

Briefly  summarized  the  equipment  would  then  be:  a  good- 
sized  room,  well  lighted ;  two  long  tables ;  a  heater  ;  stock  closets ; 
a  few  common  tools ;  blackboard ;  couch ;  bed-table  or  bench ; 
and  classified  materials. 


TYPICAL   INVALIDS 
CHAPTER  IV 

THE    CHILD   OF   POVERTY    AND   THE    CHILD   OF   WEALTH 

Both  the  rich  and  the  poor  child  come,  during  severe  illness, 
under  the  care  of  the  trained  nurse.  In  the  case  of  the  former 
the  disease  may  be  far  from  severe,  indeed,  many  times  there  may 
be  no  real  existing  disease,  but  for  the  less  rugged  child  of  the 
rich  a  trained  nurse  may  be  employed  for  long  periods.  Aside 
from  the  consideration  of  the  poor  child  in  the  hospital,  and 
dealing  with  him  only  in  his  own  home,  the  period  will  be  neces- 
sarily brief.  Provided  for  as  this  child  must  be  by  some  charitable 
source,  church,  lodge  or  individual  gift,  his  time  in  the  hands  of 
a  trained  nurse  will  not  be  extended  beyond  necessity.  By  the 
introduction  of  occupation  treatment  it  is  to  be  proved  that  the 
so-called  poor  child  is  rich  because  of  his  apparent  poverty,  while 
in  many  instances  it  is  quickly  perceived  that  the  rich  child  is  poor 
because  of  his  riches.  The  first  lesson  has  been  prepared  for  a 
poor  child  of  four  years,  recovering  from  a  pneumonia.  It  has 
been  proved  in  the  working  out  of  this  lesson  that  its  principles 
are  equally  applicable  to  the  child  of  wealth.  The  spending  of 
even  the  smallest  sum  of  money  for  materials  for  this  lesson 
is  strictly  forbidden.  A  nurse  who  can  fashion  a  great  variety 
of  interesting  objects  from  the  barest  scraps  becomes  in  the  esti- 
mation of  any  child,  rich  or  poor,  a  sort  of  magician.  The  rich 
child  is  surfeited  with  expensive  and  beautiful  toys  of  which  he 
soon  tires ;  they  are  too  perfect  to  be  interesting  unless  destroyed 
in  order  to  learn  their  secret,  which  piece  of  work  is  often  under- 
taken if  the  child  be  left  alone.  But  let  a  wise  nurse  take  these 
fragments  from  the  wastebasket,  together  with  all  sorts  of  utterly 
despised  and  discarded  material,  and  from  these  produce  a  new 
and  attractive  toy  and  the  creative  spirit  wakens  and  the  child 
will  not  fail  in  appreciation  and  response. 


TYPICAL    CHILDREN 


23 


What  then  shall  constitute  the  stock  of  material  in  the  poorest 
home?  Do  not  for  a  moment  think  of  it  as  being  meager.  As 
this  lesson  is  taught  year  after  year  it  seems  well-nigh  boundless. 
The  entire  summer  could  be  spent  with  profit  on  this  first  prob- 
lem of  the  profitable  occupation  of  a  child  without  the  expenditure 
of  money.  The  realization  of  resources  is  the  first  and  might- 
iest principle.  From  this  one  never  escapes.  If  success  is  won  it 
is  because  of,  and  in  direct  proportion  to,  the  ability  to  understand 
and  apply  this  great  power.  What  comes  into  this  house  of 
poverty?  Bits  of  paper  from  packages,  here  and  there  a  colored 
paper  from  the  drug  store,  a  piece  of  wall  paper,  the  colored 
cover  of  an  old  magazine,  the  label  from  a  can  of  tomatoes. 
Treasure  each  clean  bit — paper  bags  from  the  grocers,  any  sort 
of  pasteboard  box,  all  kinds  of  advertising  pictures,  newspapers, 
scraps  of  leather  cut  from  an  old  shoe  perhaps,  the  shell  of  every 
egg  used,  a  potato,  turnip,  lemon,  a  peanut,  an  apple,  a  bit  of 
wood,  pins,  toothpicks,  cork  stoppers,  seeds  of  fruit  or  vege- 
tables, bits  of  crayon,  strings,  scraps  of  worsted  and  cloth  of  all 
sorts. 

From  common  brown  wrapping  paper  make  a  House,  cutting 
in  this  fashion: 


0 

T^oo^ 

/^ 

u       H 

1                    -_. 
1 

Fig.  I 


24  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

This  house  forms  the  nucleus  around  which  a  large  number 
of  related  objects  gather.  In  the  same  manner  fashion  barn, 
woodshed,  dairy,  pigpen,  etc.  Children  are  attracted  by  a  log- 
ical series ;  their  thought  in  this  often  outstrips  that  of  their 
elders. 

A  farm  without  animals  is  absurd ;  they  too  must  be  cut  out, 
and  who  without  practice  can  cut  out  a  first-rate  cow  ?  Sit  down 
in  a  leisure  half  hour  and  see  how  many  animals  you  can  cut  out 
and  come  fairly  near  to  the  originals.  An  excellent  study  for 
this  work  is  a  paper  Noah's  Ark.  The  "two  of  a  kind"  may  be 
cut  together.  This  opens  the  way  for  wall  decoration.  The 
ordinary  walls  of  a  sick-room  are  often  very  wearying.  This 
need  not  be.  There  is  no  reason  why  a  patient,  young  or  old, 
should  not  live  in  different  places  while  confined  to  the  bed. 
Suppose  that  a  long  strip  of  green  paper  can  be  found;  above 
this  paste  another  strip  of  bluish  gray;  have  the  latter  some 
two-thirds  the  depth  of  the  former.  Beginning  with  the  ark 
and  the  men  and  women  thereof,  follow  with  the  procession  of 
animals.  This  picture-story  will  go  a  long  way  around  the 
room.  Some  children  simply  tear  out  animals  with  surprising 
accuracy,  using  no  scissors.  One  feeble-minded  boy  who  could 
be  taught  little  else  did  this  well.  This  first  piece  may  repre- 
sent the  Bible  story.  A  Mother  Goose  story  which  gives  a 
good  progression,  such  as  "The  House  that  Jack  Built,"  "The 
Old  Woman  and  Her  Pig,"  "Sing  a  Song  o'  Sixpence,"  etc., 
will  work  out  well  in  this.  A  fairy  story,  as  "Cinderella"  or 
"Jack  and  the  Bean  Stalk,"  may  be  added. 

A  child's  room  may  easily  be  turned  into  any  part  of  the 
world.  Clusters  of  roof  tops  and  chimney  pots  running  along 
the  lower  edge  of  a  paper  frieze  give  a  chance  to  compare 
architectural  features,  while  speeding  through  the  sky  overhead 
Santa  Claus  and  his  reindeer  hold  the  child's  thought  in  the 
old  spell.  Flying  machines  and  windmills  can  be  introduced 
with  great  effect. 

Learning  to  stitch  up  a  book  correctly  for  a  picture  and 


TYPICAL    CHILDREN 


25 


story-book  will  be  worth  while.  From  common  brown  wrap- 
ping paper  cut  even  rectangles  twelve  by  eight  inches,  folding 
once  to  make  the  page  six  by  eight.  Place  from  three  to  four 
of  these  one  within  the  other  to  form  the  sections,  or  signatures, 
of  the  book.  Six  such  sections  will  make  a  very  good-sized 
book.  Now  find  some  bits  of  tape  or  even  strips  of  cotton  cloth 
of  good  color ;  cut  in  four  or  five  inch  lengths ;  if  the  book  be 
small  two  strips  will  be  sufficient.  Holding  all  the  sections 
closely  together  in  the  left  hand,  stretch  a  tape  tightly  across 
the  back  one-third  of  the  way  from  the  top  and  mark  plainly 
with  a  lead  pencil  on  either  side  of  the  tape,  making  sure  that 
each  section  is  plainly  marked.  At  the  distance  of  two-thirds 
from  the  top  place  the  second  tape  and  mark  in  the  same  way. 
Remove  tape  and  draw  a  single  line  three-fourths  of  an  inch 
from  the  top  and  another  single  line  the  same  distance  from 
the  bottom  of  the  book.     (Fig.  2.) 


KettU. 
st.TOi 

-» 

- 

> 

" 

1* 

- 

"Tcv|aC& 

—      —    -      • 

-     •     "■ 

•" 

" 

* 

tm     * 

* 

" 

'  '  '  '             U.JL 

otcross 

^  ^ 

^ 

., 

. 

,. 

., 

„^ 

^^^ 

^0 

Fig.  2 

After  marking  thus,  open  each  section  in  the  middle  and, 
with  a  large  needle,  prick  through  all  the  leaves  at  the  points 
marked  on  the  back.  Take  a  very  long  double  thread  of  linen 
or  silk  in  a  large  needle,  having  no  knot  at  the  end  of  the  thread. 
Pick  up  the  first  section,  open  in  the  exact  center,  sew  through 


26  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

the  first  upper  hole  from  without  inward,  leaving  two  inches  of 
thread  hanging  loosely  outside.  Sew  out  through  the  next  hole, 
which  will  be  at  the  top  of  the  first  tape,  lay  this  tape  across 
and  sew  down  over  it  but  not  through  it  to  the  center  again. 
Repeat  this  over  the  second  tape  and  bring  the  thread  up  to 
the  outside  through  last  hole.  Place  the  second  section  of  the 
book  close  to  the  first  and  sew  down  through  the  lowest  hole, 
over  the  two  tapes,  out  through  the  upper  hole.  Tie  the  loose 
ends  at  the  top  of  the  first  section  to  the  long  thread,  leaving 
them  an  inch  long  after  tying.  Continue  down  the  third  sec- 
tion in  the  same  manner  until  the  bottom  is  reached.  As  the 
thread  is  brought  up  through  the  last  hole  a  sort  of  half-button- 
hole stitch,  called  by  binders  the  " 'kettle-stitch,"  is  made  by 
slipping  the  needle  under  the  stitch  of  the  next  preceding  section 
and  holding  the  thread  in  a  loop  in  front,  then  drawing  up  just 
as  in  buttonhole  stitch.  This  is  repeated  at  both  top  and  bottom 
of  each  section  and  serves  to  hold  them  firmly  together.  When 
all  are  sewn,  tie  securely  and  leave  an  inch  of  thread,  which  is 
tucked  down  between  the  sections,  as  are  the  first  threads.  Draw 
the  ends  of  the  tapes  evenly  and  paste  down  firmly  to  the  upper 
leaves  of  the  book.  Allow  to  dry  thoroughly.  This  makes  a 
strong  book  and  is  one  of  the  methods  employed  by  fine  binders. 

The  next  thing  is  to  gather  up  any  pictures  from  news- 
papers or  any  source,  pasting  one  or  two  on  a  page  with  ample 
space  between  for  the  text.  When  the  pictures  are  all  in,  write 
or  print  a  story  composed  for  the  purpose  of  connecting  them, 
using  them  as  illustrations.  This  story  may  be  of  joint  author- 
ship. The  value  of  advertising  pictures  is  great  in  many  lines 
of  work. 

House  Furnishing  by  these  same  advertisements  is  another 
source  of  pleasure.  From  a  pasteboard  box  cut  uniform-sized 
pieces  for  the  rooms,  and  with  a  few  lines  indicate  floor,  ceiling 
and  walls;  little  or  no  perspective  may  be  employed.  Select 
wall  paper,  carpets,  window  shades,  etc.,  of  paper,  pasting  and 
fitting  neatly,  cutting  out  the  furniture  from  the  advertisements. 


TYPICAL   CHILDREN 


27 


Arrange  the  various  rooms  of  a  house  with  its  occupants.  This 
may  be  done  in  a  book  or  on  separate  sheets  of  board. 

Paper  Folding  opens  up  a  wide  range  of  profitable  enter- 
tainment. Paper  folding  proper  does  not  include  cutting  or 
weaving,  but  the  fashioning  of  various  objects,  usually  from  a 
square,  eight  inches  being  a  favorite  size.  The  very  first  essen- 
tial is  that  the  paper  be  exactly  square.  Paper  which  is  tough 
but  not  too  heavy  will  work  best,  but  all  sorts  may  be  used,  and 
one  can  always  get  a  piece  of  paper.  Children  traveling  may 
be  kept  occupied  and  happy  by  this  for  long  periods ;  nor  is  the 
interest  restricted  to  children.  A  good  piece  of  paper  folding 
represents  a  fine  mathematical  problem.  Men  like  it  and  a  piece 
thus  left  with  a  patient  aflfords  an  agreeable  puzzle. 

There  is  a  series  of  boats  which  will  be  sure  to  interest. 
The  Dory  may  be  folded  in  three  different  ways :  First  method. 
Fold  an  eight-inch  square  evenly  through  the  center;  open,  fold 
the  lower  edge  up  to  the  central  fold  and  crease ;  fold  the  upper 
edge  down  to  central  fold  and  crease;  open,  turn  paper  around 
and  repeat  the  same  folds  the  opposite  way,  making  sixteen 
squares  altogether.  Turn  paper  over  and  fold  one  side  so  that 
the  outer  fold  meets  the  central  crease ;  turn  paper  over  and  fold 


l>«.ck    /         , 

r            1 
•                1 

•                      • 

X                         1 

^  t  1^  ^l  e. 

;s;«^c 

1  ^  X        ^«^"*"*^ 

'             S 
1                  X 

X 

•  X 

X 

•  X 

1                     \ 

\                  1 
\                , 

\                 ' 
S                  1 

\          1 
\       j 

Tu,r  VI         X 

Po»xtle. 

\  ^;<ie 

1                              • 

•  y 

1                    * 

•  • 

1^^         Wo^cK 

Fig.  3 


28 


INVALID   OCCUPATION 


a  small  half-square  in  each  corner  of  the  thin  side ;  now  fold  two 
small  half -squares  in  each  outer  corner  of  the  thick  side  through 
all  the  thicknesses ;  now  fold  the  thin  side  down  over  the  thick 
side  and  open  through  center  for  boat.  This  makes  a  dory  with 
a  sharp-edged  bottom  which  will  not  stand  on  level  surface. 
(Fig.  3-) 

Second  method.  Fold  a  square  diagonally;  open,  fold  the 
other  diagonal;  open,  fold  straight  across  the  diameter;  open, 
fold  the  other  diameter ;  leave  this  folded ;  fold  down  each  folded 
corner  to  the  center ;  open  at  bottom  and  crease  so  as  to  form 
a  square ;  turn  up  the  loose  points  to  top  and  crease ;  open  again 
to  form  smaller  square;  turn  up  corners  again.    These  last  will 


HcUow* 


ru.K  occt 


Fig.  4 


be  very  thick;  open  again  and  turn  up  the  corners.  Pull  out 
the  two  points  at  either  end,  leaving  a  point  which  stands  up 
in  the  center,  forming  a  base  on  which  the  boat  may  stand. 

(Fig-  4-) 

Third  method.  For  this  dory  an  exception  is  made  and  an 
oblong  takes  the  place  of  a  square.  Fold  evenly  across  the 
shorter  diameter ;  fold  the  two  double  corners  down  to  the  center ; 
this  will  leave  a  narrow  edge  at  the  bottom  which  is  folded 
back  on  each  side  like  a  hem.  Now  open  at  the  bottom  to  form 
a  square  and  turn  up  the  corners  to  the  top  as  in  the  preceding 
example ;  repeat  this  and  open  in  the  same  way.  If  made  of 
paper  of  different  color  on  the  two  sides  the  effect  is  of  a  boat 
with  a  painted  border  around  the  inner  side. 


TYPICAL   CHILDREN  29 

Sailboat.  Fold  the  diagonals  and  diameters,  opening  the 
paper  flat  after  each  fold.  Hold  two  opposite  corners  together, 
letting  the  other  two  corners  fold  inward  toward  the  center,  thus 
forming  a  square.     Turn  back  the  outside  corners  to  the  lower 


*TLu>rvi      u-fc 


Fig.  s 

corner,  leaving  the  two  folded  corners  standing  upright;  fold 
each  of  the  three  lower  corners  back  on  the  inside  to  the  long 
fold.  This  makes  three  folded  edges  on  which  the  boat  stands. 
(Fig.  5.) 

The    Catamaran    or    double    boat    and    the    Gondola    are 
started  alike.     Fold  the  diagonals  and  diameters ;  open ;  fold  all 


30 


INVALID   OCCUPATION 


four  corners  to  the  exact  center ;  repeat  with  the  corners  of  this 
smaller  square.  Open  out  fully,  letting  the  central  folded  square 
stand  up  like  a  table  top,  the  four  corners  standing  sharply 
folded  outward  like  a  stiff  tablecloth.  Place  one  side  of  this 
tablecloth  on  the  table  and  fold  the  central  square  up  against  it ; 
fold  back  through  the  center  of  the  square,  bringing  the  two 
upper  corners  exactly  over  the  two  lower;  crease  firmly  and 
open  on  the  long  folds  and  stand  up ;  this  forms  the  double  boat 
or  catamaran. 

Continuing  with  this,  the  gondola  is  made  by  turning  the 
corners  of  the  double  boat  back  upon  themselves,  first  from 
point  to  the  bottom  corner,  then  the  folded  corners  back  on  to 


Fig.  6 


the  side  of  the  boat;  leaving  these  tightly  folded,  open  all  the 
other  folds  to  form  a  square  box.  Now  make  a  strong  fold 
through  the  center  of  the  folded  corners  on  two  sides  of  the 
box,  bringing  the  outer  edge  just  even  with  the  bottom  edge. 
This  gives  the  suggestion  of  a  frame  with  mitered  corners,  as 
the  folding  of  the  thicker  sides  draws  the  thinner  sides  down 
so  that  they  easily  crease  lengthwise  through  the  center.  Now, 
holding  the  frame  towards  you,  bend  the  thick  sides  right  back 
so  that  they  meet  in  the  center  of  the  back.  Last,  fold  directly 
across  these  thick  sides,  which  brings  all  four  of  the  small  double 
corners  together;  holding  thus  draw  out  the  edges  on  each 
side  very  carefully  to  avoid  tearing.  This  makes  a  curious  and 
interesting  little  boat.     (Fig.  6.) 


TYPICAL   CHILDREN 


31 


The  Chinese  Junk  is  a  still  more  complicated  fold,  although 
resembling  the  gondola  so  much  as  to  be  frequently  confused 
with  it.  Begin  precisely  like  the  last,  going  on  until  the  first 
corners  have  been  folded  in  to  the  center ;  then  repeat  this  twice 
again,  making  in  all  three  sets  of  corners  folded  to  the  center. 
Then  make  the  double  boat  fold  just  as  in  the  gondola;  next 
the  sharp  corners  are  folded  inward  between  the  center  and  the 
sides,  filling  the  triangular  space  but  being  but  once  folded,  while 
in  the  gondola  they  are  twice  folded.  Next  open  to  form  the 
square  box,  and  now  loosen  and  pull  up  the  two  opposite  corners 


P«.tl     ocut 


R-lUtct 


Fig.  7 


from  the  center  on  the  ends,  having  the  small  points  on  the  out- 
side. Turn  these  small  points  right  back  again,  leaving  two  lids 
on  opposite  sides  standing  upright ;  fold  back  the  outer  points  on 
these  lids  and  crease  the  whole  lid  down  firmly  like  a  table  leaf. 
Proceed  to  fold  the  picture  frame  with  the  thick  and  thin  sides ; 
make  the  central  crease  across  the  thick  sides  and  pull  out  just 
as  in  the  gondola;  in  this  you  will  have  two  opposite  little 
corners  which,  if  turned  outward,  will  allow  the  boat  to  stand. 
Last,  pull  up  from  the  crease  at  either  end  the  folds  which 
were  the  lids  of  the  box  and  which  now  form  two  square  sails 
one  at  either  end  of  the  boat.  (Fig.  7.)  The  things  to  remem- 
ber in  this  are  that  the  corners  fold  in  three  times  before  the 


32 


INVALID   OCCUPATION 


double  boat  is  made ;  two  opposite  corncFs  are  pulled  out  to  form 
the  lids  to  the  square  box.  In  the  gondola  fold  the  square  box 
has  no  lids. 

Much  of  the  paper  folding  ordinarily  taught  results  in  rather 
meaningless  and  useless  figures ;  on  the  other  hand,  many  truly 
charming  and  useful  things  may  be  made  in  this  way.  To  fold 
what  has  been  called  "The  Nantucket  Sink"  is  well  worth 
learning,  as  it  forms  a  tolerably  strong  toy  and  is  very  cleverly 
planned.  Fold  diameters  and  diagonals,  open,  fold  all  four 
corners  to  the  exact  center  and  crease;  fold  this  double  square 
straight  through  the  center,  having  the  corners  on  the  outside. 


"^ 

■MM 

7^ 

Tur»^ 

/ 

\ 

^     bcuckwa.-rdL 

-foruwctrd 

/ 

/ 

• 

N 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

/ 

• 

Fig.  8 


Fold  these  upper  corners  of  the  present  fold,  one  backward  and 
one  forward  in  the  line  open  between  the  first  corners,  holding 
the  folded  side  up  and  folding  in  the  dotted  lines.     (Fig.  8.) 

Now  open  just  as  the  dory  was  opened  at  the  bottom  and 
crease  to  form  a  square  having  on  each  side  two  pockets  divided 
by  a  slit  from  top  to  bottom.  (Fig.  9.)  Slip  a  finger  into  each 
of  these  pockets  and  pull  out  and  crease  down,  resulting  in 
Figure  10.  Turn  paper  over  and  repeat  on  opposite  side.  Now 
fold  back  each  side  through  dotted  line.  Turn  back  a  little  half 
square  of  single  thickness  on  either  side  of  the  central  fold  on 
both  sides  of  the  paper  as  indicated  by  dotted  lines,  making  thus 
four   small   half   squares.      (Fig.    11.)      Now    fold   these   sides 


TYPICAL    CHILDREN 


33 


H 

""*" 

N    V 

X     % 

^     \ 

^     % 

J- 

X 

V      X    <>>' 
X  ^ 

%    N 

X  \ 

N  X 

\- 

Fig. 


together  and  you  have  Figure  lo  again.  Bring  the  free  edge 
at  the  bottom  up  even  with  the  folded  edge  and  crease  down 
two  neat  Httle  half  squares  at  each  end  of  this  fold.  (Fig.  12.) 
Fold  each  side  through  the  vertical  dotted  line  which  brings 
you  back  to  Figure  11.    Fold  the  sides  just  even  with  the  central 


Fig.  10 


34 


INVALID   OCCUPATION 


Fig.  II 


Fig.  12 


TYPICAL    CHILDREN 


35 


line  and  turn  the  top  point  down  to  point  of  meeting  of  the 
folded  sides.  Crease  down  very  hard  and  open.  It  will  give 
a  square,  boxlike  sink  having  two  opposite  shelves  and  standing 
on  four  pointed  legs.     (Fig.  13.) 

The  Flying  Bird  is  one  of  the  best  folds.  This,  like  many 
of  the  finest,  is  of  Japanese  origin.  Fold  diagonals  and  diam- 
eters, open,  bring  one  edge  of  the  entire  square  over  from  the 
corner  to  the  line  of  the  diagonal  crease ;  bring  the  other  over 
to  meet,  making  a  kite  shape;  unfold  and  do  the  same  from 


Louftt      Pot*^ 


Fig.  13 


each  of  the  three  remaining  corners.     Opened  flat,  the  square 
now  shows  four  intersecting  kite  shapes.     (Fig.  14.) 

Now,  with  the  exact  center  outward,  crease  so  that  four  sharp 
points  fold  upward,  two  flat,  the  two  on  the  side  being  doubled 
and  lying  turned  in  between  the  two  flat  points ;  crease  down 
well  and  get  Figure  15.  To  do  this,  the  straight  sides  must  be 
turned  in  and  the  pointed  corners  turned  out.  Holding  with 
the  long  points  downward,  turn  the  two  flat  outer  ones  up 
straight  as  far  as  they  will  go,  leaving  the  two  folded  lower 
points  downward.  In  one  of  the  doubled  points  reverse  the  fold 
diagonally  close  up  to  the  center,  repeat  on  the  second  double 


36 


INVALID    OCCUPATION 


w  -  ^                / 

1 

'                     -  V 

^"^v"^-- 

^           .''    V 

^             t 

\             ^    '                X 

\      ^v            ^>- 

A-               '      ' 

■^1*  "• 

\                         '»-' 

^*  #           / 

\         ^-^^ 

A-.     / 

-                  .               ''^ 

^    \      "d^ 

^.^       ^            '                 V 

'            ^            '      "   w 

»  »   ^  ^  •.    — •    «> 

V     1 

•1  ^ 

I 

"  ^T 

—  ♦♦ —  ^- 

'  \ 

•  • 

s                       f     \ 

f    {. 

^  ^                     / 

V      •               »    -* 

^  ^      *    • 

'           -.  < 

1           ^^  ^     ^ 

/      / 

^          1 

--      '                         •    V        \ 

r-^    ^\ 

Fig.  14 


Fig.  15 


TYPICAL    CHILDREN 


37 


point  and  on  this  one  reverse  again  very  near  the  tip.  This  gives 
Figure  i6. 

Last,  roll  the  wings  backward  from  the  front  angle  at  dotted 
line.  To  make  the  bird  fly,  hold  with  thumb  and  forefinger 
of  left  hand  at  -\-  on  back  of  wing,  and  right  hand  at  -{-  on 
front  of  neck,  then  move  right  hand  back  and  forth. 

This  bird  was  being  folded  to  teach  the  elder  of  two  little 
brothers.    Little  Sam  was  thought  too  young  to  understand  the 


Fig.  i6 


process;  he  watched  the  plain  square  of  paper  gradually  take 
shape,  and  at  last  as  it  flew  he  said  with  great  earnestness,  speak- 
ing for  the  first  time,  "Miss  I  think  when  you  grow  up 

to  be  a  man,  you  will  be  a  king ! " 

The  Japanese  employ  paper  folding  with  great  effect.  This 
same  bird  they  fold  and  vary  in  many  ways  by  turning  the  head, 
tail  and  wings  at  different  angles.  Not  turning  the  tail  up  at  all 
gives  a  white,  long-legged  stork;  pulling  the  neck  out  straight 
and  tail  straight  behind,  the  bird  is  flying  swiftly  through  the 


38 


INVALID    OCCUPATION 


air.  Best  effects  are  obtained  by  mounting  these  folded  figures 
on  a  background  slightly  sketched  in  with  water  color.  The 
Japanese  also  tint  and  decorate  the  figures  very  beautifully. 
Soldiers,  trades-people,  women  paddling  through  the  rain,  the 
umbrellas  of  folded  paper,  all  are  represented  most  artistically. 

Most  difficult  of  all,  perhaps,  is  the  folded  Japanese  Frog. 

Fold  the  diagonals,  open,  fold  diameters.  Now,  starting  from 
the  exact  center,  fold  so  that  one  of  the  diagonals  is  exactly  cov- 
ered by  one  of  the  diameters  (Fig.  if)  ;  continue  turning  in  this 
way  until  all  the  diagonals  have  been  covered  by  the  diameters, 


Fig.  17 


creasing  down  the  whole  line  A.  This  gives  when  fully  opened 
the  creases  in  Figure  18.  Those  indicated  by  the  dotted  lines  are 
next  made  by  folding  the  paper  from  the  center  of  each  side, 
bringing  the  edge  even  with  the  diameter  and  creasing  only 
from  center  of  the  side  to  the  line  of  the  kite-shaped  fold.  Open. 
Now  fold  the  dotted  lines  running  to  each  corner.  To  fold  this 
up,  fold  all  the  spaces  outside  the  star  inward,  then  fold  all  the 
lines  running  from  center  to  both  long  and  short  points  inward. 
This  will  close  the  paper  up  like  an  umbrella,  the  center  making 
the  tip.  Holding  it  folded,  go  around  and  turn  all  the  short 
points  back  towards  the  tip  as  far  as  they  will  go.    Close  it,  leav- 


TYPICAL    CHILDREN 


39 


ing  two  short  points  one  on  the  top  and  one  on  the  bottom  and 
the  other  two  folded  in  at  the  sides  much  as  in  the  bird  fold. 
It  now  is  represented  by  Figure  19.  You  have  folded  on  each 
side  two  long  points  creased  through  the  center.  Holding  with 
the  tip  upward,  fold  back  the  two  long  points  which  are  farthest 
from  you  until  the  sharp  corner  is  at  the  central  tip ;  crease 
through  center,  and  leave  closed  on  either  side.    With  frog  lying 


Fig.  18 


flat  on  table  turn  up  first  fold  at  +  ^"d  fold  outer  edge  back- 
ward to  center,  on  dotted  line.  Now  do  the  same  with  the  next 
fold  under  this  one,  making  very  long,  sharp  points.  Repeat  on 
other  side.  Now  make  two  diagonal  reverse  folds  in  the  long 
points  folded  in  underneath ;  these  form  the  front  legs ;  in  the 
upper  long  points  make  three  diagonal  reverses ;  these  form 
the  hind  legs.  Mark  the  eyes  and  mouth  and  lastly  inflate 
through  the  opening  at  back.     Made  from  tough  green  paper 


40 


INVALID    OCCUPATION 


these  are  very   clever   favors   for   St.    Patrick's   Day  or   other 
occasions. 

These  are  only  a  few  of  the  many  folds.  Books  of  directions 
may  be  found  at  the  kindergarten  supply  stores.  There  is  a 
series  by  Kate  F.  Hobart  as  well  as  others.  The  book  on  "  Scien- 
tific Paper  Folding,"  by  Prof.  David  Smith,  of  Teachers  College, 
New  York  City,  will  interest  mature  minds.     The  pupils  of  our 


+ 


Fig.  19 


TYPICAL    CHILDREN  41 

school  are  much  indebted  to  Mr.  K.  Kinonchi,  of  Kyoto,  Japan, 
for  the  gift  of  his  wonderful  books  on  paper  folding,  as  nothing 
can  rival  the  work  of  the  Kyoto  Normal  School  in  this  fascinating 
occupation. 

In  Paper  Cutting,  as  distinguished  from  folding,  there  is 
great  variety.  To  decorate  a  child's  room  tie  strings  across 
from  windows  or  doors  and  on  these  lines  hang  tiny  paper  lan- 
terns made  thus : 

Paper  Lanterns.  From  rather  firm,  colored  paper  cut  a 
strip  five  inches  long  by  four  wide.  Fold  evenly  lengthwise 
through  the  center  and  crease  very  firmly.  Cut  even  slashes 
through  th*^  folded  edge  to  within  one-half  inch  of  the  top  edges, 
each  strip  between  the  slashes  being  a  half  inch  or  a  little  less 
in  width.  Open  and  join  the  ends  by  pasting.  Push  up  rather 
than  pull  down  on  the  lantern  and  paste  a  paper  strip  over  the 
top  for  a  handle.  For  the  light,  fringe  a  strip  of  gold  paper  or 
tinfoil  and  gather  it  into  a  ball ;  suspend  this  by  a  fine  thread 
fastened  to  each  side  of  the  top  of  the  lantern. 

Apple-seed  Mousetraps.  First  save  the  plump,  brown  seeds 
from  an  apple.  Cut  an  even  pasteboard  disk,  marking  it  by  the 
top  of  a  tumbler.  Cut  another  disk,  exactly  by  the  first,  of 
bright  and  rather  strong  paper.  To  the  pasteboard  sew  the 
apple  seeds  with  heavy  black  linen  thread,  leaving  at  the  larger 
end  of  each  seed  a  long,  loose  loop  for  a  tail.  Arrange  the  mice 
in  a  nice  group  in  the  center.  Fold  the  paper  disk  four  times 
to  a  wedge-shaped  form.  Cut  a  slash  first  from  one  side  to  within 
a  little  distance  of  the  other  side,  but  never  through ;  turn  and 
cut  from  the  other  side,  alternating  until  within  half  an  inch  or 
so  of  the  point;  the  longest  slashes  begin  a  quarter  of  an  inch 
from  the  edge  of  the  disk.  (Fig,  20.)  Open,  paste  the  border 
neatly  around  the  pasteboard  and  fasten  a  bit  of  narrow  ribbon 
or  bright  thread  to  the  very  center.  As  you  lift  by  this  to  hang 
it  up,  the  mousetrap  opens.  This,  as  well  as  the  lanterns,  make 
nice  Christmas  tree  ornaments. 

May  Baskets.     There  is  surely  no  prettier  form  of  paper 


42  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

weaving  than  the  old-fashioned  May  baskets.  For  these  cut 
two  strips  of  paper  of  contrasting  color.  Six  and  one-quarter 
inches  long  by  two  and  one-quarter  wide  will  be  a  good  pro- 
portion. Fold  evenly  across  the  center  the  short  way,  divide 
the  folded  edge  into  six  strips  three-eighths  of  an  inch  wide, 
then  cut  these  double,  leaving  three-fourths  of  an  inch  on  top. 
Both  pieces  are  cut  in  the  same  way.  To  weave,  hold  one  piece 
in  the  left  hand  with  wide  edge  up ;  with  the  right  hand  take 


Fig.  20 

the  second  piece  and  hold  first  strip  near  folded  end.  Slip  this 
folded  end  between  the  first  strips  of  the  left-hand  piece  close 
up  to  the  wide  edge.  Slip  the  second  strip  of  left-hand  piece 
through  the  first  strip  of  right  hand  and  continue  until  all  the 
strips  have  been  alternately  threaded  one  through  the  other.  Be 
sure  that  they  are  slipped  through  and  not  over  or  under  the 
opposite  strips,  as  this  ties  the  work  together  and  the  basket 
cannot  be  opened ;  to  get  in  the  last  strip  requires  great  care 
and  the  first  strips  must  be  carefully  worked  up  to  the  top  to 
make  room  for  it.  The  strips  must  all  be  threaded  through  one 
another  as  a  thread  is  slipped  through  a  needle's  eye,  or  ribbon 


TYPICAL    CHILDREN 


43 


through  a  tape  needle.  Always  work  from  the  top  towards 
the  bottom  and  finish  at  the  bottom  point.  The  border  at  the 
top  may  be  scalloped  or  decorated  in  any  pretty  way.  The  handle 
is  a  Jacob's  Ladder.  To  make  this  take  two  very  long  strips  of 
the  contrasting  paper  the  same  width  as  the  strips  of  the 
basket.  Place  one  above  the  other  (Fig.  21),  and  fold  back  and 
forth,  always  from  underneath  over,  from  side  to  side.  Sew  or 
paste  this  to  the  top  of  the  side  folds  of  the  basket.    For  valen- 


FiG.  21 

tines  weave  the  basket  and  cut  the  top  heart-shaped.  Another 
pretty  way  is  to  cut  open  the  bottom  point  and  paste  in  a  small, 
stifif  cardboard  disk  for  a  bottom  so  that  the  basket  may  stand 
well. 

Another  May  basket  is  made  by  combining  paper  folding 
with  tissue  paper  decoration.  From  strong  paper  cut  an  eight- 
inch  square,  fold  diameters  and  diagonals,  fold  all  four  corners 
to  the  center  and  crease  hard.  Now  fold  back  the  corners  from 
the  center  to  the  outside  folded  edge,  turn  paper  over,  fold  all 
four  corners  to  the  center,  then  turn  back  these  inner  corners 


44  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

to  the  edge.  Now  pinch  up  the  thick  outer  corners  on  the 
diagonal  fold  so  that  the  basket  opens,  the  four  lower  points 
serving  as  a  flat  base ;  sharpen  the  folds  a  little  to  emphasize 
the  shape.  To  decorate,  cover  the  upper  and  lower  corners  with 
fancy  paper,  cut  several  thicknesses  of  tissue  paper  about  three 
inches  wide  and  plait  up  lengthwise  ;  cut  into  fringe  right  through 
the  plaits  to  within  half  an  inch  of  the  edge.  This  makes  a 
crinkled  fringe  which  is  pasted  around  to  fill  in  the  space  be- 
tween the  upper  and  lower  points.  The  handle  is  braided  tissue 
paper.     These  make  pretty  bonbonieres  or  lunch  favors. 

Paper  Box  Toys.  Among  the  most  practical  of  the  tempo- 
rary toys  are  those  made  from  pasteboard  boxes.  These  stand 
considerable  wear.  A  number  of  small  boxes  exactly  alike  were 
taken  into  class  and  the  pupils  given  an  opportunity  to  show 
originality  in  transforming  these  into  toys.  The  illustration  on 
the  opposite  page  shows  the  result.  The  wheels  of  the  go-cart 
are  button  molds;  large  buttons  might  also  be  used.  Attractive 
cottages  may  be  made,  discarding  the  box  cover  and  adding 
pointed  ends  for  the  gables,  while  corrugated  pasteboard,  used 
so  largely  for  protection  in  shipping  bottles,  etc.,  makes  a  good 
roof,  suggesting  tiling.  A  hole  cut  in  the  roof  admits  the 
chimney.  The  inside  of  the  cover  of  a  much  larger  box  makes 
the  yard  to  be  laid  out  as  taste  directs.  The  edge  forms  the 
wall  or  fence. 

There  are  boxes,  often  holding  druggist's  supplies,  which 
are  put  together  with  a  fancy  strip  of  bright  tin  over  the  corners. 
These,  if  of  proper  size,  make  the  finest  of  cook  stoves.  The 
box  stands  on  the  cover,  to  the  top  corners  of  which  it  is  sewed ; 
oven  doors  are  cut,  with  shoe  buttons  punched  in  for  knobs. 
The  top  of  the  cover  forms  the  bottom  of  the  oven;  holes  are 
cut  in  the  top,  an  oval  tube  for  the  stovepipe  of  stiff  paper 
fits  into  a  similarly  shaped  hole  in  the  stove ;  covers  are  cut  of 
pasteboard  a  little  larger  than  the  stove  holes,  and  a  common 
button- fastener  cautiously  straightened  out  makes  a  neat  little 
lifter.     The  box  may  be  blackened  with  shoe  dressing  and  re- 


TYPICAL    CHILDREN  45 

spends  with  a  fine  shine.  One  nurse  remarked  in  the  Saturday 
class,  "Regular  Saturday  job,  blacking  the  cook  stove." 

A  square  box  cut  as  in  the  illustration  makes  the  dining 
table,  a  pound  candy  box  the  cupboard.  Dishes  may  be  made 
of  tiny  scraps  of  kid  or  thin  leather,  cut  perhaps  from  an  old 
shoe.  For  this  one  must  mark  and  cut  a  perfect  disk,  using 
spools  of  different  sizes  for  guides.  Be  careful  to  cut  them 
perfectly  round  without  angles.  Lay  these  flat,  face  down,  upon 
a  hot  stove  cover.  In  a  few  seconds  they  will  puff  up  in  the 
center,  while  the  edges  will  be  permanently  drawn  in  to  form 
a  shapely  bowl  or  plate.  They  must  be  closely  watched  and 
taken  off  very  quickly. 

Clothespin  Dolls  may  be  very  cleverly  costumed.  The 
overall  children,  the  Puritans  and,  in  fact,  all  sorts  of  noted 
characters  may  be  produced  by  dressing  clothespins  in  paper. 
Dolls  of  string  tied  first  like  a  tassel,  then  dividing  off  arms 
and  legs  and  braiding  hair.  Rag  dolls  a  nurse  should  always 
know  how  to  make ;  more  will  be  said  of  these  in  the  old  ladies' 
lesson.  The  book,  "Lady  Hollyhock  and  Her  Daughter;  or, 
A  Book  of  Nature  Dolls,"  is  an  inspiration ;  written  by  Margaret 
Coulson  Walker;  published  by  Baker  and  Taylor,  New  York. 

Eggshells.  From  eggshells  one  may  make  pitchers,  baskets, 
cradles,  dishes,  boats,  etc.  The  eggs  should  be  broken  only  at 
one  end  and  a  small  hole  is  necessary,  but  they  need  not  be  blown 
for  most  articles. 

For  a  pitcher,  cut  carefully  around  the  top  or  small  end, 
cutting  down  in  a  broad  point  on  one  side  for  the  nose.  The  cut- 
ting must  be  done  with  great  care,  and  a  pair  of  manicure  scissors 
held  with  the  convex  side  towards  the  eggshell  will  be  found 
useful.  If  the  shell  is  fresh  it  will  cut  much  better  than  when 
old  and  dry.  Bind  the  top  edge  with  a  narrow  strip  of  pasted 
paper;  cut  a  triangular  piece  and  apply  to  form  the  nose,  which 
should  be  pinched  up  as  applied.  Another  stouter  piece  of  several 
thicknesses  forms  the  handle,  and  several  little  fluffy  tissue  mats 
form  a  sort  of  nest  which  suggests  a  doily ;  in  this  put  a  liberal 


46  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

amount  of  paste  and  set  the  pitcher  in  to  harden.  This  makes 
it  stand  upright.  Very  charming  decorations  may  be  had  by  cut- 
ting out  the  tiniest  flowers  and  designs  from  bits  of  caHco  or 
chintz  and  pasting  on  the  shells.  The  illustration  opposite 
page  132  shows  the  cradle  and  basket  also. 

Fruit  and  Vegetable  Animals.  Many  of  the  animals  made 
from  vegetables  and  fruits  described  in  Chapter  VIII  will  he 
useful  in  this  case.  Ideas  will  come  from  all  sides  for  this  lesson. 
The  things  which  one  used  to  do  as  a  little  child  and  had  almost 
forgotten  are  revived.  The  magic  of  something  made  from  noth- 
ing has  power  to  stimulate  the  child's  wonder  at  what  seems  to 
him  actual  creation. 

Cork  and  Pin  Furniture.  Select  a  rather  thin  cork,  cover 
it  with  a  bit  of  cloth,  ribbon  or  velvet,  just  as  a  button  mold  is 
covered.  Stick  into  this  quite  firmly  some  common  or  fancy- 
headed  pins  to  form  the  back  of  a  chair.  Weave  around  these 
pins  worsted,  string  or  thread  of  almost  any  sort  to  form  a  close 
back.  A  patient  was  given  a  small  box  of  black-headed  pins  to 
make  some  of  these  chairs ;  she  used  up  the  pins,  then  covered 
the  box  neatly  with  velvet  and,  using  this  for  a  seat,  made  a 
sofa  in  the  same  way.  The  four  legs  are  connected  by  a  con- 
tinuous thread,  woven  around  from  pin  to  pin  for  a  little  depth 
to  form  a  neat  finish. 

On  no  one  case  would  all  of  these  suggestions  be  employed, 
but  given  a  few  well-learned  principles  any  appreciative  nurse 
will  quickly  apply  these  to  whatever  material  she  may  find.  Wher- 
ever one  turns  some  contribution  waits.  And  what  does  it  all 
amount  to  to  the  little  child  emerging  from  his  pneumonia?  He 
remembers  a  strange,  new  sense  of  pressure  on  his  chest,  but 
with  this  troubled  memory  comes  another — a  new  world  which 
came  little  by  little  into  his  sick-room.  Queer  dollies  danced  for 
him,  stories  covered  dingy  walls,  houses  were  built  on  his  very 
bed;  suppers  were  served  in  fine  style  and,  as  the  weight  on  his 
chest  lightened,  more  jolly  things  happened.  Best  of  all,  some- 
body, who  seemed  to  be  able  to  bring  about  all  these  things,  was 
happy  with  him. 


CHAPTER   V 

RESTRICTED   POSITIONS 

Among  the  large  number  of  cases  treated  by  orthopedic 
appliances  are  found  children  suffering  for  months  and  years 
with  hip  disease  or  that  tubercular  affection  known  as  Pott's 
disease  and  resulting  in  the  so-called  hunchback.  Under  modern 
methods  much  of  the  serious  deformity  arising  from  these  con- 
ditions is  not  only  greatly  modified  but,  in  many  instances, 
completely  overcome.  To  bring  about  this  great  end,  however, 
severe  treatment  must  often  be  instituted  and  the  child  strapped 
with  great  firmness  to  an  inflexible  frame.  This  frame  is  usu- 
ally made  of  gas  pipe,  a  little  larger  than  the  whole  body.  This 
lies  upon  a  firm  bed  and  holds  its  occupant  in  a  truly  iron  grip. 
In  spite  of  all  this  the  child  may  lead  a  happy  and  far  from 
useless  life.  The  arms  and  hands  are  entirely  free  and  also 
the  head  in  a  large  number  of  cases.  In  some,  however,  the 
head  also  is  grasped  by  auxiliary  apparatus.  Only  during  acute 
conditions  is  this  most  rigorous  treatment  continued,  but  it  may 
last  for  a  long  period. 

In  addition  to  these  diseases  one  must  include  in  the  studies 
for  restricted  positions  all  those  of  traumatic  origin,  as  fracture 
of  femur,  etc.  In  a  case  of  accident  one  may  find  both  femur 
and  left  radius  or  humerus  fractured.  This  will  mean  at  best 
six  or  eight  weeks  of  strict  fixation.  In  a  large  majority  of  cases 
the  trouble  is  local  and  the  patient  is  like  an  animal  caught  in 
a  trap.  Here,  indeed,  occupation  treatment  is  of  paramount 
importance.  Happiness  and  contentment  will  certainly  prove 
conducive  to  rest,  and  absolute  rest  is  the  foremost  condition 
of  recovery. 

With  such  a  case  there  is  no  propping  up  in  the  ordinary 
sense.    An  incline  of  the  whole  frame  or  bed  on  which  the  patient 

47 


48  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

rests  is  sometimes  permitted  and  in  some  cases  the  head  may 
be  propped  to  a  considerable  angle;  but  it  will  be  readily  seen 
that  in  order  to  do  effective  work  under  these  circumstances  a 
properly  adjusted  inclined  desk  must  be  obtained.  The  illus- 
tration shows  one  of  simplest  construction  made  by  the  hospital 
engineer,  which  might  possibly  be  produced  by  the  nurse  her- 
self. Fitted  over  the  patient's  body  at  an  incline  arranged  for 
best  vision  much  work  may  be  made  possible.  Suppose  this 
to  be  the  case  of  a  girl  of  twelve  years  or  more.  Although  there 
may  be  no  real  poverty  there  is  sure  to  be  the  inevitable  strain 
of  a  long  and  tedious  illness.  For  this  reason  it  has  seemed 
wise  to  consider  in  this  lesson  the  making  of  such  articles  as 
shall  possess  a  certain  market  value.  Even  a  little  money  earned 
by  such  a  patient  seems  worthy  of  consideration  in  offsetting 
the  financial  strain. 

Rake  Knitting.  One  of  the  best  forms  of  work  for  such 
a  subject  is  the  sort  of  knitting  known  as  rake- work.  This  is 
done  on  a  wooden  rake  which  may  be  made  in  various  sizes. 
There  is  a  patent  rake  made  by  The  Polypus  Knitter  Company, 
New  York  City,  and  sold  at  Isaac  Allen's,  Winter  Street,  Boston, 
Massachusetts.  The  price  is  seventy-five  cents.  The  actual  cost 
would  be  very  little  if  some  friend  who  could  use  tools  could 
make  it. 

In  a  strip  of  wood  fifteen  and  one-half  inches  long  by  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch  wide  bore  twenty  holes  the  size  of  a  large 
lead  pencil ;  these  should  be  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  apart. 
In  these  holes  set  as  many  wooden  pegs  or  teeth,  cut  one  and 
three-quarter  inches  long.  These  may  be  made  from  a  piece  of 
dowel.  In  one  instance,  where  this  was  not  readily  obtained, 
the  pegs  were  made  from  penny  pencils.  On  these  rakes  may 
be  made  afghans  both  for  children's  carriages  and  couches ; 
snug  little  jackets  are  also  made  which  are  very  warm.  For  a 
child's  carriage  robe  one  pound  of  eightfold  Germantown  wool 
will  be  needed.     Only  heavy  wool  is  suited  to  this  work. 

To  knit,  tie  a  loop  and  slip  over  the  first  peg,  then  wind 


RESTRICTED    POSITIONS  49 

around  each  peg,  being  careful  that  the  straight  thread  running 
between  the  pegs  is  always  kept  on  the  same  side  of  the  rake, 
never  crossing  between  the  pegs.     (Fig.  22.)     Turn,  and  wind 


Fig.  22 

back  again,  observing  the  same  rule,  the  straight  thread  run- 
ning exactly  above  the  first ;  turn,  and  begin  to  wind  back  in 
the  same  way,  but  as  you  wind,  having  three  on  each  peg,  pick 
up  the  lowest  stitch  of  the  three  and  pull  it  up  and  over  the 
two  above  and  over  the  top  of  the  peg.  A  common  knitting 
needle  is  best  to  pick  it  up  with.  In  this  way  continue,  always 
slipping  the  lowest  loop  over  the  two  upper  ones.  This  con- 
stitutes the  entire  process,  except  as  the  required  length  is 
reached  for  the  strip  all  the  double  loops  are  slipped  off  and 
crocheted  across  to  prevent  raveling.  Three  strips  the  width  of 
the  rake  make  the  afghan.  Crochet  these  together  and  put  on 
border  or  fringe  as  one  likes.  Extra  wool  will  be  required  for 
the  fringe.  The  robe  may  be  lined  with  thin  silk.  The  wool 
costs  two  dollars  and  a  quarter  per  pound.  The  afghan  sells 
readily  for  five. 

The  Hug-me-tight  Jacket  is  made  in  the  same  way.  A  strip 
the  width  of  the  rake  and  the  length  of  the  back  from  collar 
to  waist  line  is  first  knitted.  Knit  a  second  strip  the  width  of 
the  rake  and  the  length  of  the  underarm  seam.  Take  the  stitches 
off  four  pegs  on  one  side,  on  a  string,  temporarily.  Continue 
knitting  until  you  reach  the  outer  tip  of  the  shoulder,  which 
will  be  about  fifteen  rows.  You  have  on  your  rake  sixteen 
stitches ;  these  should  now  be  reduced  to  ten,  which  is  one-half 
of  those  on  the  back  piece.  Beginning  at  the  shoulder  end  care- 
fully slip  the  first  two  on  to  the  next  peg,  making  four  on  the 
peg;  repeat  this  on  the  next  two  pegs,  after  which  slip  the  first 
four  up  one  peg.     Proceed  in  this  way  until  you  have  only  ten 


50  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

pegs  in  use.  Knit  off  these  double  stitches  by  sHpping  the  under 
two  over  the  upper  two.  When  across  turn  and  knit  back  to 
next  the  last  peg ;  leave  this  and  return  ;  omit  one  on  the  shoulder 
end  every  alternate  row  until  all  are  knit,  and  you  have  a  tri- 
angular gore,  or  yoke,  on  the  shoulder  and  ten  stitches  on  the 
rake.  Slip  off  carefully  and  crochet  or  sew  to  the  ten  on  one 
side  of  the  back.  Make  the  second  front  in  the  same  way  and 
join  to  the  other  side  of  back  and  underarm.  Bind  the  edge 
with  ribbon  and  run  ribbon  around  waist  line.  Tie  in  front, 
crochet  scallop  around  armholes  and  waist.  This  rake-work  is 
wonderfully  adaptable  to  limited  powers. 

Cloth  Animals.  In  all  the  toy  stores  much  is  made  of 
stuffed  cloth  animals.  These  are  turned  out  in  large  numbers 
by  factories  and  command  a  very  good  price.  Perhaps  no  toys 
are  better  loved  than  are  these.  Children  will  cling  to  a  dilapi- 
dated elephant  or  pussy  cat  to  the  discarding  of  all  more  elegant 
toys.  How  many  babies  go  to  sleep  hugging  these  favorites ! 
One  little  boy  who  was  himself  a  rather  hot  child  insisted  on 
hugging  an  old  disreputable  "Jumbo"  so  large  and  warm  that 
his  mother  had  to  steal  it  away  after  he  was  fast  asleep  each 
night  to  prevent  too  profuse  perspiration.  Long  after  this  same 
child  was  in  school  and  the  elephant's  head  torn  off  save  an  inch 
or  two,  he  was  still  cherished.  Arriving  one  day  while  the  boy 
was  in  school,  his  aunt  picked  up  the  poor  beast,  mended  his 
neck  and  put  on  a  smart  red  leather  collar  to  cover  the  scar. 
In  less  than  two  minutes  after  the  boy's  return  he  had  pounced 
upon  Jumbo  and  rushed  off  with  him  to  shut  himself  into  the 
parlor.  After  a  time  he  emerged,  and  stole  up  to  whisper  in 
his  aunt's  ear,  "While  we  were  in  the  parlor  Jummy  asked  me 
to  thank  you  for  the  stitches  you  put  into  him."  A  certain 
lawyer  has  never  been  willing  to  part  with  his  Canton  flannel 
elephant,  but  keeps  him  in  his  den. 

To  buy  these  animals  requires  considerable  money.  It  is  not 
easy  to  obtain  the  patterns  of  many ;  elephant,  dog,  rabbit  and 
possibly  a  few  others  may  be  bought  at  the  various  pattern  stores, 


RESTRICTED   POSITIONS  51 

but  it  is  quite  possible  to  take  from  these  finer  store  animals  a 
pattern  without  injury  to  the  toy.  This  is  done  by  carefully 
stretching  thin  cotton  cloth  and  basting  closely  to  the  seams  of 
the  model ;  this  is  best  done  with  an  overhand  stitch.  One  part 
at  a  time  is  covered  and  cut  around,  allowing  for  a  quarter-inch 
seam,  then  clipping  the  stitches.  In  this  way  take  each  part.  One- 
half  the  piece  is  sufficient  to  take  in  parts  which  are  to  be  cut 
folded.  The  best  material  is  usually  Canton  flannel  or,  in  some 
cases,  shaggy  cloaking.  Many  expensive  models  are  made  of 
velveteen.  In  cutting  out  be  sure  that  the  nap  runs  the  right  way. 
Bits  of  faded  pink  ribbon  or  silk  make  the  lining  for  the  ears. 
Shoe  buttons,  nail-heads,  beads,  or  black-headed  pins  may  be  used 
for  eyes.  The  whiskers  are  made  from  the  bristles  from  an  old 
floor  brush  threaded  into  a  needle  and  sewed  in.  Baste  the  parts 
carefully  and  closely,  allowing  seams  never  less  than  an  eighth  of 
an  inch  deep ;  stitch  by  machine  and  turn.  If  of  some  size,  it  will 
be  best  to  slip  some  sticks  into  the  legs,  as  this  prevents  the  bend 
near  the  body.  For  a  large  elephant  broomsticks  may  be  sawed 
and  used.  The  cotton  stuffing  should  be  packed  around  the  sticks. 
A  pair  of  surgical  dressing  forceps  will  be  found  very  useful  in 
stuffing  the  smaller  parts.  One  of  the  class  triumphs  was  a  pair 
of  real  tusks  made  for  the  big  elephant  from  the  handles  of  two 
old  toothbrushes,  made  by  the  engineer  with  a  hack  saw.  Holes 
were  bored  by  which  they  were  sewed  to  the  head. 

The  stripes  and  mottlings  can  be  made  with  paint  brush  and 
ink  or  other  color,  but  one  should  remember  that  it  is  the  habit 
of  the  infant  to  put  toys  headfirst  into  the  mouth,  and  there- 
fore it  will  not  do  to  use  harmful  paints.  One  baby  insisted 
upon  sucking  a  camel's  head  all  through  whooping  cough,  but 
strange  to  say  the  camel  never  whooped  once.  To  make  these 
animals  well  requires  certain  practice,  but  many  an  invalid  has 
earned  a  good  sum  in  this  way.  Of  course  the  machine  work 
must  be  done  by  the  nurse.  These  animals  should  always  be 
stuffed  hard.  The  amount  of  cotton  consumed  by  an  elephant 
is  truly  great.     One  non-ambitious  patient  for  whom  the  broom- 


52  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

stick  legs  had  been  provided  decided  to  use  but  one,  letting  the 
other  three  legs  go  singularly  limp,  as  was  indeed  the  entire  beast. 
She  gave  as  a  reason  that  she  didn't  feel  very  strong,  but  strove 
to  make  up  the  deficiency  in  legs  by  a  much  bedizened  blanket. 
Any  healthy  child  would  surely  have  reduced  this  animal  to  flat- 
ness in  a  brief  space  of  time.  Among  the  animals  turned  out 
by  the  class  were  dogs,  cats,  rabbits,  hares,  elephants,  pigs  and 
bears. 

Rag  Dolls  of  many  varieties  are  included  in  this  lesson,  as 
also  in  some  of  the  others.  The  double-headed  topsy-turvys, 
white  and  black,  always  sell  well.  This  idea  took  root  in  the 
hospital  one  winter.  One  patient,  unable  for  a  long  time  to  earn 
money,  began  making  these.  Long  after  she  was  discharged  she 
returned,  reporting  that  she  had  made  and  sold  five  hundred. 
To  make  these,  two  separate  dolls  as  far  as  the  waist  line  are 
made  and  stuffed ;  they  are  then  sewed  together  around  the  waist, 
not  flattened.  The  arms  are  made  separate  and  stuffed  only  in 
hand  and  forearm,  the  upper  arms  being  left  entirely  limp.  These 
are  then  attached  to  the  body  and  readily  fall  when  the  doll  is 
inverted.  The  dress  skirt  is  long  enough  to  cover  completely 
the  lower  doll.  This  is  made  double,  of  two  kinds  of  material, 
one  gay  and  conspicuous  for  the  Dinah,  the  other  of  dainty,  light 
goods  for  the  white  dolly.  The  Dinah  wears  a  turban,  the  other 
doll  a  pretty  sunbonnet. 

The  little  dolls  from  the  stores  may  be  dressed  wholly  in 
crocheted  clothing.  Every  piece  of  one  suit  began  with  thirty 
stitches.  Cunning  little  boy-dolls  were  dressed  in  red  silkateen 
crocheted  trousers  and  blouse.  A  little  red  union  suit  was  first 
made,  a  cap  of  Harvard  crimson  was  set  on  the  yellow  Dutch-cut 
hair,  and  a  white  H  on  the  red  sleeve.  Two  very  dainty  little 
walking  dolls  from  Paris  were  dressed  in  these  crocheted  dresses 
and  jackets,  with  charming  little  flappy  brim  hats  to  match.  Fine 
split  zephyr  is  best  for  these  suits. 

The  quaint  little  Nut  Dolls,  made  from  a  roll  of  cloth  to  the 
top  of  which  is  fastened  a  hickory  nut  with  pointed  nose,  may 


RESTRICTED   POSITIONS  53 

be  dressed  as  old-time  nurses  or  as  nice  old  ladies  in  black  silk 
gowns,  caps  and  kerchiefs.  The  nut  is  fastened  by  binding  a 
strip  of  cotton  over  the  nut  and  sewing  it  to  either  side  of  the 
doll.  One  clever  woman  always  clipped  a  little  white  hair  from 
the  family  cat  to  serve  for  the  locks  of  these  old  ladies. 

There  is  always  a  good  sale  for  doll's  clothing  if  well  made. 
The  dolls  from  the  stores  come  in  a  definite  scale  of  sizes.  If 
clothes  are  made  by  these  they  will  be  sure  to  fit. 

Weaving.  Any  rectangular  frame  may  be  turned  into  a 
simple  hand-loom  by  driving  in  small  brads,  or  wire  nails,  very 
near  together,  across  the  top  of  opposite  ends.  On  these  the  warp 
is  stretched  as  tightly  as  possible.  This  may  be  of  thread,  silk, 
cotton,  linen,  wool,  raffia  or,  in  fact,  anything  which  may  be 
woven.    The  filling  may  be  even  more  varied,  as  no  strength  is 


3 


i.Uc    V.  «  J 


Fig.  23 

here  required.  On  these  little  looms  one  may  weave  rugs  for 
doll  houses  and  all  sorts  of  mats,  working  out  varied  designs 
and  color  schemes.  One  thing  which  has  to  be  constantly  guarded 
against  is  the  drawing  in  of  the  middle  of  the  warp,  making  the 
rug  hourglass  shape  rather  than  a  true  square  or  oblong.  To 
overcome  this  tendency  long  knitting  needles  are  sometimes  placed 
at  the  sides  and  woven  over  with  the  outside  warp  threads,  to  be 
withdrawn  when  the  work  is  finished;  but  even  then  constant 
vigilance  is  necessary  to  prevent  the  pulling  in.  The  best  and 
altogether  satisfactory  contrivance  for  this  is  made  of  two  strips 
of  wood,  long  and  narrow  and  dove-tailing  in  the  center.  This  is 
called  the  temple.  (Fig.  23.)  In  both  middle  and  side  strips 
holes  are  bored  exactly  opposite,  and  as  the  middle  strip  is  slipped 
in  to  the  required  length  two  pegs  are  slipped  through.     Sharp 


54 


INVALID    OCCUPATION 


wire  nails  on  the  end  prick  through  and  stretch  the  cloth.     The 
holes  must  correspond  in  all  three  strips. 

A  good  deal  of  interest  has  been  shown  in  the  weaving  of 
little  raffia  bags  over  a  cardboard  frame.  A  long  strip  of  thin 
cardboard  perhaps  eight  by  five  inches  is  punched  across  either 
end,  with  holes  set  very  closely  together.  Through  these  the 
warp  is  threaded,  keeping  the  strands  all  on  one  side.  When 
filled  the  cardboard  is  folded  across  the  center  so  that  the  holes 
come  exactly  opposite.  Now  add  to  one  end  just  one  extra  strand 
half  the  length  of  the  others  to  give  an  uneven  number.    Begin 


Fig.  24 

to  weave  at  the  bottom,  weaving  right  around  the  doubled  card, 
working  in  any  stripe  or  pattern  desired;  fill  closely  to  the  top 
and  fasten.  Now  cut  the  board  out  and  a  neat  bag  results.  This 
may  be  finished  by  a  buttonhole  stitch  around  the  top  and  two 
handles  worked  over  with  the  same  stitch.  In  all  this  weaving 
a  large  tape  or  ribbon  needle  may  be  used  in  place  of  a  shuttle. 
In  the  looms  a  straight  stick  the  size  of  a  lead  pencil  may  be 
laid  across  the  warp  threads  and  attached  to  each  alternate  strand 
by  a  sort  of  coarse  buttonhole  stitch  done  with  string  around 
both  strand  and  stick.  This  stick  is  pushed  up  to  the  top  and 
slipped  down  after  every  few  threads  of  filling  are  put  in  to 
act  as  a  reed  to  bat  the  work  up  closely. 


RESTRICTED    POSITIONS  55 

Doll's  Hammock.  A  clever  method  of  weaving  a  doll's 
hammock  is  to  cut  from  a  pasteboard  box,  as,  for  instance,  a 
tailor's  box,  an  oblong  measuring  perhaps  twelve  by  nine  and 
one-half  inches.  Round  each  end  as  shown  in  Figure  24,  and 
cut  the  notches  one-quarter  of  an  inch  apart;  this  gives  thirty- 
five  notches  with  an  inch  and  one-quarter  border  on  each  side 
left  unnotched.  At  the  points  X  and  X  sew  two  brass  rings. 
Using  a  ball  of  very  strong,  colored  twine,  begin  by  tying  it  to 
one  ring,  leaving  a  half  yard  or  so  free  end.  From  this  knot 
carry  the  ball  end  up  to  the  outer  notch  on  the  same  side,  straight 
down  on  the  other  side  to  the  outer  notch  on  the  other  end, 
over  this  and  up  to  the  second  ring.  Previous  to  this  another 
three-quarters  of  a  yard  free  twine  should  have  been  cut  and  tied 
to  this  second  ring.  With  these  two  free  ends,  one  at  either  ring, 
the  warp,  running  from  ring  to  notches  and  to  second  ring,  is 
buttonholed  or  crocheted  to  the  ring.  By  this  means  it  is  not 
necessary  to  draw  the  real  warp  through  the  ring,  but  merely 
turn  it  and  take  the  stitch  through  with  the  free  cord.  In  this 
way  the  warp  is  all  put  on,  passing  through  each  notch  and 
terminating  at  the  last  ring.  The  weaving  is  done  beginning 
on  the  side  of  the  rings,  and  about  two  inches  from  the  notches ; 
it  is  simple  in  and  out  weaving,  a  ribbon  needle  being  used  as  a 
shuttle.  Continue  across  the  entire  back  and  over  the  second 
end  to  match  the  first.  When  complete  clip  the  stitches,  holding 
the  rings  to  the  board,  and  remove  the  board,  leaving  a  hammock 
ready  to  hang  up.  The  line  on  the  sides  is  a  guide  in  keeping 
the  filling  from  drawing  in,  and  it  is  easier  to  leave  a  loop  of  the 
cord  to  form  a  loop  fringe  at  each  turn.  Various  patterns  may 
be  introduced.  As  the  weaving  goes  on  the  tension  on  the  warp 
becomes  greater,  so  that  the  pasteboard  curves ;  but  this  proves 
an  advantage,  as  the  warp  is  thus  kept  taut.  There  seems  to  be 
no  reason  why  more  elaborate  weaving  of  small  pieces  may  not 
be  done  in  this  same  way.  Using  wool  for  filling,  a  very  close, 
even  weave  results,  which  looks  not  unHke  the  Navajo  blankets. 
These,  it  will  be  remembered,  are  woven  on  a  still  simpler  loom 


56  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

consisting  of  two  sticks,  the  upper  held  by  the  ends  in  a  pair  of 
forked  sticks  stuck  in  the  ground,  the  lower  weighted  with  stones. 

ScRAPBOOKS  of  various  kinds  belong  in  this  lesson,  but  will 
be  described  in  the  later  lesson  on  home  bookbinding. 

Penwipers.  Describing  a  few  only  among  the  countless 
numbers,  the  Black  Cat  Balls  will  come  first.  Cut  two  disks 
of  pasteboard  marked  by  the  top  of  a  teacup  and  cut  out  the 
centers,  leaving  a  rim  about  three-fourths  of  an  inch  wide.  Place 
these  two  pasteboard  rings  together.  Take  one  skein  of  black 
Germantown  wool,  cut  it  right  through  once  and  wind  the  whole 
skein  together  over  the  rings  so  as  to  completely  cover  and  fill 
the  entire  central  space.  It  will  be  found  easier  to  pull  the  last 
of  the  skein  through  with  a  crochet  or  button  hook.  When 
crowded  full,  clip  through  the  wool  on  the  outside  of  the  ring 
right  around.  Now  with  a  strong,  black  shoe  lacing  tie  very 
tightly  between  the  two  rings,  which  must  be  pressed  slightly 
apart.  Tear  out  the  rings,  leaving  a  rough  ball  hanging  by  the 
shoe  lacing.  Clip  this  to  a  very  even  ball.  From  double-faced 
or  heavy  ribbon  cut  two  black  ears ;  sew  these  deep  down  among 
the  wool.  Roll  up  a  bit  of  pink  ribbon  for  a  nose  and  sew  in 
also.  Stick  two  black-headed  pins  through  two  amber  glass  beads 
and  stick  into  the  ball  for  eyes.  From  a  soft  floor  brush  cut 
white  bristles,  tie  in  little  bunches  and  fasten  with  glue  deep 
down  among  the  wool  for  whiskers  and  eye-whiskers.  Last 
replace  the  shoe  lacing  ends  by  an  orange  ribbon  to  hang  up  by. 
Calico,  Maltese  and  other  cats  are  made  in  the  same  way. 

Candle  Penwiper.  With  fine  wool,  or  silk,  make  a  chain 
of  fourteen  stitches,  join;  in  short  crochet  stitch  pick  up  each 
stitch  in  the  chain,  increasing  in  every  alternate  stitch,  i.  e.,  make 
two  stitches  in  every  other  chain  stitch.  Continue  in  this  way 
until  you  have  a  mat  the  size  of  a  teacup  in  seven  pie-shaped 
gores.  Now  begin  in  the  center  and  crochet  in  each  stitch  around 
the  hole.  Continue  up  without  increasing  for  one  and  one-half 
inches,  then  with  white  wool,  or  silk,  continue  to  form  the  candle 
as  high  as  desired ;  narrow  off  at  the  top  and  close  entirely.     In- 


RESTRICTED    POSITIONS  57 

sert  a  black  thread  wick  in  top.  Make  a  scallop  border  around 
the  mat,  and  also  where  the  white  candle  begins.  This  forms 
the  cup  for  the  stick.  Roll  a  strip  of  note  paper  just  the  length 
of  the  candle  and  large  enough  to  fill  the  inside ;  slip  it  up  into 
the  candle  from  the  bottom ;  cut  two  or  three  disks  of  chamois 
a  trifle  smaller  than  the  mat  and  fasten  to  the  bottom  of  the 
mat.  Crochet  or  buttonhole  over  a  small  brass  ring  with  the 
color  of  the  stick  and  add  a  row  of  white  and  sew  edgewise  to 
the  candlestick  for  a  handle. 

Turtle  Penwiper.  For  these  save  English  walnut  shells 
in  perfect  halves.  Bore  four  small  holes  near  the  edge  to  sew 
through.  -  Paint  the  outside  to  simulate  a  turtle  shell,  varnish; 
cut  head,  tail  and  legs  of  black,  thick  cloth  and  sew  to  a  mat  of 
cloth,  then  sew  on  the  shell;  fasten  chamois  leaves  underneath 

Picture  Frames.  Many  picture  frames  cut  from  paste- 
board and  covered  with  one  layer  of  sheet  wadding  and  then 
with  thin  leather,  silk,  cretonne  or  other  materials  were  included 
in  this  lesson.  The  silk  frames  were  decorated  with  ribbon  work 
embroidery ;  fine  rococo  ribbon  is  threaded  directly  into  a  small 
darning  needle  and  the  flower  pattern  produced  by  sewing  with 
the  ribbon  alone.  Beads  and  nail-heads  also  were  used  in  deco- 
rating suede  leather  frames.  A  piece  of  transparent  celluloid 
is  used  in  place  of  glass  and  a  pasteboard  back  a  trifle  smaller 
than  the  frame  glued  on,  leaving  an  opening  at  the  top  for  slip- 
ping in  the  picture.  Rings  were  used  to  hang  the  frame  by  or 
a  standard  of  stiff  pasteboard  attached. 

The  decorating  of  paper  charlotte  russe  cases  for  luncheons 
affords  profitable  work.  These  cases  cost  only  a  few  cents  a 
dozen,  and  give  great  opportunity  for  dainty  device  and  color. 

The  possibilities  of  this  lesson  are  very  great,  and  new  sug- 
gestions will  always  be  welcome. 


CHAPTER  VI 

IN    QUARANTINE 

No  nurse  who  has  had  the  care  of  a  child  through  scarlet 
fever  can  feel  that  she  can  afford  to  set  aside  anything  which 
offers  help  or  suggestion  for  those  long,  distracting  hours,  days, 
and  weeks  when,  no  longer  ill,  the  child  feels  keenly  his  restric- 
tions and  behaves  accordingly.  Her  only  defense  will  consist 
in  the  fertiHty  of  her  resources. 

How  may  this  period  be  made  one  of  pleasure  and  profit  to 
both  nurse  and  patient?  In  considering  the  work  for  contagious 
cases  two  leading  principles  have  been  allowed  to  dominate.  In 
the  first  the  aim  has  been  to  employ  no  material  which  may  not 
be  completely  destroyed,  but,  at  the  same  time,  to  teach  with 
this  destructible  material  an  indestructible  principle.  The  child 
then  comes  out  of  quarantine  the  richer  for  the  time  spent  in 
seclusion.  The  second  aim  is  to  find  such  materials  as  will  stand 
the  test  of  complete  and  satisfactory  disinfection,  so  that  the 
products  may  be  disposed  of  without  suspicion. 

Paper  Cutting  is,  of  course,  one  of  the  mainstays  of  this 
period.  A  word  as  to  the  kind  of  paper  best  suited  to  this  purpose 
may  be  of  service.  If  one  attempts  to  buy  colored  paper  it  almost 
certainly  results  in  a  collection  of  strong,  rather  crude  colors ; 
if,  on  the  other  hand,  an  assortment  of  colored  waste  paper  be 
made,  a  wholly  different  effect  may  be  obtained.  Papers  from 
bundles,  backs  of  catalogues,  envelopes,  common  tissue,  the  green 
wax  paper  from  the  florists,  ordinary  white  wax  paper,  colored 
magazine  covers,  nothing  is  discarded.  Take  all  this  collection 
and  arrange,  carefully  putting  all  the  blues  together,  the  greens, 
and  so  forth.  When  this  color-box  is  ready  select  some  rather 
simple  picture  to  reproduce.  In  this  lesson  it  has  been  the 
custom  to  distribute  post  cards  chosen  for  the  purpose.    These 

58 


THE    ORICIXAL   POST   CARD 


crT-PArr.u  RErRonrrTioN' 


Pnxes^ 


IN    QUARANTINE  59 

are  copied  in  enlarged  form  in  the  cut  paper  picture.  In  this 
reproduction  no  color  is  applied,  as  paint  or  any  other  medium, 
save  the  papers.  No  drawing  or  tracing  is  done.  Only  scissors 
and  paste  are  used.  The  results  have  been  truly  charming  and 
far  more  attractive  than  the  model.  A  pale  blue,  plain  paper  is 
pasted  evenly  to  cover  perhaps  two-thirds  the  depth  of  the  whole 
foundation  surface,  which  is  of  common  light  paper.  From 
white  tissue  tear  out  cloud  forms,  never  cut  these;  apply  paste 
only  to  those  spots  where  you  wish  to  indicate  shadow.  Arrange 
the  clouds  on  the  blue.  If  still  water  is  to  be  represented  arrange 
the  landscape  somewhat  double,  the  second  forms  being  inverted ; 
cover  the  lower  half  with  wax  paper,  thus  obtaining  a  softened 
effect  for  the  reflections  in  the  water.  Of  very  great  value  are 
the  printed  colors  found  even  in  the  cheapest  pictures.  A  piece 
clipped  from  a  colored  fashion  plate  will  sometimes  give  just 
the  needed  tint.  No  printed  figures  are  cut  from  pictures,  but  the 
color  is  made  to  serve  all  ends. 

The  value  of  this  paper  cutting  has  been  proved  to  be  much 
greater  than  was  at  first  supposed.  Distances  are  managed,  per- 
spective constantly  taught.  The  overlaying  of  closely  related 
tones  brings  a  surprising  pleasure  to  those  not  familiar  with 
color  values.  Form  is,  of  course,  constantly  required.  The  elim- 
ination of  detail,  together  with  the  preservation  of  beauty  of  form 
and  color,  teaches  much  fine  discrimination.  A  new  satisfaction 
has  been  experienced  since  this  work  has  been  carried  on  in  the 
recognition  of  its  value  preparatory  to  the  use  of  water  colors 
and  other  paints.  The  student  who  has  never  painted,  and  believes 
herself  unable  to  do  so,  will  handle  color  far  differently  after 
learning  how  to  get  good  effects  in  paper. 

In  this  lesson  wall  decoration  on  a  large  scale  has  been  taken 
up  in  planning  friezes  for  a  child's  room.  Aside  from  those 
mentioned  in  the  first  lesson,  certain  motifs  have  been  repeated. 
A  strip  of  pale  gray-blue  paper  pasted  to  a  lower  one  a  third 
the  width  of  the  first  is  the  background  for  a  long  procession 
of  galleys  cut  all  alike  from  white  paper.     To  do  this  a  large 


6o  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

sheet  of  white  paper  is  folded  to  the  size  of  one  galley,  which  is 
drawn  on  the  upper  fold.  This  outline  is  then  traced  with  a  dress- 
maker's tracing  wheel  straight  through  the  several  folds  of  paper, 
which  are  then  easily  cut  and  pasted  to  the  blue  paper  sea.  This 
idea  may  be  developed  to  almost  any  extent — a  caravan,  the 
"Song  of  Hiawatha,"  historical  events,  a  city  street  with  all  its 
shops.  Any  child  may  be  carried  miles  away  from  his  troubles 
in  this  way. 

A  good  play  may  be  enjoyed  by  stretching  a  line  across  the 
bed  and  on  it  hanging  a  long  row  of  paper  Christmas  stockings. 
These  may  be  made  of  common  brown  paper  trimmed  as  fancy 
dictates.  Cut  with  the  long  fold  of  the  paper  up  the  back  of 
the  stocking.  The  front  and  foot  may  be  shaped  and  cut  with 
flaps  to  turn  in  and  paste.  These  being  designed  one  for  each 
member  of  the  family,  suitable  gifts  of  paper  are  made  to  fill 
each  stocking.  One  needs  to  husband  the  supplies  in  a  long  case. 
There  can  be  no  prodigality  of  entertainment ;  but,  given  a  keen 
sense  of  resources,  the  time  may  all  be  well  filled. 

Papier-Mache.  In  order  to  teach  modeling  papier-mache 
has  been  introduced.  This  seems  better  than  modelene  or  clay 
because  capable  of  more  complete  destruction.  Costing  nothing 
whatever,  this  material  lends  itself  well  to  contagious  work  and 
is  moreover  made  by  the  patient.  It  is  possible  to  buy  from 
the  paper  mills  at  Holyoke,  Massachusetts,  paper  pulp  at  six 
cents  per  pound.  After  trying  this  it  was  found  to  be  more 
interesting  to  attempt  the  whole  process  and  make  the  pulp. 
Newspapers  were  first  used.  Tear  these  into  reasonably  small 
bits,  pour  on  boiling  water  and  leave  to  soak  over  night  or 
several  hours.  Turn  all  into  a  stout  cloth  and  wring  very  dry, 
twisting  as  you  wring.  This  breaks  the  fiber  still  more.  Take 
a  small  lump  of  this  on  a  board  and,  with  a  table  fork,  scrape  it 
up  into  fine  flakes.  Make  some  thin  paste  of  flour  and  water, 
well  boiled,  and  add  to  the  prepared  paper,  mixing  and  rolling 
as  if  it  were  dough.  It  is  now  ready  to  be  applied  to  any  forms. 
Simple  shapes  are  best.     Glass  sauce  dishes,  smooth  bowls,  etc.. 


IN    QUARANTINE  6i 

will  work  well.  No  form  which  is  smaller  at  the  top  than  any- 
where below  can  be  used.  Before  applying,  dip  the  dish  in 
melted  paraffine  to  coat  the  outside  evenly  and  prevent  the  pulp 
from  sticking.  Apply  the  pulp  quite  thickly  and  evenly  and 
allow  to  dry.  A  little  paste  on  the  hand  as  it  models  will  help 
the  form.  The  bowl  will  require  a  day  or  two  to  dry  thoroughly. 
It  will  then  slip  off  the  mold  readily  and  may  be  decorated  with 
water  color.  These  vessels  are  very  tough,  but  will  not  stand 
water  unless  protected  by  strong  coats  of  varnish. 

Pleasing  effects  were  gained  by  using  old,  soiled  blotting 
paper  instead  of  newspaper.  A  sheet  of  gray  and  one  of  blue 
were  used  mixed,  and  decorated  in  indigo  pattern.  The  ink 
on  the  blotter  grays  the  color  and  is  a  help.  It  has  been  well 
suggested  that  a  little  "Easy  Dye"  be  added  to  the  water  in 
which  the  paper  soaks,  as  in  this  way  all  tones  may  be  obtained. 
The  most  recent  experiment,  however,  is  to  use  the  colored  pages 
of  the  Sunday  papers  together  with  the  others.  This  color  slips 
off  and  mixes  to  form  neutral  greens  and  blues.  Artistic  nut 
bowls  and  reproductions  of  old  Mexican  pottery  may  readily  be 
made. 

Tape  Belts.  Anything  which  may  be  boiled  may  be  safely 
sent  out  from  quarantine.  Many  a  patient  will  be  interested  in 
braiding  belts  of  linen  tape.  To  make  these,  eight  even  lengths 
of  tape  about  three  yards  long  and  one- fourth  of  an  inch 
wide  will  be  required.  Using  a  pillow  from  the  bed,  pin  the 
first  two  strands  to  the  pillovv\  as  is  shown  in  Figure  25,  weav- 
ing them  over  and  under  until  eight  strands  have  been  used. 
Now  fold  the  outer  strands  back  and  weave  back.  Repeat  on 
alternate  sides  until  the  belt  is  of  the  required  length,  being 
careful  to  turn  the  tape  so  as  to  preserve  a  straight  edge  on 
both  sides.  When  the  weaving  is  completed,  unpin  and  finish 
the  ends  by  turning  in  the  tape  even  with  the  weaving  to  form 
a  point,  then  sew  down.  Being  careful  not  to  stretch,  stitch  one 
row  of  machine  stitching  to  hold  the  edge  firmly.  These  are 
desirable  belts  for  wash  dresses  and  launder  well.     At  an  exhibit 


62  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

given  by  this  school,  where  everything  was  displayed  on  open 
tables,  this  belt  proved  too  great  an  attraction  for  one  visitor 
and  was  slyly  spirited  away  never  to  be  returned. 


Fig.  25 

Metal  Work.  The  well-known  fact  that  bacteria  do  not 
choose  inorganic  substances  for  propagating  beds  places  metal 
work  in  the  list  of  legitimate  quarantine  occupations.  This 
metal  may  be  thin  thirty- four  gauge  brass  or  German  silver.  The 
design  is  traced  directly  on  the  metal  by  using  carbon  paper. 
The  brass  should  then  be  tacked  rather  closely  to  a  smooth  board 
and  the  design  outlined  by  a  line  of  fine  holes  pierced  by  an 
awl  or  even  a  large  darning  needle.  A  light  tap  with  a  small 
hammer  or  mallet  is  all  that  is  required.  If  the  surface  of  the 
brass  be  dressed  over  very  lightly  with  vaseline  or  other  oil,  it 
will  pierce  even  more  readily,  hand  pressure  alone  often  being 
sufficient.  After  the  design  is  outlined,  the  entire  background 
is  likewise  filled  in  with  small  holes.  There  are  one  or  two 
precautionary  words  needed.  In  tacking  to  the  board  remember 
the  tendency  of  metal  to  "crawl"  when  worked,  and  therefore 
place  the  tacks  rather  closely.  Be  careful  not  to  pierce  the  holes 
too  near  together,  as  it  will  then  crack.  And  above  all,  in  this, 
as  in  all  other  work  for  invalids,  do  not  permit  interest  in  the 
work  to  allow  eyestrain.     Sometimes  parts  of  the  work  which 


IN    QUARANTINE  63 

might  prove  such  a  strain  to  the  patient  may  be  done  by  the 
nurse  while  the  former  follows  on  with  less  exacting  work. 

The  necessary  materials  for  putting  these  articles  together 
may  be  found  at  the  larger  hardware  stores,  and  consist  of  small 
brass  shanks  made  by  the  Dennison  Company,  Boston,  and  claw- 
feet  for  jardinieres,  fern  dishes,  etc.  The  candle  shades  are 
finished  with  a  bead  fringe  put  on  with  the  shanks.  The  brass 
may  be  polished  either  before  or  after  tooling.  If  ordinary 
metal  polish  is  used  after  tooling,  it  must  be  scrubbed  off  and 
out  of  the  holes  by  strong  soapsuds  and  a  brush,  and  rinsed  in 
very  hot  water,  otherwise  polish  lodges  in  the  holes  and  soon 
turns  the  brass  green.  One  of  the  best  methods  of  polishing 
is  by  using  steel  wool.  This  needs  no  subsequent  washing,  but 
rubbing  off  with  a  dry  cloth  or  chamois. 

Various  other  small  tools  are  sold  at  these  stores  for  working 
in  other  ways  than  by  piercing,  as  repousse,  etc.  These  articles 
may  be  rendered  entirely  sterile  by  heat.  Designs  are  found  in 
the  newspapers,  and  they  are  also  on  sale  at  these  same  stores. 
Among  many  poor  ones  there  is  here  and  there  a  very  good  one. 

Sealing  Wax.  Obviously  a  thing  which  may  be  made  in 
a  flame  of  fire  can  be  safely  sent  out  of  quarantine.  The  use 
of  sealing  wax  in  making  hatpins,  fancy  clasp  pins,  buckles 
and  many  other  articles  will  prove  really  profitable.  Another 
thing  which  recommends  this  work  is  that  it  may  be  done  entirely 
by  candle  flame,  the  light  best  tolerated  by  oversensitive  eyes. 
Even  a  measles  case  could  bear  a  little  of  this.  The  first  require- 
ment is  a  foundation.  A  penny  hatpin,  a  cheap  and  otherwise 
useless  belt  buckle,  old  cast-off  metal  ornaments,  all  form  the 
best  of  foundations.  Next,  a  stick  of  coarse  commercial  sealing 
wax  will  be  needed,  and  last  a  few  colors  of  the  finer  sealing  wax 
used  for  letters.  Holding  the  pin  in  the  left  hand,  the  coarse 
wax  in  the  right,  melt  the  wax  over  the  candle  and  apply  as  it 
melts  to  the  pinhead.  Repeat  this  until  a  sufficient  amount  is 
deposited  for  the  required  shape.  In  a  few  seconds  it  will  be  cool 
enough  to  shape  with  the  fingers  into  all  sorts  of  forms.     When 


64  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

the  shape  has  been  determined,  go  over  the  surface  with  httle 
dabs  of  the  finer  wax  in  any  color  scheme  suggested.  This  finer 
wax  should  not  be  applied  so  as  to  cover  the  coarser  wax  entirely, 
as  this  is  accomplished  by  heating.  This  heating  is  done  very 
cautiously,  the  pin  being  turned  constantly.  Be  careful  not  to 
heat  clear  through  or  the  wax  may  fall  off  the  head.  Should 
the  accident  occur,  remember  that  this  wax  may  be  remelted  and 
applied  again.  This  accident  may  sometimes  be  averted  when 
threatening  by  dipping  the  pin  quickly  into  cold  water.  If  this  is 
done,  be  very  sure  to  dry  thoroughly  before  reheating,  or  blisters 
may  form.  In  coating  buckles,  beautiful  effects  may  be  obtained 
by  covering  first  with  the  coarse  wax  and  then  applying  the 
colors.  It  is  thus  possible,  with  little  cost,  to  make  buckles  to 
match  hats  or  gowns.  It  takes  a  considerable  blow  to  break 
these,  but  should  this  happen  it  requires  only  a  little  more 
heating  and  reshaping  to  make  them  as  good  as  new.  Passing 
them  very  quickly  across  the  flame  gives  the  final  polish.  If  a 
candle  is  used,  do  not  let  any  melted  candle  grease  or  smoke 
touch  the  pin,  as  this  dulls  and  darkens  the  wax  and  it  will  not 
then  polish.  If  gas  or  alcohol  flame  be  used  there  is  danger  of 
too  rapid  heating,  but  there  is  less  smoke.  Taken  altogether  gas 
gives,  perhaps,  the  best  results.  Interesting  Venetian  beads  are 
made  over  the  "Job's  Tears"  purchased  at  the  druggist's.  A 
wooden  toothpick  stuck  through  the  hole  to  prevent  its  filling 
with  wax  is  removed  later. 

Paper-bag  Masks.  For  some  inexplainable  reason  a  gro- 
tesque face  or  mask  nearly  always  appeals  to  a  boy.  An  inter- 
esting article  on  the  making  of  paper-bag  masks  appeared  in 
The  Ladies'  Home  Journal  for  October,  1907.  The  author  of  this 
contribution.  Miss  Lina  Beard,  suggests  that  from  large  bags, 
both  of  the  simple  pillowslip  sort  and  also  those  having  a  plait 
at  the  bottom,  the  various  masks  representing  animals'  heads 
may  be  made.  The  features  are  coarsely  drawn  in  ink  with  a 
large  brush.  The  owl,  cat,  lion,  rabbit,  fish,  seal  and  various 
others  are  made  with  little  cutting.     The  eyes  and  nostrils  pro- 


IN    QUARANTINE  65 

vide  breathing  space  and  the  bag  is  sHpped  over  the  head  of  the 
wearer.  These  are  readily  available  for  amateur  theatricals  and 
require  only  a  suggestion  of  costume  beside.  The  owl  was 
effectively  worn  by  a  member  of  the  school  and,  with  gray 
flannelette  pajamas,  made  as  good  an  impression  as  any  character 
present. 

The  problem  of  suitable  occupation  for  tuberculous  patients, 
the  output  being  free  from  all  cause  for  suspicion,  has  been 
considered.  It  was  stated  by  Dr.  Farrand,  of  New  York  City, 
that  after  long  study  of  these  cases  it  had  been  found  that  the 
rest  treatment  had  been  overdone  and  that  patients  did  better 
when  given  carefully  regulated  employment.  This  may  properly 
be  discussed  in  this  chapter.  Although  such  patients  cannot  be 
said  to  be  under  strict  quarantine,  still  they  are  subject  to  many 
of  the  same  rules. 

In  the  Brookline,  Massachusetts,  Day  Camp  for  Tuberculous 
Children  the  demand  for  work  was  met  by  lessons  in  sewing. 
Each  little  girl  dressed  a  doll  and  later  applied  the  principles 
so  learned  to  her  own  wardrobe.  This  form  of  work  was  chosen 
because  the  superintendent  felt  herself  qualified  to  teach  it.  The 
boys  and  girls  also  made  baskets,  the  girls  using  rope  and  raffia, 
the  boys  reed  and  raffia.  The  question  was  raised  as  to  the 
desirability  of  a  form  of  occupation  which  tended  to  constrict 
the  chest.  It  seems  rational  that  work  on  large,  plain  surfaces 
should  be  substituted  as  far  as  possible.  Consumptive  women 
have  a  propensity  to  stoop,  sew  and  cough.  Blackboard  drawing 
or  Crayola  work  done  on  a  good-sized  easel  suggests  itself;  also 
stenciling  on  wash  goods.  It  was  noted  with  surprise  that  book- 
binding was  included  in  the  work  of  these  tuberculous  patients 
which  was  recently  exhibited  in  New  York.  It  has  been  found 
very  difficult  to  dispose  of  baskets  made  by  such  patients,  even 
after  formaldehyde  disinfection ;  how  much  more  so  to  dispose 
of  books,  the  most  impossible  objects  of  disinfection. 

An  industry  long  since  out  of  fashion  was  suggested  by  a 


66  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

college  professor  who  remembered  that  in  his  home  there  was 
formerly  a  rectangular  frame  set  closely  on  all  four  sides  with 
small  nails  or  brads.  Running  from  these  was  wound  coarse, 
white  knitting  cotton,  first  from  end  to  end,  then  from  side  to 
side  alternately  until  nearly  two  balls  were  used.  No  diagonal 
strands  were  permitted.  When  all  wound,  more  cotton  threaded 
in  a  large  darning  needle  was  used  to  tie  at  each  crossing  by  a 
half -buttonhole  stitch,  first  one  way  and  then  the  other,  so  that 
the  work  was  solidly  fastened.  It  was  then  cut  from  the  nails 
and  the  edge  trimmed  to  form  a  fringelike  border.  This  forms 
a  very  thick,  open-meshed  table  mat  which  may  be  boiled  without 
harm  and  used  without  concern. 

Experiments  in  home  dyeing  are  worth  considering  in  this 
connection.  Nearly  all  fabrics  are  better  colored  if  the  dye  is 
boiled  in,  thus  disinfecting  the  work.  The  "Easy  Dyes"  are 
examples  of  both  hot  and  cold  methods.  Common  white  paper 
may  be  dyed  any  desired  shade,  also  raffia,  jute,  wools,  etc.  There 
is  a  fine  opportunity  for  chemical  experiment  for  one  who  can 
collect  vegetable  material  for  dyeing.  Barks,  roots,  woods,  leaves, 
fruits  and  nuts  will  all  yield  valuable  colors  if  properly  treated. 
One  boy  did  a  piece  of  rich  illuminating  with  the  purple  of 
cooked  blueberry  juice.  To  perfect  this  industry  needs  long  and 
careful  study,  but  there  are  many  helps.  Apply,  for  instance, 
to  some  old  lady  in  the  country  who  dyes  carpet  rags  independ- 
ently of  ready-made  dyes,  and  you  will  be  apt  to  get  many  a 
valuable  suggestion.  Chemical  experiment  appeals  more  readily, 
as  a  rule,  to  boys  than  to  girls,  although  both  will  appreciate 
results  in  color.  Best  of  all  the  patient  is  kept  out  of  doors  by 
this  employment. 


CHAPTER    VII 

ONE-HAND    LESSONS 

Far  more  numerous  than  was  at  first  supposed  when  this 
course  of  instruction  was  planned  are  the  subjects  having  but 
one  hand  available  for  work.  Fracture,  paralysis,  deformity, 
burns,  wounds  of  all  sorts  leading  up  many  times  to  amputation, 
may  bring  us  face  to  face  with  the  problem  of  what  may  be 
done  with  one  hand  unassisted,  or  aided  only  to  a  very  limited 
extent,  by  the  other,  if  other  there  be.  At  the  Industrial  School 
for  Crippled  Children  in  Boston,  good  work  has  been  done  along 
this  line.  Here  it  has  been  found  that  clay  modeling  possesses 
advantages  in  that  any  hand,  even  a  single  remaining  finger  or 
deformed  little  stump,  may  be  used  as  a  sort  of  tool  to  which 
the  plastic  clay  responds  and  invites  further  experiment.  A  child 
having  a  deformed  hand  usually  tries  to  hide  it,  thus  allowing 
it  to  become  more  and  more  useless.  By  developing  it  in  this 
way  the  owner  gains  not  only  confidence,  but  experiences  actual 
pride  in  the  results  and  a  sense  of  mastery  of  his  queer  little  tool. 
The  hands  shown  in  the  illustration  showed  examples  of  remark- 
able dexterity.  Pointing  to  the  little  hooks  the  patient  said, 
"This  one  turns  all  my  hems;  this  one  takes  the  dirt  out  of  all 
the  corners,"  and  so  on,  finding  a  peculiar  fitness  even  in  the 
deformity  itself.  Exquisite  needlework,  knitting  and  brass  work, 
to  say  nothing  of  excellent  housekeeping,  were  among  the  accom- 
plishments of  this  patient. 

Any  one  by  persistent  practice  may  learn  to  use  left  hand  for 
right.  The  next  thing  is  to  find  means  for  supplying  the  assist- 
ance normally  given  by  the  less  active  hand.  With  the  left  hand 
one  ordinarily  grasps  whatever  his  right  hand  finds  to  do ;  in  lieu 
of  this  one  may  use  a  vise,  a  sewing  bird,  hand  screws  or  clamps 
of  various  nature.    In  every  case  the  rigid  principle  to  be  observed 

67 


68  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

is  that  the  work  be  firmly  fixed.  If  the  patient  be  in  bed  the 
frame  desk  already  described  in  the  chapter  on  restricted  posi- 
tions and  shown  in  the  ilhistration  on  the  opposite  page  may 
be  used.  Embroidery  frames  may  be  fastened  to  the  arm  of 
an  invalid's  chair.  A  good,  firm,  resisting  surface  must  be 
provided,  and  this  surface  must  be  arranged  at  such  an  angle 
as  to  give  the  least  possible  disturbance  of  vision.  If  the 
patient's  head  can  be  propped  up,  so  much  the  better;  still,  there 
are  cases  where  a  strict  horizontal  position  must  be  maintained 
— a  fracture  of  femur  and  left  radius,  for  example,  or  a  case 
requiring  a  collar  brace,  as  in  torticollis.  The  thing  to  be  re- 
membered is  that  there  is  always  some  way  which  may 
be  devised. 

Brush  work  of  all  sorts  is  applicable  to  these  cases.  The 
fact  that  the  patient  has  never  painted  and  declares  that  she 
"cannot  even  draw  a  straight  line"  need  in  no  way  hinder  the 
instruction.  Any  one  can  learn  to  draw,  although  not  all  may 
become  artists.  Teach  the  simple  principle  of  free-hand  pencil 
drawing.  Do  not  omit  to  use  some  color.  There  is  peculiar 
charm  in  a  little  color  used  correctly.  Japanese  water  color 
paints  in  book  form  may  be  bought  for  seventy-five  cents ;  these 
are  perfectly  transparent  and  are  therefore  adapted  to  coloring 
prints  and  photographs  where  only  flat  washes  are  required  and 
all  the  shading  preserved  in  the  print.  These  colors  are  very 
economical,  lasting  a  long  time.  They  are  exceedingly  strong, 
and  are  on  paper  instead  of  being  in  cakes  or  tubes.  One  needs 
only  to  clip  a  tiny  scrap,  which,  when  floated  in  water,  sheds 
its  tint  to  be  used  as  a  delicate  wash.  Directions  are  given 
with  these  little  books.  In  the  case  of  photographs  having  a 
shiny  surface  a  little  wash  of  sizing  which  is  to  be  had  for 
a  nickel  prepares  the  surface  for  the  color.  This  sizing  is  spread 
on  paper,  as  is  the  color.  In  selecting  kodak  pictures  or  prints 
for  coloring  it  is  better  to  choose  those  which  are  lightly  printed. 
Often  a  print  too  pale  to  be  of  much  value  uncolored  will  color 
very  successfully.  Magazine  illustrations  picked  up  here  and 
there  take  on  new  significance  when  so  tinted. 


Pointing  to  the  little  hooks  the  patient  said,  "This  one  turns  all  my  hems ; 
this  one  takes  the  dirt  out  of  all  the  corners."  Pug^  ^7 


I 


BF.n-DKSK 


Pao^e  48 


ONE-HAND    LESSONS  69 

Illuminated  mottoes  attract  much  attention.  The  outlines  for 
these  in  black  and  white  may  be  bought  at  the  various  schocl 
supply  places.  Some  of  the  very  best  are  printed  at  the  Valhall 
Studios,  339  Halsey  Street,  Brooklyn,  New  York.  Fred  Rust's 
Crafts  Shop,  Evanston,  Illinois,  and  Cheney  and  Carmichael, 
Minneapolis,  Minnesota,  also  supply  them.  Great  neatness  should 
be  observed  in  illuminating.  A  paste  may  be  used  to  raise  capital 
letters  and  other  parts.  Gold  and  silver  paint  are  effectively 
employed.  There  is  good  sale  for  these  mottoes.  Beginning  with 
these  simple  printed  designs  the  student  may  gradually  work  up 
to  doing  little  things  on  bits  of  vellum  or  parchment,  which  is  the 
ideal  ground  for  illuminations.  There  is  a  stiff  kind  of  oil  paper 
which  is  sometimes  found  between  layers  of  bonbons;  this  is 
semi-translucent  and  resembles  vellum  in  appearance.  This  has 
been  found  to  take  both  ink  and  water  color  very  well.  A  little 
manual  of  illumination  is  supplied  by  the  Valhall  Studio,  at  the 
address  already  given. 

Dinner  cards  will  always  bring  a  good  price  if  daintily 
executed.  A  single  little  figure  brings  from  thirty-five  to  fifty 
cents.  Linen  finish  Bristol  board  makes  a  good  card.  The  de- 
sign, outlined  either  by  tracing  with  carbon  paper  or  sketched 
in  freehand,  is  then  colored  with  water  color  and  when  perfectly 
dry  outlined  with  ink.  Quaint  little  figures,  animals,  flowers  and 
fruits  are  all  suitable  subjects.  A  charming  place  card  for  a 
dinner  given  to  a  foreign  guest  has  a  stretch  of  blue  sea  over 
which  flies  one  beautiful  white  sea  gull.  An  odd  series  is  worked 
out  using  large,  white  tape-buttons,  those  having  two  large,  deep 
holes  side  by  side,  for  faces.  The  button  is  glued  to  a  card, 
•the  body  drawn  and  colored,  and  the  two  deep  holes  each  receive 
a  black  dot  in  the  center  and  serve  for  most  expressive  eyes. 
Hats,  caps  and  bonnets  are  painted  over  and  above  the  button- 
face. All  sorts  of  soldiers,  sailors  and  children  of  all  nations 
are  thus  represented. 

Pastels  or  colored  crayons  may  be  used,  the  best  paper  for 
practice  work  being  the  common  cartridge  paper  used  for  walls. 


70  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

English  crayon  paper  bought  at  art  supply  places  is  very  nice, 
the  rough  side  being  the  one  to  which  the  color  is  applied.  This 
costs  more  than  the  cartridge  paper,  and  the  regular  woolly  pastel 
paper  is  still  more  expensive  and  not  so  well  adapted  to  all  pieces 
of  work.  All  pastels  rub  off  very  easily  and  should  be  fixed 
with  special  pastel  fixatif — that  used  for  charcoal  drawing  will 
not  do — or  else  they  should  be  at  once  covered  with  glass  with 
a  passe-partout  binding.  In  pastel  work  much  of  the  delicate 
blending  of  tones  is  produced  by  rubbing  in  lightly  with  the  finger. 
The  finer  lines  are  obtained  by  using  the  broken  edges  of  the 
crayons,  which  fracture  with  a  touch  but  lose  no  value  by 
breakage.  A  little  box,  ample  for  any  beginner,  can  be  bought 
for  fifty  or  sixty  cents,  and  it  is  always  possible  to  buy  separate 
crayons  of  any  colors  not  included.  Pastels  are  rich  in  tone 
and  usually  demand  a  gold  frame.  Further  suggestions  will  be 
found  in  Chapter  XIII. 

Charcoal  and  water  color  used  together  give  a  curious  and 
pleasing  variation.  An  effect  much  like  old  tapestry  may  be 
obtained  by  treating  charcoal  paper  to  a  gray  coating,  applied 
evenly  over  the  surface  by  a  piece  of  charcoal  rubbed  over 
lengthwise  of  the  entire  stick.  Next  make  a  strong  drawing  in 
charcoal,  taking  out  the  lights  with  a  piece  of  kneaded  rubber 
or  artist's  gum.  Turn  the  picture  face  to  the  easel  and  wash 
the  whole  back  freely  with  charcoal  fixatif  applied  with  a  broad 
brush.  When  dry,  turn  face  towards  you  and  wash  the  entire 
surface  with  cold  coffee  or  a  very  thin  wash  of  yellow  ochre. 
In  applying  this  wash  fill  a  large  brush  very  full,  sweep  right 
across  the  top  of  the  picture,  letting  the  drops  run  down,  but 
quickly  catch  them  up  by  a  second  brushful  applied  just  below 
and  continue  until  the  surface  is  evenly  washed.  Let  this  dry 
thoroughly  and  then  color  with  water  color,  using  strong  colors 
as  the  picture  suggests.  The  yellow  wash  gives  the  appearance 
of  age.    These  are  best  framed  by  a  flat  black  border. 

Envelope  Sachets.  A  woman  deprived  of  the  use  of  all  but 
three  fingers,  and  hopelessly  bedridden,  has  found  a  way  to  earn 


ONE-HAND    LESSONS  71 

money  by  painting  common  envelopes  with  some  flower  design, 
slipping  sheet  wadding  and  sachet  powder  into  these  and  adding 
a  little  poem  copied  by  her  own  hand,  or  all  that  remains  to  her 
of  a  hand.  For  these  she  finds  ready  sale.  Fixed  in  a  frame 
and  unable  to  raise  either  hand  to  her  head,  she  contrives  to 
use  a  long-handled  pen  and  paint  brush. 

Designing  Toilets.  With  practice  and  a  little  study  many 
young  girls  are  able  to  design  dainty  gowns.  Draw  carefully 
the  outlines  and  then  color  with  water  colors.  A  written  de- 
scription, with  estimate  of  amount  of  goods  and  probable  cost, 
will  increase  the  value.  If  possible,  have  the  invalid  designer 
where  she  can  look  out  into  the  world  of  growing  things.  Here 
let  her  find  her  color  schemes.  It  is  said  that  Worth,  the  Parisian 
designer,  made  a  practice  of  studying  the  changes  on  the  spring 
hillsides  when  planning  spring  costumes.  Let  the  colors  drop 
into  line  with  the  great  march  of  the  seasons  as  told  by  the 
trees,  the  skies,  the  waters  and  the  birds. 

Rake  Knitting.  There  is  good  ground  for  believing  that 
the  rake-work  already  described  in  the  second  lesson  might  well 
be  adapted  to  a  one-hand  subject.  Fixing  the  rake  steadily, 
there  is  no  reason  why  this  could  not  be  easily  knit  ofif  with 
but  one  hand. 

Leather  Tooling.  If  the  leather  be  securely  tacked  to  a 
board  and  the  board  firmly  clamped  to  a  support,  this  form  of 
work  offers  a  great  variety  of  charming  products  for  the  one- 
hand  subject.  The  leather  should  be  of  good  quality;  dressed 
calf  or  split  cowhide,  ooze  finish,  may  be  used.  This  is  sold  by 
the  square  foot  at  some  hardware  places,  as  Chandler  and  Barber, 
Summer  Street,  Boston,  and  other  dealers.  If  a  number  of  work- 
ers can  combine  to  buy  a  whole  skin,  which  costs  several  dollars, 
it  will  be  found  to  be  a  great  advantage.  The  design  is  first 
traced  upon  the  leather  with  a  hard  lead  pencil  without  carbon 
paper,  the  leather  itself  taking  the  impression.  When  this  is  done 
the  lines  are  all  gone  over  and  strengthened  with  a  leather  tool, 
certain  parts  being  rubbed  down  very  hard,  giving  a  good  con- 


72  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

trast  with  the  lighter  imtooled  surface.  Between  the  board  and 
the  leather  there  should  be  fastened  a  sheet  of  tin  which  helps 
to  emphasize  the  pattern  and  prevents  its  sinking  in.  Before 
tooling,  the  whole  upper  surface  is  brushed  over  hghtly  with  a 
damp  sponge  or  cloth.  On  some  light  leathers  this  must  be  done 
with  great  care,  but  on  most  of  that  used  the  water  leaves  no 
stain.  Sometimes  water  is  applied  to  parts  of  the  design  on  the 
under  surface,  which  enables  them  to  be  modeled  up  more  fully. 
The  only  really  necessary  tool  is  one  having  one  rather  broad, 
spoonlike  end,  which  is  used  in  rubbing  down  broader  spaces, 
and  the  other  smaller  and  more  pointed  end  for  smaller  parts 
of  the  design.  This  tool  costs  twenty-five  cents  and  may  be 
purchased  at  the  same  stores  as  is  the  leather.  All  sorts  of 
pocketbooks,  portfolios,  bags,  frames,  book  covers,  etc.,  may 
be  thus  made.  It  requires  a  fairly  strong,  firm  pressure  to  get 
the  best  results.  The  metal  fasteners  for  pocketbooks  may  be 
put  on  at  the  leather  shops  or,  if  one  is  to  do  many,  an  outfit 
for  this  which  can  easily  be  used  by  any  one  may  be  had  for  one 
dollar.  Leather  work  is  among  the  most  satisfactory  products ; 
it  is  durable,  beautiful  to  a  high  degree,  not  really  expensive  and 
always  desirable.  Fine  colored  calf  is  obtained  at  W.  A.  Hall's, 
119  Beach  Street,  Boston,  Massachusetts. 

Cross-stitch.  The  problem  of  any  kind  of  needlework  for 
a  one-hand  patient  was  long  considered.  It  was  at  last  demon- 
strated that  a  patient  lying  on  her  back  in  bed  with  one  hand 
wholly  useless  could  do  cross-stitch  embroidery.  Turning  the 
frame  already  described  on  page  48,  the  canvas  was  stretched 
across  the  open  back  and  the  patient  could  then  carry  out  the 
design.  In  order  that  she  may  thread  her  own  needles  a  cushion 
may  be  tacked  to  one  side  of  the  frame,  the  needles  stuck  into 
this  and  there  threaded.  Patterns  for  cross-stitch  may  be  had 
on  all  sides ;  very  desirable  ones  are  issued  on  single  sheets  by 
The  Jenny  Brooks  Company,  Salem,  Massachusetts.  When  the 
design  is  done  on  cloth,  railroad  canvas  is  basted  over,  the  pattern 
worked,  and  when  completed  the  canvas  pulled  out  a  few  threads 


ONE-HAND   LESSONS  73 

at  a  time.  One  nurse  shows  a  beautiful  piece  of  work  done  in 
this  stitch  on  white  satin  with  fine  Berlin  wool.  Somewhat  less 
than  seventy  years  ago  the  pupils  of  a  Canadian  private  school 
were  taught  the  stitch  but  allowed  to  work  only  on  samplers. 
One  little  girl  of  thirteen  was  inspired  to  attempt  the  reproduc- 
tion of  a  Scriptural  scene  which  would  much  resemble  a  fine  old 
tapestry.  Not  permitted  to  do  it  in  school  and  required  to  go 
early  to  her  bed  at  home,  her  only  chance  was  to  work  at  her 
great  task  surreptitiously  at  night,  while  her  sister  held  the  candle 
for  her.  By  this  means  she  produced  a  work  of  great  beauty, 
which  is  cherished  by  her  daughter  and  framed  in  a  plain  wooden 
frame  made  especially  for  it  by  the  grandfather.  Among  the 
countless  crude  and  deplorable  efforts  constantly  found  in  coun- 
try houses  and  county  fairs  one  may  often  stumble  upon  a  piece 
of  real  artistic  value  done  in  this  old-time  stitch. 

This  jingle,  quoted  from  memory  and  without  knowledge  of 
its  source,  has  amused  many  who  were  induced  to  try  the  cross- 
stitch  : 

"An  old  and  respectable  ostrich 
Was  seized  with  a  wish  to  do  cross-stitch. 
*I  will  cover  my  eggs  and  respectable  legs 
With  rugs  and  with  mats,'  said  the  ostrich. 
So  she  went  to  a  friendly  red  heifer. 
And  purchased  some  needles  and  zephyr, 
Some  canvas  and  crash  and  some  burlap  for  cash, 
For  'I  don't  sell  on  trust,'  said  Miss  Heifer. 
But  when  casually  the  ostrich 
Remarked  that  she  wished  to  do  cross-stitch. 
Miss  Red  Heifer's  smile  made  her  feel  that  her  style 
Was  obsolete  e'en  for  an  ostrich. 
Said  the  heifer:  'My  dear  Mrs.  Ostrich, 
Art  embroidery  now  is  the  boss  stitch 
(H  you'll  pardon  the  slang).    I  experience  a  pang 
That  you  wish  to  revert  to  the  cross-stitch.' 
'There's  something  much  older  than  cross-stitch — 
'Tis  courtesy,  ma'am,'  said  the  ostrich." 


74  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

Weaving.  Certain  kinds  of  hand  weaving  may  be  done  in 
the  little  loom  described  in  the  second  lesson,  the  difference  being 
that  for  a  one-hand  patient  it  is  better  to  place  it  on  its  side, 
weaving  up  and  down  instead  of  from  right  to  left.  At  the 
Marblehead  Crafts  Shop  they  sometimes  offer  work  to  some  of 
the  patients  of  the  Children's  Island  Hospital.  Among  these  were 
two  girls,  one  using  only  the  right  hand,  the  other  only  the  left. 
These  girls  were  able  to  use  a  large  loom  together,  each  managing 
one  side  of  the  weaving. 

Several  remarkable  examples  are  reported  of  work  done  by 
patients  deprived  of  the  use  of  both  hands.  A  book  published 
by  the  Riverside  Press  many  years  ago,  entitled,  "The  Life  of 
John  Carter,"  by  Frederick  James  Mills,  gives  a  full  account, 
well  illustrated,  of  the  work  done  by  John  Carter  of  Coggeshall, 
England.  He  was  a  silk  weaver,  earning  twelve  shillings  or  more 
a  day.  He  lapsed  into  rather  idle  and  dissolute  habits.  Together 
with  some  mischievous  companions  he  was  attacking  a  rookery 
in  May,  1836,  when  in  his  climb  for  the  birds  he  reached  the 
height  of  forty  feet  and  fell  to  the  ground.  He  never  moved 
hand  or  foot  from  that  time.  The  injury  was  to  the  fifth,  sixth 
and  seventh  vertebrae  and  his  death  was  expected.  Contrary  to 
this,  however,  he  lived.  He  was  then  only  twenty-one.  One 
day,  in  reading  from  books  loaned  him  by  his  friends,  he  hap- 
pened upon  a  little  account  of  a  certain  Elizabeth  Kinning  at  an 
asylum  in  Liverpool,  who,  having  lost  the  use  of  her  hands,  had 
learned  to  draw  with  her  mouth.  This  suggested  to  him  that 
he  might  do  the  same.  He  began  with  a  slate,  then  with  a  piece 
of  paper  pinned  to  the  pillow,  first  with  a  pencil,  then  with  a 
brush.  By  this  means  he  worked  up  to  line  drawing  for  engrav- 
ing on  copper.  This  was  accompHshed  in  three  years.  He  de- 
veloped this  work  to  great  perfection,  one  of  his  drawings  being 
kept  by  Queen  Victoria.  He  used  a  small,  light  desk  of  wood 
and  a  lead  pencil  about  four  inches  long,  held  firmly  between 
his  teeth.  A  brush  dipped  in  India  ink  by  his  attendant  was,  by 
a  peculiar  muscular  action  of  lips  and  tongue,  made  free  from 


ONE-HAND   LESSONS  75 

superfluous  ink  and  brought  to  a  fine  point.  He  then  held  it  fast 
in  his  teeth  and  drew  with  great  swiftness  by  the  motion  of  his 
head.  In  this  way  he  Uved  and  worked  fourteen  years.  He  died 
June  2,  1850. 

To  the  right  spirit  every  Umitation  seems  to  constitute  a 
summons  to  greater  victories. 


CHAPTER   VIII 

THE   IMPATIENT   BOY 

The  study  of  impatience  has  been  much  neglected.  By  a 
large  majority  it  has  been  set  down  as  a  serious  fault  if  not 
a  major  sin.  To  say  that  a  person  is  impatient  is  equivalent  to 
saying  that  he  is  irritable ;  to  say  that  he  is  irritable  is  equiva- 
lent to  saying  that  his  nerves  react  too  rapidly  and  violently  to 
various  stimuli ;  and  to  say  this  is  to  admit  that  he  exhibits  a 
deviation  from  the  normal  and  is,  therefore,  to  a  given  degree, 
ill.  The  moment  one  transfers  crossness  from  the  list  of  faults 
to  the  list  of  symptoms  the  whole  aspect  of  the  case  changes. 
It  may  not  be  possible  to  arrive  at  full  and  complete  diagnosis, 
but  here,  as  elsewhere,  one  may  treat  symptoms. 

The  symptom  of  impatience  precludes  the  long-continued  use 
of  special  nerve  centers  and  therefore  of  special  sets  of  muscles. 
Particularly  is  this  true  of  the  finer  groups  of  muscles.  This 
principle  is  observed  in  the  kindergarten  and  lower  primary 
schools  on  account  of  undeveloped  mental  conditions ;  in  the 
case  of  older  subjects  it  must  be  adhered  to  because  of  impaired 
function,  if  not  structural  change.  To  set  a  little  child  to  making 
lace  would  be  reprehensible.  To  expect  an  impatient  boy  or  other 
subject  to  accomplish  work  requiring  finely  coordinated  move- 
ments is  equally  wrong.  But  we  have  another  factor  to  con- 
sider, namely,  that,  while  this  boy  can  do  nothing  intricate,  he 
must  do  something.  With  his  inability  to  act  discriminatingly 
comes  his  powerful  impulse  to  act  at  any  cost.  He  cannot  pains- 
takingly lay  up  a  building-block  wall  piece  by  piece,  but  he  can 
demolish  such  a  wall  at  one  fell  blow.  The  conditions  rendering 
a  subject  impatient  are  many  and  varied.  A  nagging  and  inter- 
mittent pain  is  apt  to  foster  this,  while  a  continued  pain,  or  one 
increasing  in  severity,  often  makes  the  subject  patient.    But  take 

76 


THE   IMPATIENT   BOY  -jj 

a  boy  with  earache  or  toothache — who  can  stand  before  him? 
How  he  hurls  his  grandmother's  poultice  across  the  room  and 
his  mother's  hot  water  bottle  after  it !  The  only  safe  treatment 
for  the  members  of  the  family  to  attempt  is  the  absent  treatment. 

Fortunately  for  his  nurse  there  are  intervals,  and  these  may 
be  used  with  great  tact  even  unto  the  lessening  and  postpone- 
ment of  the  next  storm.  One  boy  with  toothache  found  his  own 
sedative  in  cutting  out  enough  paper  devils  to  go  all  the  way 
around  the  room.  Extensity  seems  to  be  a  factor  in  planning 
occupation  for  such  a  patient,  large  surfaces,  long  strokes,  push- 
ing away  from  rather  than  gathering  towards  one.  And  then, 
after  all,  the  boy  likes  fun,  so  make  him  laugh.  Bring  in  some 
vegetables  and  fruits,  make  for  these  ridiculous  faces  with  pins 
or  buttons,  and  add  toothpick  legs  and  paper  tails.  Let  the  onions 
grin  while  they  weep.  Make  a  row  of  apple  jack-o'-lanterns, 
lemon  pigs,  potato  turkeys,  raisin  turtles  and  carrot  cows ;  line 
them  all  up  at  good  range,  then  give  the  boy  a  bean  blower  and 
let  him  shoot  every  one  of  them  —  dead!  It  will  do  him  a  world 
of  good.  Make  up  absurd  jingles;  let  him  splash  them  on  paper 
with  ink  and  brush  in  big,  untidy  strokes.  Call  them  street  car 
signs  and  suggest  trades  of  all  sorts  to  advertise.  It  sounds 
large.  If  he  succeeds  and  keeps  this  thing  up  he  may  turn  out 
an  advertiser  and  earn  more  money  than  his  medical  adviser  ever 
saw. 

Boys  are  attracted  by  a  sleight-of-hand  performance.  The 
trick  of  stencil  may  be  taught  here.  "Let  the  nurse  make  the 
stencil  while  the  boy  sleeps  or  is  otherwise  engaged.  To  do  this 
she  traces  the  design  on  common  brown  wrapping  paper,  cuts  it 
out  with  slim,  pointed  scissors  or  with  a  knife,  and  then  shellacs 
it  on  both  sides  (if  on  one  only  it  will  curl).  When  dry  it  is  ready 
to  use.  On  a  broad  board  lay  a  piece  of  blotting  paper ;  over  this 
stretch  smoothly  the  surface  to  be  decorated,  then  let  the  boy 
slap  on  the  color  or  ink.  The  nurse  takes  oflf  the  stencil  and  lo, 
the  boy  has  made  a  beautiful  thing  in  spite  of  himself.  Beaut}' 
with   a   surprise   in   it   is   always   charming,   and  pain   has  been 


78  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

charmed  away.  When  the  boy  feels  better  he  will  do  this  more 
carefully.  Then  you  may  teach  him  that  all  sorts  of  paint  may 
be  used — old  dried  oil  colors  in  tubes  (if  the  tops  will  not  un- 
screw, heat  them  for  a  moment  over  a  candle  or  gas  flame), 
dry  paint  in  powder;  oil  rather  than  water  color  is  preferable. 
The  best  fluid  medium  is  made  up  after  this  formula:  Into  a 
pint  bottle  put  one  ounce  oil  or  essence  of  wintergreen,  one  ounce 
acetic  acid.  Fill  up  to  the  even  pint  with  spirits  of  turpentine. 
Mix  the  paint  to  a  thin,  creamy  consistency.  Have  a  stencil 
brush  which  is  square  across  the  end  and  use  always  the  end 
of  the  brush  and  not  the  side.  Take  up  the  color  and  apply  the 
brush  each  time  it  is  dipped  to  a  piece  of  common  pasteboard 
or  strawboard  before  applying  to  the  stencil.  This  takes  up  the 
superfluous  fluid  and  prevents  the  color  from  running  under 
the  edge  of  the  stencil.  Apply  the  color  with  a  stippling  motion, 
not  with  a  stroke.  Take  up  the  stencil  carefully  to  prevent 
smooching,  and  after  thorough  drying  rub  a  very  hot  iron  over 
the  under  side  of  the  goods  to  make  the  color  set  more  firmly. 
The  exact  consistency  of  the  paint  must  be  learned  by  practice. 
The  wintergreen  and  acid  make  the  color  bite  into  the  cloth. 
Almost  any  surface  may  be  stenciled.  This  is  often  done  by 
rubbing  crayola  or  wax  crayons  over  the  stencil  and  then  iron- 
ing, but  this  gives  a  less  attractive  effect,  although  it  is  much 
easier  for  little  children. 

Spatterflies.  This  clever  name  was  suggested  by  a  patient 
for  the  curious  and  truly  beautiful  butterflies  made  so  magically 
with  one  or  two  spatters  of  paint.  To  do  this  fold  a  piece  of 
fairly  heavy  white  paper  evenly  through  the  center  once ;  open 
and  on  one  side  only,  very  close  to  the  crease,  dab  two  or  three 
very  tiny  specks  of  paint  from  tube  colors — oils  will  work  best. 
Now  fold  back  the  paper  and  with  a  paper-knife  or  silver  table- 
knife  crease  down  very  hard,  first  along  the  fold  for  a  short 
distance  and  then  from  the  fold  outward.  Rub  down  very  hard, 
so  that  only  the  thinnest  possible  layer  of  paint  is  spread  between 
the  papers.     Now  open  and  the  result  will  surprise  you  both  as 


THE    IMPATIENT    BOY  75) 

to  blending  of  colors  and  beauty  of  form.  It  is  not  possible  to 
duplicate  these.  The  same  colors  may  be  used,  the  blending  will 
always  vary;  the  same  strokes  may  be  repeated,  the  forms  will 
never  be  reproduced.  Mount  these  on  pale  gray  paper  and  make 
a  truly  beautiful  decoration. 

Blue  Prints  made  from  natural  specimens  of  trees  and  leaves 
of  various  sorts  will  be  a  means  of  real  educational  pleasure. 
To  make  these  one  needs  only  a  small  printing  frame,  a  roll  of 
blue  print  paper,  the  leaves  and  some  running  water.  Lay  the 
leaf  on  the  glass,  cover  with  the  paper  with  the  sensitive  side 
towards  the  glass,  and  fasten ;  expose  to  the  direct  rays  of  the 
sun,  usually  four  or  five  minutes.  Sometimes  a  much  longer 
period  will  be  required  to  bring  out  any  detail  of  veins  which 
will  show  perfectly  in  a  good  print.  In  northern  latitudes  it 
requires  more  time.  In  Nova  Scotia,  recently,  a  twig  of  rose- 
bush was  exposed  two  hours  on  a  fair  day,  in  the  sun,  before 
the  veins  showed  in  the  print.  When  printed,  place  in  a  basin 
under  cold,  running  water  and  wash  very  thoroughly.  After  this 
place  between  two  layers  of  blotting  paper  to  dry.  These  make 
beautiful  nature-study  scrapbooks.  The  paper  may  be  cut,  but 
the  part  not  in  use  must  be  slipped  into  a  book  at  once  away 
from  light.  Get  the  paper  out  of  the  package  and  into  place 
as  quickly  as  possible,  as  it  is  spoiled  by  exposure  to  light.  Cover 
the  roll  of  paper  at  once. 

Impromptu  products  always  attract  children.  A  tiny  Christ- 
mas tree  was  being  decorated  for  an  old  lady  by  a  thoughtful 
nurse.  A  boy  in  the  house  at  once  set  to  work  to  make  a  Santa 
Claus  for  the  top.  The  body  was  quickly  rolled  up  from  absorb- 
ent cotton  kept  in  shape  by  red  string  wound  first  over  each  foot 
like  a  sandal  and  so  up  the  leg,  the  cotton  making  snowy  trousers. 
The  jacket  was  made  from  a  bit  of  red  bathrobe,  with  a  red 
leather  belt  and  cap,  the  last  set  on  a  cotton  wool  head.  The 
cheeks  were  tinted  with  red  ink,  the  features  marked  in  black, 
the  nose  pinched  up  of  cotton,  a  fine  white  beard  of  cotton  and 
a  pipe  made  from  a  little  brass  screwhook,  with  a  drop  of  black 


8o  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

sealing  wax  to  form  the  bowl.  All  that  was  lacking  was  the 
pack.  A  bit  of  brown,  leather-like  cloth  formed  the  bag,  and 
toys  cut  from  colored  paper  stuck  out  of  its  top. 

A  wishbone  Indian  is  made  by  applying  melted  brown  sealing 
wax  to  the  tip  for  a  head.  Shape  up  the  face  and  set  two  bright 
beads  for  eyes  before  the  wax  cools.  A  long  feather  may  also 
be  embedded  in  the  scalp.  The  feet  are  made  of  wax  and  have 
large  flat  soles,  so  that  the  Indian  stands  firmly.  The  dress  is  of 
bright  felt  and  has  an  under-cape  of  chamois  leather,  so  that 
it  may  be  used  as  a  penwiper.     One  model  has  this  inscription: 

"Once  I  was  a  wishbone, 
Growing  in  a  hen ; 
Now  I  am  an  Indian, 
Made  to  wipe  your  pen." 

Nearly  all  boys  like  to  play  Indians.  The  pounding  out  of 
grain  or  popcorn  in  a  mortar  or  bowl  affords  a  chance  to  work 
off  pent-up  feeling.  The  impulse  to  grind  may  be  transferred 
from  the  boy's  teeth  to  a  coffee  mill  or  meat  grinder.  This 
may  induce  perspiration  and  so  hasten  the  elimination  of  toxic 
substance. 

The  making  of  a  pumpkin  lantern  is  always  fascinating 
employment.  A  lantern  made  in  the  same  way  from  a  big  red 
apple  supplied  with  a  little  red  candle  will  furnish  light  enough 
for  a  child  to  eat  supper  by.  This  is  especially  useful  in  cases 
of  weak  eyes,  as  in  measles.  As  one  of  these  burned,  the  red 
wax  ran  out  of  the  grinning  mouth  and  cooled  in  the  shape  of 
a  long,  red  tongue. 

Kite  making  is  well  worth  trying  if  the  boy  can  be  taken 
out  to  watch  the  flight.  For  this  the  stock  must  be  light  and 
the  tail-weight  carefully  adjusted.  One  old  doctor  in  a  Con- 
necticut village  was  distinguished  for  his  kites  and  would  stand 
for  hours  at  a  time  in  rapt  admiration  in  the  midst  of  a  corn- 
field to  watch  his  treasures  in  upper  air.  Surely  the  story  of 
Franklin  and  his  kite  never  fails  to  gain  an  attentive  audience 
when  told  to  a  little  boy. 


CHAPTER    IX 

IN    THE    HOSPITAL 

The  space  allowed  the  average  ward  patient  is  far  from 
magfnificent.  The  law  has  been  obliged  to  step  in  to  insure  even 
the  modest  space  of  nine  square  feet  under  and  around  each 
bed.  The  space  for  the  patient's  belongings  is  even  smaller.  In 
the  majority  of  general  hospitals  the  clothing  in  which  the  patient 
arrives  is  quickly  bundled  up  and  sent  to  some  clothesroom,  there 
to  remain  until  the  discharge  of  the  patient.  Sometimes  in  a 
ward  of  nine  or  ten  beds  two  chests  of  drawers  are  provided, 
one  drawer  for  each  patient.  In  a  much  larger  proportion  of 
wards,  however,  the  only  place  which  the  patient  can  call  her 
own  is  the  tiny  drawer  in  her  bedside  table.  There  may  be  a 
small  shelf  under  this,  and  there  her  personal  property  is  allowed 
to  remain,  provided  there  be  no  litter  about  it. 

The  matter  of  personal  attention  is  also  painfully  limited, 
not  from  desire  but  necessity.  How  much  time,  you  ask,  has  the 
overtaxed  ward  nurse  to  give  to  the  treatment  of  her  patients  by 
this  occupation  method?  Little  enough  surely,  but  while  she 
makes  her  bed  can  she  not  give  through  word  of  mouth  a  new 
and  stimulating  suggestion?  While  she  rubs  a  back  or  combs 
hair  or  performs  some  of  the  "strictly  necessary"  duties  of  her 
profession  may  she  not  give,  perhaps,  a  more  potent  remedy  than 
any  contained  in  the  ward  medicine  closet?  Convalescence  as  a 
rule  is  not  long  tolerated  in  the  rush  of  the  hospital  service. 
One  not  infrequently  finds,  however,  old  ulcer  cases,  long  drain- 
age appendicitis  cases,  a  whole  sluggish  list,  any  one  of  which 
keeps  the  patient  stationary  in  a  ward  where  everything  around 
her  shifts  constantly.  What  shall  be  offered  to  these?  There 
are  certain  dreary  occupations  presented  by  the  hospital,  one  of 
the  most  miserable  being  the  picking  out  of  resterilized  gauze. 

8i 


82  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

If  treatment  by  suggestion  means  anything,  this  must  indeed 
fail  to  bring  joy  or  health  in  its  train.  An  endless  procession 
of  discharging  wounds  must  be  the  picture  presented. 

Whatever  work  we  offer  in  this  chapter  must  be  suited  to 
the  limitations  of  the  tiny  drawer  or  possibly  a  paper  box  on  the 
lower  shelf.  But  how  many  pretty  things  these  may  hold !  Let 
the  subject  be  a  young  woman.    Has  she  ever  crocheted  a 

Bean  Bag?  The  materials  needed  are  one  spool  of  colored 
silkateen,  cost  five  cents,  and  a  fine  steel  crochet  hook  of  the 
same  price.  Make  a  chain  of  six  stitches ;  join.  In  long  crochet 
stitch  fill  the  hole  as  full  as  it  will  hold  to  make  a  flat  circle, 
joining  the  first  and  last  stitch  to  keep  an  even  edge.  Chain 
two  and  make  the  second  row  of  long  stitch,  putting  the  hook 
only  over  the  chain  on  the  edge,  not  between  the  long  stitches. 
It  will  need  to  have  two  stitches  in  nearly  every  one  to  increase 
sufficiently.  In  this  way  continue  until  nine  rows  have  been  made 
and  the  mat  is  smooth  and  flat;  then  finish  off.  Make  a  second 
mat  exactly  like  the  first  and  crochet  the  two  together  with  a 
short  stitch,  leaving  an  inch  open  for  filling.  Fill,  not  too  full, 
with  dry  beans  and  close  up.  Finish  by  crocheting  a  little  scallop 
border  around.  Three  of  these  form  a  set  and  sell  for  thirty-five 
cents  each.  Piled  one  upon  the  other  in  a  neat  package  tied  with 
pretty  ribbon,  they  make  a  nice  holiday  gift. 

Chatelaine  Pinballs.  Sometimes  one  likes  a  few  pins 
close  at  hand.  Select  two  button  molds  the  size  of  a  small 
watch.  Cover  these  with  delicate  satin  or  silk  cut  a  quarter  of 
an  inch  larger  than  the  mold.  Before  covering,  the  satin  may 
be  decorated  in  fine  ribbon  work.  To  do  this  use  rococo  ribbon ; 
this  costs  four  cents  per  yard,  and  may  be  had  in  shaded  colors. 
Thread  this  directly  into  a  fine  darning  needle  and  sew  the  ribbon 
into  the  pattern.  No  stamping  is  necessary ;  one  stitch  makes  a 
petal,  another  a  leaf.  It  is  better  to  outline  the  tiny  stems  in 
fine  green  silk.  In  this  way  a  tiny  wreath,  a  bunch  of  daisies, 
a  four-leaved  clover,  etc.,  may  be  put  in  in  a  few  minutes.  Now 
cut  several  thicknesses  of  old  flannel  a  shade  smaller  than  the 


IN    THE   HOSPITAL  83 

mold  and  stitch  through  and  through  Hke  a  holder.  Next  sew 
a  band  of  baby  ribbon  to  match  the  silk  around  one  of  the  molds 
in  fine  overhand  stitching  on  the  outside,  leaving  enough  at  each 
end  to  tie  in  a  bow  when  finished.  Now  press  the  flannel  pad 
in  and,  holding  the  other  covered  mold  on  closely,  stitch  to  the 
other  edge  of  the  ribbon.  Tie  the  bow  and  fasten  well,  so  that 
the  pinball  may  hang  from  the  ribbon  bow  when  pinned  to  the 
waist.  Sometimes  a  dainty  row  of  featherstitch  is  done  on  the 
ribbon  after  the  ball  is  otherwise  finished.  These  sold  readily 
for  thirty  cents  each. 

A  Roller  Bandage  Pincushion.  Tear  old  or  new  white 
flannel  into  strips  one  and  one-half  inches  wide  and  wind  as  a 
bandage,  very  tightly.  Fasten  by  a  few  stitches.  Bias  flannel 
should  not  be  used.  Cover  one  end  smoothly  and  neatly  with 
silk  or  linen,  decorating  it  with  an  embroidered  wreath,  eyelet 
work,  or  set  in  a  lace  medallion.  Cover  the  bottom  with  plain 
material.  Cover  the  sides  with  a  dainty  ribbon  of  the  exact  width 
and  join  very  neatly.  Sew  the  upper  edge  of  the  ribbon  to  the 
top  of  the  cushion  with  a  coarse,  half-buttonhole  stitch  of  em- 
broidery silk.  Cover  two  brass  rings  with  the  same  silk  in  button- 
hole stitch  and  sew  to  opposite  upper  sides  of  the  cushion  for 
handles.  The  pins  go  in  readily  between  the  flannel  edges  of  the 
roll. 


Fig.  26 


Lamb's-wool  Cushions.  These  are  made  by  cutting  from 
writing  paper  seven  hexagons  the  same  size  as  Figure  26. 
Cover  these  with  dainty  Dresden  ribbon,  if  possible  of  a  garland 
pattern,  joined  to  make  it  appear  continuous.     Six  should  be 


84  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

covered  thus ;  the  seventh  forms  the  center  and  is  best  covered 
with  a  bit  having  a  tiny  bouquet  or  sprig  in  the  middle  or  other 
design  which  makes  a  definite  pattern.  Sew  these  six  pieces  all 
around  this  center  and  together  down  one  side  by  very  fine  over- 
hand on  the  wrong  side.  Around  the  entire  edge  sew.  on  the 
right  side,  a  strip  of  ribbon  three-eighths  of  an  inch  wide.  Join 
with  a  fine  seam.  Cut  seven  more  hexagons  and  cover  either  like 
the  top  or  with  plain  silk  for  the  bottom.  Sew  this  to  the  second 
side  of  the  ribbon,  leaving  an  opening  for  stuffing.     Stuff  with 


Fig.  27 

soft  lamb's  wool,  which  may  be  bought  as  wadding  or  from  the 
factory  as  fine  wool,  or  from  the  surgical  supply  places  at  the 
rate  of  two  dollars  per  pound.  A  pair  of  dressing  forceps  is  best 
to  stufif  with,  as  this  little  cushion  has  many  angles  and  depends 
on  perfect  shape  for  its  beauty.  Only  a  little  wool  is  required. 
When  very  full,  close  up.  These  are  dainty  and  the  pins  will 
never  rust  in  them. 

A  Shaker  Bonnet.  From  light  gray  felt  or  broadcloth  cut 
two  pieces  like  the  pattern.  (Fig.  27.)  From  delicate  pink  or 
blue  cashmere  cut  two  more  and  pink  them  around  the  edge. 


IN   THE   HOSPITAL 


85 


Place  these  between  the  two  gray  pieces;  fasten  at  back  of  neck 
and  under  chin.  Trim  with  ribbon  bows  and,  last,  tuck  a  white 
or  colored  celluloid  thimble  in  the  crown  to  form  the  headpiece. 
This  makes  a  charming  needlebook.  A  little  doll's  face  might 
be  added. 

Shamrock  Needlecase.  Cut  four  pieces  of  stiff  cardboard 
like  the  pattern  (Fig.  28)  and  four  more  of  stiff  paper.  Cover 
two  cardboard  and  two  paper  pieces  with  green  silk  or  satin. 


Fig.  28 

Cover  the  other  two  cardboard  and  the  other  two  paper  sections 
with  a  contrasting  shade  of  silk.  Sew  the  four  cardboard  pieces 
together,  one  green  and  one  contrasting  shade,  making  two  double 
pieces.  Sew  the  four  paper  pieces  together  in  the  same  way. 
You  now  have  four  double  pieces,  two  stiff  and  two  pliable.  Fold 
these  last  two  straight  through  the  center  from  the  point  to  the 
top  notch.  This  makes  them  appear  half  pieces.  Sew  all  four 
pieces  together  point  to  point,  stiff  pieces  opposite  and  flexible 
pieces  with  folded  edge  turned  inward.  Of  course  all  green  sides 
are  outward.     In  folding,  the  green  side  is  inward.     Sew  from 


86  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

the  central  point  out  as  far  as  the  first  corner  in  such  a  way 
that  the  two  paper  sections  fold  in  on  either  side  when  the  case 
is  closed.  Fasten  strips  of  ribbon  across  inside  to  hold  papers  of 
needles,  etc.  A  little  bag  for  thread  may  go  on  one  of  the  stiff 
sides.  Add  ribbon  ties.  When  the  case  is  opened  it  resembles 
a  four-leaved  clover. 

Black  Dinah  Emery.  Cut  two  disks  of  firm  cotton  cloth 
two  inches  in  diameter.  Stitch  these  tightly  together,  leaving  a 
small  opening  to  fill.  Fill  very  hard  with  emery  and  press  out 
round.  A  tiny  funnel  made  of  thin  sheet  brass  rolled  up  will  be 
found  of  great  service  in  filling.  Sew  up  tightly  and  cover  one 
side  with  black  silk,  bringing  it  over  the  seam  a  quarter  of  an 
inch,  gathering  the  edge  as  in  covering  a  button  mold.  On 
this  work  eyes,  nose  and  mouth  in  black,  red  and  white  silk, 
or  else  paint  them.  Now  cut  a  half-handkerchief  piece  from  gay, 
soft  silk  and  sew  the  long  side  around  the  seam  so  that  it  will 
turn  back,  leaving  pointed  ends  at  the  top.  These  ends  are 
hemmed,  and  as  the  middle  point  is  brought  under  and  nicely 
arranged  these  two  points  are  brought  together  and  tied  in  a 
genuine  bandana  knot  on  the  forehead. 

Heart-shaped  Emery.  Another  emery  which  always  seems 
mysterious  in  its  construction  is  made  by  measuring  a  perfect 
square  of  two-inch  satin  ribbon  of  very  firm  quality,  allowing 
for  a  quarter-inch  turn  in  as  it  is  cut.  Fold  this  square  diag- 
onally and  sew  from  both  outer  points  in  a  close  overhand,  leaving 
a  tiny  opening  a  quarter  of  an  inch  or  so  on  one  side  of  the 
middle  point  for  filling.  Before  doing  this  it  is  well  to  baste 
down  the  two  cut  edges  very  closely.  Do  not  cut  off  the  sew- 
ing silk  at  the  opening,  but  unthread  it,  and  after  filling  use  this 
rethreaded  to  close  up  the  seam.  This  obviates  a  knot.  It  should 
not  be  possible  to  detect  the  place  after  closing.  Before  filling, 
draw  the  two  outer  points  almost  together  with  double  silk,  hav- 
ing several  threads  over  which  a  buttonhole  stitch  is  worked  as 
in  making  a  loop.  Insert  into  the  opening  the  little  brass  funnel 
mentioned  above  and  pour  in  the  emery.    This  requires  consider- 


IN   THE   HOSPITAL 


87 


able  skill.     The  emery  works  down  into  the  long  points  and 
the   ribbon  gradually  assumes  the   form  shown   in  Figure  29. 


Fig.  29 

The  emery  should  be  packed  in  very  firmly  indeed  to  give  good 
form.  The  finger  can  be  worked  in  around  the  hole  to  shape 
it.  If  the  emery  is  not  firmly  packed  these  outer  points  will 
be  flabby.  When  no  more  can  be  filled  in,  sew  it  up,  brush  off 
any  emery  spilled,  and  complete  by  a  bow  of  narrow  ribbon  tied 
over  the  bar.  Great  care  must  be  used  in  filling  those  of  delicate 
color  not  to  spill  the  emery  and  so  soil  the  satin. 

A  Fish  Pinball.     From  Gloucester,  Massachusetts,  comes 
this  appropriate  souvenir.     From  a  bit  of  cardboard  cut  two 


Fig.  30 


88  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

sections  like  Figure  30.  Cover  each  neatly  with  some  silk  or 
satin  suggesting  fish  shades.  Sew  these  together;  arrange  com- 
mon pins  to  form  the  fins.    Use  a  fancy-headed  pin  for  the  eye. 

Match  Boxes.  The  little  sliding  match  boxes  can  be  daintily 
covered  and  used  for  rubber  bands.  Many  materials  may  be 
used,  fancy  paper,  silk,  ribbon  or  linen.  A  neat  design  is  em- 
broidered or  painted  on  the  top.  Almost  anybody  likes  a  box 
of  rubber  bands. 

Ribbon  Flowers.  One  of  the  most  attractive  and  profitable 
occupations  is  the  making  of  ribbon  flowers  for  evening  wear 
or  for  trimming  hats  or  other  decoration.  This  requires  a  certain 
knack,  but  no  more  than  can  be  learned  with  a  little  practice. 
The  materials  necessary  are  a  spool  of  green  stem  wire,  a  sheet 
or  two  of  dark  green  tissue  paper  for  winding  stems,  white  wire 
taste,  ribbon  and  foliage. 

A  Bunch  of  Violets.  One  roll  of  number  four  violet  satin 
ribbon  costing  about  sixty  cents,  stem  wire,  green  paper  and 
foliage  are  needed.  Cut  one  whole  spool  of  wire  into  six  or 
seven  inch  lengths.  Cut  green  tissue  paper  into  quarter-inch 
width  strips  and  wind  the  wire  stems  with  this,  covering  com- 
pletely. Twist  firmly  at  the  ends.  In  covering  the  stems  the 
paper  should  not  be  held  at  right  angles  with  the  wire,  but  at  a 
long  slope.  If  at  right  angles  much  more  paper  will  be  used 
and  a  thick,  clumsy  stem  will  result.  With  the  ribbon  make  an 
irregular  bow,  simply  holding  without  tying  and  with  no  knot 
in  the  center,  the  ends  and  loops  being  not  more  than  a  half- 
inch  long.  (Fig.  31.)  Pinch  up  the  center  and  twist  over  and 
around  it  the  end  of  the  stem  wire,  nipping  it  in  tightly  and  so 
bringing  both  ends  and  loops  pointing  upward.  Hold  the  ribbon 
with  all  four  parts  of  the  bow  together  in  the  fingers  of  the  left 
hand  as  the  wire  is  twisted.  In  this  way  continue  until  the  ribbon 
is  used  up.  In  a  bunch  of  violet  foliage  as  purchased  there  is 
usually  enough  for  two  or  more  of  these  bunches.  Arrange  the 
violets  in  a  nice  bunch  and  border  with  leaves.  If  enough  ribbon 
is  provided,  tie  several  bows  in  the  ends  of  as  many  irregular 
lengths  and  use  for  a  shower  to  tie  up  the  bunch. 


IN    THE    HOSPITAL 


89 


Sweet  Peas.  Ribbon,  pale  pink,  white  or  lavender,  one  and 
one-quarter  inch  wide  is  used.  Cut  stems  and  wind  as  for  violets. 
Cut  ribbon  into  inch  and  a  half  lengths,  double  one  end  and  sew 
together ;  turn  to  form  a  little  hoodlike  pocket.  Cut  the  other 
end  in  a  double  scallop ;  pucker  up  in  the  center  and  twist  wire 
around  as  for  the  violets.  Cut  a  few  lengths  of  stem  wire,  with- 
out winding  with  paper,  twist  very  regularly  around  a  knitting 
needle  for  two  inches.  Slip  off  this  spiral  tendril  and  mix  with 
flowers.     Sweet  pea  foliage  is  hard  to  find,  but  one  can  usually 


Fig.  31 


Fig.  32 


find    something    which    may   be    used,   often    in    shopworn    and 
discarded  sprays. 

Roses.  For  large  roses  two  and  one-half  inch  ribbon  will  be 
needed,  about  one  yard  or  a  trifle  over  for  a  rose.  Cut  six-inch 
stems  of  wire  taste,  turn  one  end  over  the  finger  to  form  a  loop 
and  twist  around.  In  one  end  of  the  ribbon  lay  several  length- 
wise plaits  for  an  inch  or  two  and  loop  over  the  wire  loop, 
sewing  firmly.  This  forms  the  center.  Now,  holding  the  stem 
in  the  left  hand  and  the  ribbon  in  the  right,  turn  the  stem  so 
that  the  ribbon  twists  slightly  towards  the  right.  Loop  the 
ribbon  for  each  petal,  turning  between  each  loop  and  the  next, 
always  in  the  same  direction.  This  turning  gives  each  petal  a 
hollow  side  towards  the  center  and  a  convex  side  outside.  Con- 
tinue in  this  way,  sewing  each  one  as  it  is  formed  until  the 
ribbon  is  used  up.  The  tendency  will  be  to  make  the  petals 
look  like  bows  and  not  like  rose  petals,  and  also  to  creep  down 


90  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

the  stem.  These  two  things  must  be  guarded  against.  Push 
the  outer  petals  up  to  almost  cover  the  center.  Last,  wind  the 
stem  with  green  tissue  paper,  using  a  little  paste  at  the  start 
around  the  rose.  Rosebuds  are  made  the  same  except  that  the 
ribbon  is  cut  into  loops  one  and  a  half  inch  long  when  doubled. 
One  and  one-half  inch  width  is  also  used.  Gather  coarsely 
across  the  bottom  and  draw  up  as  shown  in  Figure  32.  This 
hollows  the  loop.  Roll  back  the  two  double  corners  and  catch 
with  an  invisible  stitch  to  the  petal.  Arrange  these  around 
a  center  made  as  for  the  rose  and  having  each  one  overlap  the 
preceding  one  slightly.  Finish  with  stem  paper  and  arrange 
roses  and  buds  among  rose  foliage.  The  corners  of  the  rose 
petals  may  be  rolled  back  in  the  same  way  as  those  of  the  bud. 
Another  way  to  make  very  large  roses  is  to  cut  petals  of  silk, 
sew  the  edges  of  two  together  and  turn  like  a  pocket.  Put  a 
fine  wire  inside  around  the  edge  and  stitch  around  the  petal  with 
corresponding  shade  of  silk.  Arrange  these  around  an  artificial 
flower  center  to  form  a  large,  flaring  rose.  In  these  the  petals 
may  be  shaded  and  form  a  very  rich  rose.  Small  baby  roses 
may  be  made  of  narrow  ribbon  and  arranged  in  wreaths  with 
fine  rose  foliage. 

Another  ribbon  flower  which  lacks  a  name  but  which  has 
figured  largely  in  Fifth  Avenue  millinery  is  made  by  twisting 
inch-wide  ribbon  in  two  rolls  towards  each  other,  thus  forming 
a  pointed  petal  with  a  crease  down  the  center.  These  petals  are 
arranged  around  a  covered  center  in  groups  of  five  and  so  made 
up  into  clusters  of  blossoms.  Leaves  are  made  of  ribbon  with 
considerable  success  by  using  a  green  picot  edge  ribbon,  half- 
inch  width.  Double  it  for  an  inch  and  a  half  and  gather  the 
double  edge  together  on  one  side ;  draw  it  down  rather  closely 
and  open.  This  forms  the  midrib  to  the  leaf,  and  arranging 
these  as  rose  leaves  the  effect  is  satisfactory.  All  these  bring 
good  prices  when  well  made. 

Blackberries.  For  these  a  rather  heavier  wire  is  used,  as 
black-covered  bonnet  wire.     Cut  for  stems  and  on  the  end  sew 


IN   THE   HOSPITAL  91 

a  roll  of  black,  soft  cloth  as  a  foundation.  This  should  be  longer 
than  wide.  On  this  sew  black  beads,  the  size  of  the  separate 
segments  of  a  blackberry,  until  wholly  covered.  A  bit  of  brown 
cambric  or  cotton  is  cut  for  a  calyx  and  fastened  to  the  base 
of  each  berry.  The  blackberry  belongs  to  the  rose  family,  and 
a  few  wild  rose  leaves  may  be  used  with  them  in  lieu  of  their 
own  foliage.  These  are  used  on  black  hats  and  bonnets,  and 
a  bunch  shown  in  a  little  birch-bark  basket  has  attracted  much 
attention.    This  leads  up  to  other 

Beadwork.  It  is  well  known  that  the  savage  is  charmed 
by  colored  beads,  and  there  is  still  enough  of  the  same  spirit 
remaining  in  the  civilized  mind  to  render  them  attractive.  Beads 
are  strung,  woven  and  sewed  upon  a  foundation  of  canvas.  They 
may  also  be  strung  and  knitted  or  crocheted.  It  would  be  a 
mistake  to  go  into  much  detailed  instruction  here  when  such 
a  wealth  of  this  material  may  be  found  in  the  shops  and  fancy- 
work  papers.  A  well-made  bead  bag  easily  sells  for  twelve  or 
fifteen  dollars.  Bead  purses  cost  less  but  command  good  prices ; 
necklaces  range  from  high  to  low  prices  and  are  of  almost  in- 
finite variety.  One  fine  example  of  beadwork  is  a  piece  done 
by  the  Eskimos,  showing  bead  patterns  inlaid  into  hair  seal 
fur.  The  skin  is  nicely  cut  away  in  a  definite  pattern  and  the 
space  perfectly  filled  with  colored  beads.  Little  children  often 
do  good  work  with  beads,  and  the  same  is  true  of  the  blind. 
One  of  the  best  places  to  buy  beads  and  obtain  directions  is 
Isaac  D.  Allen  Company,  21  Winter  Street,  Boston,  Massachu- 
setts. They  supply  a  nice  little  book  on  "Apache  Bead  Work" 
for  twenty-five  cents,  which  is  full  of  instructions.  A  number 
of  illustrated  leaflets  showing  a  great  variety  of  strung  neck- 
laces, with  prices  and  instruction,  are  also  sent.  In  the  chapter 
on  work  for  the  blind  more  will  be  given  on  the  subject  of 
beadwork. 

Basketry.  There  is  a  chance  for  the  making  of  small  but 
dainty  baskets  by  a  hospital  patient.  The  only  trouble  in  doing 
this  is  the  fact  that  it  makes  a  little  more  litter,  but  if  properly 


92 


INVALID    OCCUPATION 


carried  on  lovely  baskets  inay  be  made.  The  materials  for  this 
are  fine  reed,  number  o  or  i  or  2,  colored  and  uncolored  raffia, 
a  raffia  needle  and  a  glass  of  water.  All  the  first  named  may 
be  obtained  at  a  school  supply  place,  as  J.  L.  Hammett's,  Devon- 
shire Street,  Boston,  or  Milton  Bradley's,  Boston  and  New  York. 
The  colored  raffia  prepared  by  various  craftspeople  is  best.  It 
is  a  mistake  to  allow  these  materials  to  soak  any  length  of  time 
as  is  sometimes  suggested,  since  they  shrink  after  being  made  up 
wet  and  an  irregular  basket  results.  To  start,  select  a  reed ; 
whittle  one  end,  as  in  Figure  33.     Moisten  slightly.     With  the 


Fig.  33 


Fig.  34 


desired  shade  of  raffia  cover  the  reed  for  an  inch  or  so  back, 
allowing  the  raffia  to  lie  flat  and  lengthwise  and  so  over  the  tip. 
Lead  back  to  the  tip  and  wind  upward  closely  for  an  inch. 
Thread  this  raffia,  which  has  been  split  and  moistened  slightly, 
into  a  raffia  needle.  Bend  the  flexible  tip  of  the  reed  into  a  tiny 
coil  and,  holding  very  firmly,  sew  over  and  over  with  the  raffia 
until  a  close,  firm  little  buttonlike  center  is  made.  (Fig.  34.) 
You  may  now  progress  by  a  number  of  different  basket  stitches. 
The  Lazy  Squaw  Stitch  is  made  by  winding  the  raffia  over  the 
outer  reed  once  or  twice,  then  taking  a  long  stitch  over  the  two 
reeds,  the  outer  and  the  inner,  as  in  Figure  35. 

This  stitch  lends  itself  to  a  great  number  of  patterns.     The 
Knot  Stitch  or  Oatmeal  Stitch  is  much  the  same  except  that  after 


m\\wm7MW////m  ww/m'/^M  y//m/MW////M 

^.Tii  illl  lllhiill  llilf  llil  iili'llll  nil  :ilii  [III  Hill  (III  III  III  till  llil^  III  llti  II II  III 


Fig.  35 


IN   THE   HOSPITAL 


93 


the  long  stitch  is  taken  the  raffia  is  brought  over  across  this  long 
stitch  at  right  angles  between  the  reeds  like  a  back  stitch,  before 
going  on  with  the  winding  between  the  long  stitches.  This  gives 
a  knotted  or  grainlike  appearance  and  spreads  the  reeds  some- 
what apart,  as  in  Figure  36. 


Fig.  36 

The  third  stitch  is  the  Figure  of  Eight  Stitch,  and  consists  in 
winding  the  raffia  over  and  under  the  outer  and  inner  reeds,  as 
the  name  signifies.  It  will  be  best  to  bring  the  raffia  up  from 
the  outside  of  the  inner  reed  tozvards  you,  over  the  outer  reed 
from  you,  up  again  between  the  reeds  towards  you  and  then 
down  between  the  inner  reed  and  the  one  next  below.  In 
Figure  37  the  two  reeds  are  spread  apart  to  show  the  method, 


Fig.  37 

but  in  actual  work  they  lie  close  together,  the  raffia  being  tightly 
drawn  and  the  reeds  being  really  twice  covered,  as  the  inner  or 
lower  one  is  always  the  upper  one  of  the  previous  pair.  The 
work  is  very  firm  and  substantial.  This  is  a  slow  weave,  but 
one  of  the  best  and  adapted  to  straight  line  designs  rather  than 
curves,  while  the  Squaw  Stitch  or  Knot  Stitch  may  be  used  for 
both  sorts  of  patterns.  There  are  many  excellent  books  on 
basketry,  "  Practical  Basket  Making,"  by  George  Wharton  James, 
being  one  of  the  best.  A  bed  patient  will  do  well  to  attempt  only 
small  baskets,  which  seem  simply  another  form  of  light  needle- 


94  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

work.    It  is  well  to  learn  the  stitch  thoroughly  and  to  try  a  simple 
shape  before  attempting  any  pattern. 

Crochet  in  cotton  or  linen  thread  is  one  of  the  commonest 
occupations.  This  is  not  free  from  eyestrain  and  should  not 
be  permitted  to  the  point  of  fatigue.  Some  patients  do  this 
easily ;  to  others  it  would  be  a  decided  strain.  To  any  interested 
the  making  of  a  scrapbook  of  crochet  designs  from  the  various 
fancy  work  papers  is  an  especially  good  work.  The  patient 
whose  eyes  do  not  admit  of  the  actual  work  will  be  able  to  make 
a  fine  collection  of  designs. 


CHAPTER   X 

GRANDMOTHER 

Rarely  is  there  found  an  old  lady  who  is  not  anxious  to  be 
active.  Rheumatism  may  have  a  tight  clutch  upon  her,  her 
mind  may  show  plain  signs  of  failing  processes,  pain  may  give 
many  a  twinge  and  poor  eyesight  may  exasperate;  still,  she  "sees 
things  to  do."  Ill  fares  it  with  her  nurse  if  she  has  been  brought 
up  to  know  only  her  hospital  work.  What  poor  opinion  the  old 
lady  has  of  a  young  woman  who  buys  all  her  underwear  ready- 
made,  who  never  learned  to  knit !  How  she  despises  the  nurse 
who.  when  her  special  nursing  duties  are  over,  sits  down  with 
folded  hands  or  with  a  novel  for  her  own  entertainment !  Just 
because  she  is  herself  limited  in  her  activities  she  wishes  to  see 
able-bodied  people  busy.  Sitting  beside  such  an  old  lady  a  nurse 
dressed  a  doll  for  her  little  granddaughter.  Long  after,  when 
the  nurse  called,  Grandma  had  no  recollection  of  her  face  or 
name,  but  when  the  doll  was  mentioned  her  face  at  once  lighted. 
"What,"  she  cried,  "were  you  the  one  that  made  the  green  cape 
with  the  pink  f eatherstitching  ?  How  nice  it  looked ! "  A  piece 
of  good  mending  or  a  child's  garment  made  from  some  cast-off 
grown-up  article  does  such  a  patient  more  good  than  her  porous 
plaster.  Let  every  nurse  learn  to  knit  before  her  graduation. 
There  is  a  record  of  one  who  escaped  this — possibly  intention- 
ally. Her  first  case  proved  to  be  an  old  dementia  patient  who 
could  do  nothing  but  knit.  The  nurse's  postgraduate  training 
had  to  be  along  this  line. 

Another  old  lady  fell  downstairs  and  was  put  to  bed  to  die. 
Cherishing  a  private  preference  in  the  matter  she  declined  to 
depart  but  waited  for  her  old  bones  to  mend,  which  process 
was  indifferently  accomplished.  As  she  felt  herself  pulling  back 
into  life  she  thought  of  no  gown  of  sufficient  dignity  to  grace 

95 


96  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

her  first  "sitting  up  for  callers."  Day  and  night  she  pondered 
and  at  last  announced  her  solution  of  the  problem.  Being  at  all 
times  far  removed  from  extravagance  she  had  carefully  saved 
the  reUcs  of  an  old  black  silk  cloak  which  came  within  six  inches 
of  the  required  length.  How  to  make  good  this  "all  round  defi- 
ciency" seemed  a  difficult  matter,  but  no,  during  all  their  married 
life  her  husband  had  worn  a  silk  hat  for  best.  Fifty  years'  hats 
had  been  conscientiously  stripped  of  their  beaver  before  dismissal. 
A  goodly  roll  of  these  hat  strips  had  waited  long  for  resurrec- 
tion. Of  course,  frequent  piecing  was  necessary,  but  neatly  done 
this  added  to  rather  than  subtracted  from  the  glory.  Then  fate 
turned  and  the  hats  gave  out  on  the  last  six  inches  in  the  back. 
No  caller  was  allowed  to  leave  the  room  after  this  without  the 
polite  request  from  Grandma,  "  Excuse  me,  but  you  do  not  chance 
to  have  a  gentleman's  old  silk  hat  by  you,  I  suppose?"  No  one 
had,  so  at  last  the  gap  had  to  be  filled  with  a  piece  from  the 
crown,  a  pinwheel  whirl  which,  though  always  a  problem  in 
brushing,  still  preserved  the  integrity  of  the  work  as  "trimmed 
wholly  with  Daniel's  hats."  To  the  nurse  fell  the  privilege  of 
making  this  wondrous  gown.  As  it  grew  in  form  and  stateliness 
the  glow  of  satisfaction  mounted  ever  higher  in  Grandma's  soul, 
and  there  is  no  question  but  that  her  digestion  was  improved 
by  this  curious  plastic  operation. 

Directions  for  knitting  would,  perhaps,  be  superfluous  here, 
as  books  and  papers  teem  with  them.  The  really  important 
point  is  to  learn  to  do  it. 

As  a  rule  old  people  will  not  care  to  learn  new  things.  They 
do,  however,  like  new  adaptations  of  old  processes.  These  can 
go  on  indefinitely,  so  that  there  need  be  little  monotony.  Even 
if  the  patient  be  reduced  to  knitting  only  facecloths,  there  are 
many  sorts  of  these :  checkerwork,  fancy  borders,  smooth  and 
rough  sides,  and  the  bath  towels  knitted  of  linen  tape  will  occupy 
much  time.  Absorbent  knitting  cotton  makes  a  fine  bath  towel 
which  brings  a  very  good  price.  This  is  a  German  cotton,  light, 
soft   and    fine.      A   nurse   should    learn    all    these    stitches    and, 


GRANDMOTHER  97 

above  all,  she  should  learn  to  pick  up  dropped  stitches,  no  matter 
how  much  they  have  "run  down"  or  become  involved  in  the 
pattern. 

One  of  the  next  best  occupations  for  an  old  lady  is  Cross- 
stitch.  Of  this  much  has  already  been  said  in  the  one-hand 
lesson.  Attractive  patterns  may  often  be  found  in  carpets,  couch 
covers,  wall  paper  and  oilcloth.  To  take  down  such  a  pattern 
get  a  sheet  of  paper  ruled  in  checks  or  draw  crosslines  on  a  piece 
of  ordinary  ruled  paper.  With  black  and  colored  ink  or  pencil 
check  off  the  pattern,  and  it  is  ready  then  to  work  from.  Patterns 
worked  on  plain  linens  through  railroad  canvas,  which  is  after- 
ward pulled  out  thread  by  thread,  are  often  combined  with  a 
drawn-work  border.  The  D.  M.  C.  Library  issue  good  books 
of  design. 

Patchwork.  Can  any  one  read  "Aunt  Jane  of  Kentucky" 
and  sneer  at  patchwork?  Perhaps  it  seems  foolish  to  a  young 
and  vigorous  subject,  but  when  stiff  and  crooked  fingers  find 
their  exercise  therein  the  sneer  changes  to  admiration.  And 
why  may  it  not  be  truly  beautiful?  We  pay  large  sums  to  have 
tiled  floors  laid  in  patterns ;  we  visit  museums  to  look  at  mosaics 
— patchwork,  every  one.  There  need  be  no  cutting  up  of  new 
cloth  into  pieces  to  sew  together  again.  Take  the  scraps,  the 
remnants,  put  them  into  feeble  hands  and  let  some  one  sleep 
the  warmer  for  the  work.  Very  fine  examples  of  patchwork 
quilts  are  seen  in  the  South.  Golden  oranges  and  green  leaves 
applied  to  a  creamy  white  ground  finely  quilted  constituted  one 
of  these  examples.  A  most  pathetic  reminder  of  a  clouded  mind, 
or  rather  one  which  had  never  known  clearness,  was  embodied  in 
a  box  of  "patch-scraps"  with  a  great  sacking  needle  still  stick- 
ing in  the  work,  just  as  the  hand  left  it  to  gain  through  death 
a  new  liberty  and  wider  range  of  activity.  This  was  under  the 
garret  eaves  of  a  sweet  old  Southern  home  where  all  the  other 
fingers  had  been  as  deft  as  these  were  feeble. 

A  Calendar  Quilt.  Just  a  year  in  the  making,  this  bed- 
spread was  conceived  and  executed  by  one  woman  with  infinite 


98  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

pains  and  careful  thought.  Composed  of  twelve  large  squares, 
each  square  a  month,  each  made  in  its  proper  month. 

January  is  full  of  midwinter  cheer.  Strips  of  white  and 
silvery  gray  suggest  ice  and  snow,  with  some  of  the  greens  and 
red  of  Christmas  left  over.    All  point  to  a  Happy  New  Year. 

February  suggests  Colonial  days.  Blue  and  buff  are  its  colors. 
Quaint  old  silks  and  figured  waistcoats;  all  the  old-time  finery 
mustered  for  the  minuet  on  Washington's  Birthday. 

St.  Patrick  is  up  betimes  in  March.  Yellow  and  green,  with 
dull  blue  for  the  skies,  but  unmistakable  signs  of  spring  withal. 

April  is  fair  in  lilac  and  white  for  Easter.  A  yellow  chick 
peeps  from  the  center  and  a  rabbit  or  two  peer  out. 

The  Maypole  colors  in  all  their  spring  gayety  are  gathered 
in  the  fifth  square.  Tender  green  and  Mayflower  pink,  they  all 
make  merry  together. 

Garlands  of  roses  in  Dresden  ribbon,  with  rich  greens  in 
yellow  sunlight,  bring  midsummer  to  the  center  of  the  quilt. 
June  holds  court  surrounded  by  the  months. 

To  an  American  July  can  have  but  three  colors ;  but  the  red, 
white  and  blue  are  softened  by  creamy  tints,  and  it  seems  like 
an  old  silk  flag,  beautiful  in  the  past  as  well  as  in  the  present. 

August  speaks  of  vacation  days.  The  summer  girl  with  her 
floating  silks  of  dainty  shades  is  there,  and  one  or  two  of  the 
cravats  of  the  youths  about  her  have  found  a  place. 

September  is,  perhaps,  most  beautiful  of  all,  the  fruit  time 
of  the  year.  Purples  many-toned,  with  yellow  of  birch  leaf  and 
ripening  grain ;  brown  leaves  and  pale  autumn  skies. 

October  is  lavish  of  gold  of  pumpkin  and  russet  of  oak. 
Crimson  maple  leaves  against  the  late  greens.  A  carnival  of 
color. 

November  is  lovely.  Blues  and  grays,  purplish  haze  with 
two  dashes  of  golden  sunlight  across  the  center. 

Last  of  all  comes  December,  with  all  the  Christmas  greens, 
holly  ribbon  and  scarlet.  It  is  in  truth  a  merry  square.  Has  the 
time  been  lost  in  its  making? 


GRANDMOTHER 


99 


Y 


Sid. 


4 


.Ulr 


FiG.  38 


Fig.  39 


Fig.  40 

Grandmother's  Chair.  How  many  grandmothers  have 
made  these  workbox  chairs,  cut  by  this  pattern?  (Figs.  ^8,  39, 
and  40.)  The  seat  lifts  to  form  the  Ud  to  the  box  and  is  stuffed, 
as  is  the  back,  for  a  cushion.  Cut  two  of  each  piece  from  paste- 
board, cover  with  flowery  chintz  and  sew  overhand  all  around 
each  two  pieces.     Cut  two  squares  the  size  of  the  lower  line  x 


i 


INVALID   OCCUPATION 


for  bottom  of  box  and  two  more  the  size  of  top  line  v  for  seat. 
Then  sew  them  together  and  see  how  many  will  exclaim,  "Well, 
if  there  isn't  one  of  those  chairs  such  as  Grandma  used  to 
make!" 

A  McGiNTY.  Here  he  sits  before  you.  A  droll  Uttle  figure, 
made  by  an  old  lady  of  ninety  odd  years.  You  will  recognize 
him  sitting  in  the  center  of  the  picture  on  the  opposite  page, 
on  the  edge  of  the  little  braided  mat.  An  old  stiff  linen  cuff 
rolled  up  and  fastened  forms  his  body ;  over  the  top  is  puckered 
a  velvet  cap.  A  little  larger  velvet  bag  is  sewed  over  the  lower 
end,  after  tucking  into  the  cuff  a  big  glass  marble,  or  alley. 
Funny  little  flippers  of  velvet  with  chamois  skin  hands  are  sewed 
on  and  little  legs  and  feet  to  match.  A  Brownie  face  is  marked 
with  ink  on  the  white  cuff.  This  fellow  turns  repeated  somer- 
saults when  started  at  the  top  of  an  inclined  plane,  as  the  big 
alley  rolls  to  the  other  end  of  the  cuff  at  each  pitch.  Sometimes 
these  are  called  "Brownies,"  but  this  grandmother  calls  hers  a 
"  McGinty." 

Kitchen  Holders  may  be  made  in  many  ways,  from  the 
common  square  or  round  shapes,  neatly  bound,  to  the  elaborate 
chicken.  For  the  last,  cut  two  sections  like  Figure  41,  sew  up 
to  form  the  head  and  back,  stuff  the  head  and,  spreading  the 
wings,  cut  a  round  or  oval  piece  to  fit.  Sew  this  to  the  sides 
and  bind  around  with  braid.  Add  black  bead  eyes  and  a  red 
flannel  comb.     Make  the  bill  with  yellow  thread. 

A  most  desirable  holder  is  made  by  cutting  two  flannel  squares 
and  putting  between  them  a  piece  of  old  leather  such  as  may  be 
cut  from  the  top  of  an  old  boot.  Cover  with  cotton  or  some 
smooth  material.  This  holder  can  be  much  thinner  and  will  not 
heat  through  as  does  a  common  wool  or  cotton  holder. 

Some  holders  are  knitted  and  some  crocheted  of  colored 
twine.  The  roll-like  teapot  holders  are  knitted  in  this  way. 
Using  either  one  or  two  colors  of  Germantown  yarn,  cast  on 
forty-four  stitches.  Knit  back  and  forth  plain  until  you  have 
four  ribs,  then  knit  four  stitches  plain :  then  with  second  shade 


GRANDMOTHEll'  -  :  .;'/';; ;,- ; \  ;  ioi 


Fig.  41 

knit  four;  now  with  first  thread  brought  tightly  behind  the  last 
four  stitches  knit  four  more,  then  four  with  the  first.  In  this 
way  repeat  until  you  have  seven  groups  of  four  stitches  each, 
thrown  up  into  puflfs  by  the  other  thread  passing  behind  tightly. 
This  also  makes  the  holder  double.  At  the  last  knit  four  plain 
for  the  border.  If  two  shades  are  used  it  will  make  checker 
work  of  alternate  colors.  If  only  one  shade,  as  corn  color,  is 
used,  it  will  have  the  effect  of  an  ear  of  corn  in  long  yellow 
ridges.  A  green  border  is  pretty  in  the  latter  case.  When  the 
desired  length  is  reached,  knit  four  ridges  like  the  top  for  the 
border  and  bind  off.  Now  pucker  the  two  ends  to  form  a  close 
roll  and  finish  with  a  crocheted  scallop  around  the  opening.  This 
is  intended  to  fit  over  the  teapot  handle. 

Egg  Cozy.  Closely  related  to  the  teapot  holder  comes  the 
egg  cozy.  The  pattern  (Figs.  42,  43,  and  44)  shown  is  from 
one  which  came  from  Surrey,  England.  It  is  designed  to  fit 
over  an  egg  cup  to  keep  the  egg  hot  for  breakfast.     This  one 


Ifi^ 


INVALID    OCCUPATION 


Fig.  42 


Fig.  43 


Fig.  44 


GRANDMOTHER  103 

is  made  of  scarlet  and  white  felt.  Cut  two  of  each  piece  except 
the  comb.  Stitch  the  red  wattle  to  the  white  neck.  Cut  a  disk 
of  white  just  large  enough  to  show  a  ring  around  the  black  nail- 
head  eye,  which  is  sewed  on  before  the  two  halves  are  stitched 
together.  The  comb  is  inserted  between  the  two  sides.  The  bill 
is  of  white,  cut  in  one  piece  with  the  neck,  but  painted  to  look 
natural.  This  chanticleer  would  grace  any  invalid's  tray  and 
should  a  collection  of  various  breeds  greet  our  sight  on  an  Easter 
breakfast  table  interest  would  surely  be  added  to  the  meal. 

Rag  Dolls.  A  well-made  rag  doll  does  not  wait  long  for 
a  purchaser.  Even  though  she  may  be  put  together  with  few 
stitches,  if  cleverly  done,  the  maker  will  not  fail  of  her  reward. 
One  of  the  most  brilliant  examples  of  rag-doll  industry  has 
been  developed  in  a  suburban  town  by  an  old  lady  who  was 
left  a  widow  some  years  ago.  Much  alone  and  depressed,  she 
was,  moreover,  almost  totally  deaf.  One  day  a  maid  from  a 
neighbor's  house  came  in  with  a  rag  doll  in  her  hand  and  said, 
"Why  don't  you  make  rag  dolls?"  The  suggestion  did  not  strike 
any  responsive  chord  and  the  doll  was  not  an  attractive  one  at 
best.  The  maid,  however,  stuck  it  up  on  the  mantel  and  left 
it.  After  a  time  another  woman  came  in,  and  seeing  the  doll 
said :  "  Why,  do  you  make  rag  dolls  ?  I  wish  you  would  make 
me  one  to  give  to  my  little  niece."  After  she  went  out  the  old 
lady  kept  looking  at  the  doll  and  decided  to  try.  She  went  off 
by  herself  and  produced  her  first  rag  doll.  This  one  sold, 
another  was  wanted.  The  minister  called  and,  knowing  he  had 
some  little  girls,  the  old  lady  gave  him  a  package  to  take  home 
to  them.  At  his  next  calling  place  curiosity  prevailed  and  he 
opened  the  package  to  find  two  dolls.  The  lady  on  whom  he  was 
then  calling  at  once  ordered  some.  Then  a  number  were  sent 
to  a  fair.  The  little  daughter  of  the  proprietor  of  a  certain 
old-fashioned  store  was  there,  bought  a  doll  and  took  it  home. 
The  father,  seeing  it,  ordered  some  for  the  store  and  sold  a  hun- 
dred dozen  of  them.  From  this  their  fame  has  spread.  She 
has  made  between  five  and  six  thousand,  sending  them,  as  she 


I04  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

says,  all  over  the  world.  They  sold  at  first  for  five  cents  each, 
but  latterly  she  has  charged  ten.  They  are  made  from  scraps  of 
cloth  contributed  by  friends  and  stuffed  with  the  clippings.  The 
only  expense  is  the  thread  with  which  they  are  sewed.  She  has 
a  box  for  each  sort  of  garment,  as  hats,  shirts,  trousers,  waists, 
etc.  They  are  usually  sold  in  pairs,  a  boy  and  a  girl.  The  two 
dolls  in  the  rear  of  the  picture  were  made  by  this  busy  worker. 
Another  lady  has  made  a  rag  doll  having  a  true  profile.  One 
nurse  says  that  her  little  niece  would  never  play  with  an  ordi- 
nary rag  doll  because  it  had  no  nose.  Here  this  lack  is  sup- 
plied. At  first  the  common  flat-faced  head  is  made  and  stuffed, 
then  a  two-piece  side  section  is  cut,  seamed  up  the  center  and 
stuffed.  This  is  then  sewed  to  the  flat  face.  To  avoid  a  seam 
up  the  center  of  the  forehead  three  pieces  may  be  used,  the  fore- 
head seaming  through  the  eyebrows.     (Fig.  45.)     The  ink  fea- 


Fig.  45 

tures  almost  completely  conceal  the  seams.  The  hair  of  these 
dolls  is  made  of  raveled  out  thread  or  fringe.  It  may  be  curled 
around  a  hot  wire  nail.  These  dolls  are  wholly  of  rag.  The  one 
shown  in  the  picture  carries  a  white  Teddy  bear,  also  made 
of  a  bit  of  woolly  rag. 

It  is  a  good  plan  to  require  a  little  practice  in  class  in  making 
rag  doll  faces  in  ink  or  paint.  One  finds  that  very  few  strokes 
are  required  to  give  a  suggestive  countenance.  Too  much  draw- 
ing will  usually  result  in  too  old-looking  a  face. 


GRANDMOTHER  105 

Needlebooks.  There  is  no  end  to  the  variety  of  needlebooks. 
To  make  the  old-fashioned  "roll  up"  a  piece  of  fine  kid,  bronze 
preferred,  is  required.  Cut  a  strip  five  and  one-half  inches 
long  by  three  and  one-half  wide ;  cut  one  end  of  this  in  a  blunt 
point.  Now  roll  closely  a  strip  of  old  and  soft  flannel  four 
inches  wide  until  you  have  a  roll  one  inch  in  diameter.  Sew 
closely  together.  Cover  the  two  ends  of  flannel  very  neatly  with 
velvet,  bringing  it  down  over  the  ends  about  an  inch.  Cut  a 
strip  of  the  kid  just  wide  enough  to  cover  the  roll,  leaving  the 
velvet  ends  and  just  long  enough  to  meet  exactly  around  it  with- 
out overlapping.  Bind  this  all  around  its  four  sides  with  narrow 
ribbon.  About  a  quarter  of  an  inch  from  one  long  side  of  this 
piece  cut  a  round  hole  large  enough  to  allow  a  thimble  to  slip 
in,  just  midway  between  the  ends.  Next  make  a  tiny  silk  bag 
the  size  of  the  thimble  hole,  tuck  it  in  and  fasten  its  edge  to  the 
edge  of  the  hole  cut  in  the  leather  and  bind  both  together  with 
the  narrow  ribbon.  Very  carefully  clip  away  the  flannel  roll 
just  opposite  this  hole  to  form  a  case  for  the  thimble.  This 
will  cut  nearly  through  the  roll  and  should  be  deep  enough  to 
allow  the  thimble  to  sink  in  entirely.  Into  this  hole  press  the 
little  silk  bag,  bring  the  kid  around  the  roll  and  sew  the  bound 
edges  very  neatly  together.  Now  line  the  long  kid  strip  with 
silk  and  bind  all  around  with  ribbon.  Next  to  the  straight  end 
fasten  two  neat  little  flannel  leaves  for  the  needles.  Just  beyond, 
towards  the  pointed  end,  sew  a  little  full  silk  bag  with  elastic 
across  the  top.  At  the  very  tip  fasten  a  ribbon  in  the  center, 
leaving  two  long  ends  to  go  around  and  tie.  Sew  the  straight, 
bound  end  to  the  seam  of  the  leather  covering  the  roll. 

The  beauty  of  a  needlebook  always  seems  to  consist  in  its 
extreme  neatness  rather  than  its  elaborateness.  The  plain  rec- 
tangular book  made  on  cardboard  covered  with  silk  or  other 
material,  one  side  being  padded  for  pins  and  the  other  for  the 
leaves,  is  always  attractive  if  exquisitely  sewed.  Tiny  pin- 
cushions with  cross-stitched  tops  are  always  welcome.  Those 
made  of   colored   dress   braid   of   different   shades,   first   sewed 


io6  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

together  and  then  featherstitched  down  each  seam  and  stuffed 
with  wool,  are  among  the  best.  The  ends  are  drawn  up  very 
tightly  and  fringed  out.  A  strong  stitch  through  the  center 
from  side  to  side  shapes  it.  Old  ladies  are  very  apt  to  keep 
such  a  little  cushion  on  the  sill  of  the  window  at  which  they  sit. 

Flag  Penwiper.  This  is  made  in  red,  white  and  blue  silk, 
worked  in  cross-stitch  or  single  diagonal  stitch  on  railroad  canvas. 
The  design  is  of  an  American  flag,  the  pattern  having  the 
original  thirteen  stars.  The  edges  are  neatly  turned  under.  It 
is  lined  with  red  silk  and,  after  the  penwiper  leaves  have  been 
attached,  is  fastened  by  red  ribbon  bows  to  the  top  of  a  red  lead 
pencil  which  serves  as  stick. 

The  little  panlike  Cushions  are  made  by  cutting  a  square 
bottom  of   pasteboard   and    four   double   sides   like   Figure   46. 


Fig.  46 

These  are  covered  with  silk  and  sewed  together  to  form  a  square 
basket.  This  is  then  filled  rounding  full  of  soft  wool.  Have 
a  square  of  the  silk  just  the  size  of  the  top  after  the  edges  are 
turned  in  and  basted ;  sew  this  neatly  in  overhand  around  the 
top.  Crochet  over  two  brass  rings  with  silk  and  attach  to  oppo- 
site sides  to  form  handles. 

A  good  many  old  ladies  with  crippled  lower  extremities  are 
great  rug  makers.  Braided  Rugs  may  be  made  which  are  really 
handsome,  one  of  the  newest  suggestions  being  to  braid  the  rug 
of  some  neutral  tinted  goods  and  then  apply  a  large  stencil  de- 
sign, radiating  from  the  center.  The  color  being  finely  chosen, 
these  are  certainly  effective.  Drawn  in  or  hooked  in  rugs  are 
more  difficult,  as  they  require  some  stooping.     Nothing  could 


GRANDMOTHER  107 

exceed  the  nicety  and  true  beauty  of  these  rugs  as  made  by  the 
descendants  of  the  returned  Acadians  on  the  shores  of  St.  Mary's 
Bay,  Nova  Scotia.  The  French  taste  here  has  prevailed  over 
all  the  monstrosities  shown  in  the  county  fair  types  of  impossible 
dogs,  etc.  Designs  of  fine  block  or  brick  work  in  choice  lines 
of  color,  palm  leaf  patterns  almost  like  fine  old  cashmere  done 
in  beautifully  graded  tones  are  a  real  joy  to  the  eye.  Sometimes 
a  delicate  scroll  or  a  maple  leaf  pattern  is  put  in  in  soft  wool 
and  raised  above  the  surface  of  the  background.  The  even 
shearing  is  truly  wonderful.  This  much  was  learned  as  an 
admiring  American  watched  the  little  French  station  mistress 
who,  with  her  eight  small  daughters  about  her,  none  being  old 
enough  to  share  her  labors,  was  augmenting  the  family  exchecker 
by  rug  making.  A  beautiful,  even,  plushlike  surface  may  be 
obtained  from  no  finer  material  than  old  black  cotton  stockings. 
Only  a  few  loops,  these  being  very  short,  were  drawn  in  at  a 
time  and  immediately  sheared.  In  the  imposing  cathedral  on 
this  desolate  shore  these  drawn-in  rugs  are  placed  before  the 
great  crucifix  and  also  before  the  shrine  of  St.  xAnne. 

Crocheted  rag  rugs  may  also  be  made,  using  a  large  wooden 
crochet  hook  and  taking  pains  to  tear  the  strips  narrow.  Knitted 
rugs  are  also  acceptable. 

A  Turkey  Feather  Fan.  A  handsome  specimen  stands 
near  the  center  of  this  group.  This  was  made  in  the  South  by 
an  old  lady  and  her  daughter.  The  long  turkey  feathers  are 
sewed  in  place  and  fastened  to  a  round  stick  handle,  the  downy 
feathers  being  used  on  the  lower  half.  The  stick  is  then  covered 
lengthwise  with  the  needles  of  the  long-leaved  pine  of  the  South, 
which  are  held  in  place  by  weaving  a  thread  in  and  out,  giving 
it  a  close  resemblance  to  a  turkey's  leg.  A  little  netted  cap  fits 
over  the  end.  These  may  be  ordered  from  Mrs.  Retta  Boykin, 
Charleston,  South  Carolina,  price  one  dollar  and  a  half.  They 
are  among  the  most  satisfactory  fans  made. 

ScRAPBOOKS.  Many  old  ladies  enjoy  making  scrapbooks. 
Indeed,  this  is  an  occupation  suited  to  all  classes  of  subjects. 


io8  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

Personal    recollections,    pictures,    poetry,    designs,    recipes — all 
manner  of  information  is  thus  made  available. 

"Sometimes  a  light  surprises"  an  aged  subject,  reflected  back 
from  the  accomplishments  of  youth.  One  such  instance  is  shown 
in  a  revival  of  painting  by  a  lady  of  eighty-two  years.  Always 
living  near  a  picturesque  shore,  she  had  made  many  studies  of 
its  color.  After  the  death  of  husband  and  son  she  felt  that  she 
must  try  to  earn  a  little  money.  She  bravely  got  out  her  old 
paint  box;  and,  although  too  feeble  to  go  sketching,  she  used 
the  snapshots  taken  by  her  daughter  and  painted  her  beloved 
shore  on  bits  of  modest  academy  board,  selling  these  at  two 
dollars  and  a  half  each.  She  said  that  in  one  year  she  had 
earned  forty-eight  dollars  in  this  way,  "and,"  she  added  enthu- 
siastically, "if  I  live  long  enough  I  believe  I  shall  learn  how  to 
paint!" 


CHAPTER   XI 

THE   BUSINESS  MAN 

Gloomy  indeed  is  the  outlook  for  a  man  whose  interests 
have  been  centered  in  the  strong  tide  of  men  and  affairs,  when 
he  finds  himself  shut  in  a  four- walled  space  through  long  con- 
valescence or  more  tedious  chronic  conditions.  He  will  care  little 
if  at  all  for  the  bits  of  manual  work  offered  to  many  patients 
and  proving  for  them  sufficient.  What  can  the  nurse  bring  into 
this  limited  space,  a  veritable  prison  to  a  man  of  active  habits, 
which  will  appeal  to  him  as  being  worth  while? 

To  build  is  a  strongly  developed  human  instinct.  Every  man 
has  some  definite  ideas  on  this  subject,  and  the  building  or  Plan- 
ning OF  A  House  will  make  its  own  appeal.  The  man  has  either 
lived  in  houses  which  he  feels  might  be  improved  or  he  has 
some  ambitions  of  his  own  in  the  way  of  building,  or  will  be 
gratified  to  have  others  consult  him  in  planning  their  house. 
To  be  able  to  plan  a  house,  even  of  the  simplest  construction, 
involves  some  definite  knowledge.  This  the  nurse  must  gain 
through  reliable  sources.  A  single  lecture  is  given  to  this  end, 
and  various  plans  presented  by  the  students  have  proved  that 
many  of  the  essentials  have  been  grasped.  Nurses  are  asked 
to  draw  a  plan  on  the  scale  of  one-quarter  inch  to  the  foot. 
Given  a  twenty-five  by  forty  foot  rectangle  they  allow  six  inches 
for  all  partitions  and  side  walls.  The  size  of  the  chimney  is 
thirty-eight  by  eighteen  inches.  The  opening  for  a  fireplace 
must  be  twenty- four  to  twenty-eight  inches  wide ;  the  mantel 
four  to  five  feet  long.  In  rooms  of  twenty  feet  or  less,  nine  feet 
is  enough  for  height,  reckoning  to  lower  edge  of  floor  beams 
and  adding  ten  inches  for  beam  and  two  for  flooring.  Stairs 
offer  perhaps  the  greatest  problem.  Allow  seven  inches  for  the 
rise  of  steps ;  the  treads  should  be  ten  inches  wide.    The  second 

109 


no  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

story  must  never  be  less  than  eight  feet  high;  preferably  eight 
feet  six  inches.  The  width  of  the  stairway  should  not  be  less 
than  three  and  one-half  feet.  Above  the  third  step  from  the 
bottom  the  upper  floor  must  be  cut  away  for  headroom,  called 
the  well.  It  is  interesting  to  see  how,  given  the  same  size  rec- 
tangle, different  arrangement  of  rooms  may  be  planned.  Some 
will  make  the  mistake  of  having  the  plumbing  all  on  the  outside 
wdiere  the  pipes  are  sure  to  freeze.  Others  will  allow  only 
cramped  space  for  service  rooms,  closets,  etc.  Still  others  will 
be  lavish  of  fireplaces,  ignoring  the  fact  that  the  least  expen- 
sive one  means  fifty  dollars.  Some  will  provide  a  place  for  the 
ice  to  go  in  outside,  thus  saving  trouble  and  untidiness  within. 
The  first  and  second  floors,  a  front  elevation,  drawn  without 
perspective,  and,  last,  a  little  water  color  sketch  of  the  whole 
in  perspective,  with  a  suggestion  of  the  grounds,  will  provide 
interesting  work  even  though  the  patient  be  kept  in  bed. 

Gardening.  Very  naturally  from  the  house  the  thoughts  are 
directed  to  the  garden.  The  joy  of  planning  a  garden  is  pure 
and  refreshing,  and  man  was  a  gardener  before  he  was  a  builder. 
This  may  be  even  more  practical  than  the  house  planning,  for 
even  if  one  cannot  build,  he  may  be  able  to  find  a  bit  of  the 
earth  to  plant.  The  early  experiments  may  be  made  in  the  sick- 
room itself.  Three  sorts  of  house  gardening  may  be  tried.  First 
the  ordinary  window  box,  with  plants  which  will  stand  steam  or 
furnace  heat.  This  was  tried  in  the  case  of  one  woman  who 
was  on  the  verge  of  mental  break-up,  and  who  felt  great  fear 
of  everything  that  suggested  responsibility  in  any  form.  She 
also  held  to  a  belief  that  if  a  plant  failed  to  thrive,  a  like  calamity 
might  overtake  her.  Great  care  was  taken  in  planning  this  box 
and,  at  the  suggestion  of  the  wise  physician,  one  plant  already 
in  bloom  was  placed  in  the  center  and  so  selected  that  it  proved 
a  perpetual  bloomer.  A  great  fondness  for  this  little  garden 
resulted  on  the  part  of  the  patient,  together  with  much  pride 
in  its  care,  while  recovery  came  slowly  and  surely  as  the  plants 
grew.     Some  of  the  same  group  of  plants  are  still  flourishing 


THE   BUSINESS   MAN 


ITT 


in  the  room  of  the  once  more  independent  gardener.  Another 
patient  was  surprised  into  great  pleasure  one  Christmas  morn- 
ing by  a  charming  window  box  which  had  been  thoughtfully 
prepared  by  her  nurse.  Genuine  affection  for  this  little  garden 
was  manifested,  and  she  actually  undertook  cultivation  by  stir- 
ring the  soil  with  her  buttonhook  every  few  days.  When  the 
box  was  borrowed  for  an  exhibition  she  found  it  necessary  to 
attend  in  order  to  visit  her  garden.  All  this  would  prove  of 
equal  interest  to  a  man. 

A  seed  box  is  a  second  form  of  gardening  adapted  to  the 
house.  There  is  an  invitation  in  every  package  of  seeds  to  share 
a  great  secret — a  mystery — who  can  understand  it?  Find  a  long, 
rather  shallow  box  and  fill  it  with  earth  which  has  been  fitnely 
pulverized ;  get  a  toy  watering  pot  and  plant  your  seeds.  It  is 
a  goodly  interest  and  somehow  lays  hold  of  the  great  truths 
in  life,  the  elemental  wisdom.  When  the  seeds  have  grown  to 
stout  little  plants,  the  potting  off  into  tiny  thumbpots  may  be 
done  as  bedside  occupation. 

A  third  form  of  horticulture  is  the  propagating  frame.  Take 
a  box  rather  deeper,  say  twelve  to  fourteen  inches ;  saw  the  ends 
slanting  (Fig.  47)  to  form  a  one-pitch  greenhouse  roof,  sawing 


Fig.  47 


down  the  front  to  the  same  level.  Across  the  front  nail  a  narrow 
strip  of  board  and  over  the  top  lay  window  glass  to  form  the 
sloping  roof.    The  board  across  the  front  projects  above  the  top 


112  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

a  trifle,  and  so  prevents  the  glass  from  slipping  off.  Fill  the 
bottom  of  the  box  with  sand  and  in  this  set  cuttings  of  various 
plants.  Many  of  these  may  be  picked  out  of  the  bunches  of 
flowers  sent  to  the  patient,  a  bit  of  rose  geranium  or  lemon  ver- 
bena or  carnation  pipings.  Many  and  varied  are  the  products 
of  this  box.  When  the  cuttings  have  struck  root  they  should  be 
taken  up  and  reset  in  earth,  as  the  sand  affords  only  temporary 
nourishment.  This  box  should  have  some  sunlight,  as  the  cut- 
tings will  damp  off  if  kept  covered  in  the  shade.  Especially  is 
this  true  of  common  geraniums,  which  contain  much  moisture. 

So,  if  fears  prevail  and  days  go  heavily,  start  a  garden. 
Bulbs  may  be  tried  with  interest  but  do  not  result  in  such  con- 
tinued satisfaction  as  do  the  earlier  forms  of  gardening  suggested. 
But  who  can  feel  that  life  is  stripped  of  its  good  or  that  renewal 
is  not  possible  as  he  looks  at  the  green  things  pushing  up  towards 
the  sun ! 

Home  Bookbinding.  Among  all  the  industries  suggested 
for  home  execution  none  appeals  more  strongly  to  both  the 
practical  and  artistic  temperament  than  that  of  home  bookbind- 
ing. In  this  one  actually  learns  a  new  trade,  and  this  will  usually 
appeal  to  a  man.  It  is  entirely  possible  to  bind  books  at  home 
far  more  strongly  and  often  more  beautifully  than  many  done 
in  commercial  binding.  Several  different  varieties  are  within  the 
scope  of  this  domestic  art.     Start  first  with  the 

Japanese  Binding.  This  form  of  binding  is  peculiarly 
adapted  to  kodak  books,  post  card  albums,  etc.,  but  may  be 
employed  for  many  other  purposes.  To  make  a  photograph  book 
select  a  paper  which  is  light  rather  than  heavy.  Bond  paper  is 
very  good.  Other  papers  are  the  grays  and  browns  having  a  sort 
of  linen  finish  and  popular  for  mounting  pictures.  These  are 
obtained  from  the  wholesale  houses  at  a  small  price,  three  to  five 
cents  per  large  sheet,  provided  a  ream,  i.  e.,  about  five  hundred 
sheets,  can  be  used.  If  buying  for  individual  orders  certain 
stationers,  as  Samuel  Ward,  Franklin  Street,  Boston,  will  furnish 
this  large  size  paper  by  the  sheet.  The  size  of  these  sheets  is 
twent^'-five  by  twenty  inches,  or  more. 


THE    BUSINESS    MAN  113 

These  are  first  carefully  folded  and  creased  down  with  a  paper 
knife  to  the  required  width  and  two-page  length,  so  that  you 
have  a  piece  twice  the  size  of  the  book  folded  once  on  the  shorter 
diameter.  Three  large  sheets  will  usually  fold  to  make  some 
twenty  pages.  Carefully  pack  these  up  with  all  the  folded  edges 
together  and  all  the  cut  ends  together.  Be  very  careful  about 
this.  Now  cut  the  light  pasteboard  for  the  covers  the  same  length 
and  one-quarter  inch  wider  than  the  pages.  From  one  end  of 
these  two  pasteboards  carefully  measure  and  cut  off  a  strip  one- 
half  inch  wide.  These  four  pieces  of  board,  two  large  and  two 
narrow,  must  now  be  covered  with  any  selected  material ;  it  may 
be  thin  leather,  linen,  cretonne,  Japanese  crepe  or  anything  which 
pleases.  Brush  good  ilour  paste  over  the  entire  surface  of  the 
board  and  apply  the  cover,  which  should  be  cut  a  quarter  inch 
larger  than  the  pasteboard.  Paste  over  the  edge  carefully,  mak- 
ing very  neat  corners.  This  last  will  require  practice.  Clip  the 
material  off  diagonally  at  the  corners  before  turning  it  in,  but 
avoid  clipping  too  closely.  The  corners  should  be  very  exact. 
The  two  narrow  strips  of  board  are  covered  likewise. 

When  this  is  done  cut  two  strips  of  leather  or  kid,  it  may  be 
from  an  old  long-wrist  glove,  an  inch  and  a  quarter  wide ;  paste 
the  end  of  one  large  portion  of  the  cover  and  one  narrow  strip 
and  fasten  to  the  leather  so  that  the  latter  forms  a  flexible  hinge 
for  each  cover,  one-quarter  of  an  inch  space  showing  between 
the  strip  and  the  cover  board.  Allow  these  to  dry  thoroughly 
under  a  weight.  When  dry,  line  the  large  piece  of  each  cover 
with  paper  or  silk,  pasting  neatly  over  the  first  edge  of  the  strip 
of  leather.  When  this  too  is  perfectly  dry,  place  the  double 
folded  sheets  between  the  two  covers,  having  all  the  cut  ends 
just  even  with  the  edge  of  the  narrow  strip  of  the  cover.  Tie 
the  whole  very  tightly  around  with  a  string  to  hold  exactly  in 
place.  With  a  five-cent  awl  and  a  hammer  drive  four  holes  right 
through  leather  hinge,  paper  pages  and  second  leather  hinge,  the 
book  having  been  first  placed  on  a  board  which  cannot  be  hurt 
by  the  awl  piercing  it.    These  holes  should  be  one  inch  from  top 


114  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

and  bottom  and  the  inner  two  at  equal  distance  from  these  and 
from  each  other.  When  well  bored  take  a  tape  needle  threaded 
with  number  i  ribbon  and,  starting  at  the  first  hole,  sew  through 
and  bring  up,  leaving  two  inches  of  ribbon  free  end.  Turn  the 
long  ribbon  over  the  top  and  back  through  the  same  hole,  being 
always  careful  to  keep  it  flat  and  smooth.  Then  bind  it  tightly 
around  the  back  and  up  again  through  the  same  hole,  leaving  the 
short  end  free.  Now  down  to,  and  through,  the  next  hole,  around 
the  back,  up  and  down  through  the  same  hole,  down  to  the  third 
hole  on  the  back,  up,  around  the  back,  up  through  the  same  hole, 
down  and  through  the  fourth  hole,  up  and  around  the  back  and 
down  through  the  same  hole,  around  the  end,  up  and  down 
through  the  same  hole,  up  and  through  the  third  hole,  up  and 
through  the  second  hole,  up,  and  tie  in  a  very  tight  knot,  close 
to  the  first  hole,  with  the  short  end  of  the  ribbon.  Cut  oflf  the 
ends,  leaving  perhaps  a  scant  half  inch,  and  with  the  awl  punch 
these  down  into  the  hole  so  that  no  knot  can  be  seen.  This  com- 
pletes the  binding  and  makes  a  book  which  opens  nicely  and 
has  the  advantage  of  allowing  more  leaves  to  be  added  simply 
by  unlacing  and  relacing.  Instead  of  ribbon,  double  Turk's-head 
knots  of  leather  thong  may  be  used  if  the  covers  be  also  of  leather. 
One  such  double  knot  is  in  each  of  the  four  holes.  To  tie  these 
proceed  as  follows:  Take  two  thongs  of  strong  leather  five  or 
six  inches  long,  lay  them  crosswise  at  right  angles  and  hold  by 
the  cross  in  the  left  thumb  and  forefinger.  Now  take  end  A 
and  fold  across  end  B,  fold  end  B  across  A  and  C,  end  C  across 
B  and  D,  end  D  across  C  and  through  the  loop  of  A.  Draw  all 
four  ends  up  to  form  Figure  48.  Bring  the  four  ends  together 
and  pull  them  through  the  hole  in  the  book,  leaving  the  knot  on 
one  side.  Now  tie  a  second  Turk's-head,  with  the  ends  close 
to  the  top  cover  and,  after  drawing  up,  cut  off  the  ends  as  indi- 
cated by  the  diagonal  dotted  lines.  (Fig.  49.)  A  Baby  Kodak 
book  made  in  this  way  is  of  light  leather  with  a  stork's  head 
tooled  in  each  corner.  If  the  book  be  for  a  scrapbook  or  card 
album,  it  is  well  to  cut  narrow  strips  of  paper  and  place  between 


THE   BUSINESS    MAN 


•   I 


115 


fffi 


m 


rr 


p 


3: 


A 

Fig.  48 


Fig.  49 

the  leaves  to  act  as  guards,  binding  through  all.  This  sort  of 
binding  admits  of  an  almost  endless  variety  of  design  and 
material. 


ii6  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

French  and  Hollow-Back  Binding.  Paper-covered  books, 
magazines,  music,  etc.,  may  be  stitched  for  binding  thus :  Care- 
fully separate  the  sections  or  signatures,  to  use  a  bookbinder's 
term,  and  pile  in  exact  order  of  paging.  Any  torn  places  or  holes 
should  be  repaired  by  pasting  over  them  bits  of  thin  paper,  as 
onion  skin  paper.  The  old  paste  or  glue  should  be  cleaned  off. 
Be  sure  that  the  pile  is  even  on  the  edges.  Cut  from  two  to 
four  inch-wide  tapes,  according  to  the  length  of  the  back  of  the 
book;  an  ordinary  book  needs  two,  while  music  would  require 
three  or  four.  These  tapes  will  be  five  or  six  inches  long.  Hold- 
ing the  pile  very  firmly,  lay  a  tape  across  tightly  and  with  a  soft 
pencil  mark  a  strong  line  on  either  side  of  the  tape  on  the  back 
of  the  sections,  being  sure  that  every  one  is  marked.  (See  cut 
on  page  25.)  The  tape  should  lie  about  two  to  three  inches  from 
the  top  and  the  same  from  the  bottom.  If  a  third  tape  is  re- 
quired, place  it  directly  in  the  middle.  Without  using  a  tape, 
mark  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  the  top  and  bottom  for 
another  line  of  sewing.  This  done,  open  each  section  exactly 
in  the  middle  and  pierce  with  a  large  needle  straight  through  at 
each  point  marked.  Replace  in  pile  in  exact  order.  Now  cut 
and  fold  three  plain  sheets  to  form  one  more  section  on  each  side 
of  the  book,  six  sheets  in  all,  folded  once  through  the  center  and 
placed  together  one  inside  the  other.  Mark  these  to  correspond 
with  the  others  and  pierce. 

In  a  large  needle  thread  strong  linen  or  silk  in  a  very  long 
double  thread  without  a  knot.  Taking  up  the  first  signature  sew 
from  without  in  through  the  upper  hole,  then  out  next  hole ; 
lay  the  first  tape  over  between  the  marks  and  sew  down  over 
but  never  through  this  tape.  Up  and  over  next  tape  to  bottom, 
up  through  the  last  hole.  Fold  up  this  signature  and  take  next ; 
open,  place  beside  first,  sew  down  through  first  hole,  holding  it 
very  closely  to  the  first  signature,  and  up  over  tapes  to  top,  where 
it  is  firmly  tied  to  the  first  ends  of  thread  which  have  been  left 
two  or  three  inches  long.  Repeat  this  process  on  third  signature 
to  bottom,  where,  to  connect  them  closely,  the  "kettle  stitch"  is 


THE    BUSINESS    MAN  117 

made,  which  consists  of  a  half -buttonhole  stitch  taken  over  the 
preceding  stitch  between  the  signatures.  This  forms  a  little 
chainlike  band  at  top  and  bottom.  When  all  the  sections  have 
been  sewed,  fasten  firmly,  leaving  an  inch  or  so  of  thread  which 
is  tucked  in  between  the  signatures.  This  is  also  done  when 
it  is  necessary  to  take  a  new  thread  while  sewing. 

Now  glue  the  tapes  firmly  stretched  to  the  outside  leaf  on 
both  sides.  Fold  back  and  cut  this  leaf  off  half  width.  It  is 
well  now  to  wrap  the  book,  leaving  these  half  leaves  out,  in  a 
temporary  paper  wrapper  or  envelope,  to  prevent  soiling  as  the 
work  goes  on.  Grasp  the  book  very  firmly  in  the  left  hand  with 
the  back  up,  and  brush  over  the  entire  back  with  flexible  glue, 
which  should  be  vigorously  rubbed  in  with  the  right  forefinger, 
the  firm  grasp  of  the  left  hand  preventing  it  from  running  down 
between  the  signatures.  Over  this  is  laid  a  strip  of  muslin  or 
cheese  cloth  wide  enough  to  cover  the  back  and  extend  two  inches 
on  the  side  leaves.  This  is  firmly  glued  down,  the  end  leaves 
turned  up  and  the  book  allowed  to  dry  thoroughly.  When  dry, 
carefully  measure  and  cut  a  piece  of  wrapping  paper  the  exact 
size  of  the  back  and  glue  it  on. 

The  book  is  now  ready  for  its  covers.  From  light-weight 
pasteboard  or  millboard  cut  four  pieces  one-quarter  inch  longer 
than  the  book  and  just  the  same  width.  These  are  best  cut  with 
a  knife  on  a  sheet  of  tin.  Now  paste  the  inside  of  the  half 
sheets  and  fasten  firmly  to  the  two  boards,  leaving  a  quarter  inch 
space  between  the  back  and  the  edge  of  the  board  to  allow  for 
good  opening.  Brush  over  the  whole  outer  surface,  leaf,  board 
and  all,  and  paste  the  other  two  boards  so  that  the  end  sheet 
comes  between  the  two  thin  boards.  Put  under  an  even  weight 
until  quite  dry.  If  an  ordinary  letter  press  is  available,  use  it 
by  all  means,  but  if  not,  use  very  heavy  books  or  anything  which 
makes  even  pressure.  In  binding  very  large  books  it  will  be 
hard  to  find  a  way  to  press  them.  On  one  occasion  a  parlor 
table  was  turned  upside  down  on  the  floor  and  worked  admirably. 

There  is  a  variety  of  backs.     The  French  back  is  made  by 


ii8  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

gluing  the  cover  cloth  directly  to  the  back  of  the  book.  The 
hollow  back  is  a  trifle  more  complicated.  For  this  cut  the  cloth 
half  an  inch  larger  than  will  easily  wrap  the  book.  Fold  and 
crease  exactly  down  the  middle  of  the  back ;  cut  a  strip  of  wrap- 
ping paper  exactly  the  length  and  width  of  the  back  of  the  book 
and  paste  down  on  the  cloth  over  the  fold  in  the  back,  leaving 
even  space  at  top  and  bottom  for  turning  down.  Next  fold  four 
or  five  thicknesses  of  newspaper  to  the  same  measure  as  the  strip 
of  paper  on  the  cloth  and  lay  without  pasting  on  top  of  this 
strip.  This  is  to  protect  from  paste  and  to  increase  space,  and 
is  temporary.  Brush  over  the  cloth  thoroughly  and  evenly  with 
paste,  hold  the  book  with  the  back  pressed  firmly  down  against 
the  newspaper  pad  and  bring  the  pasted  cloth  smoothly  up  to  the 
cover,  first  on  one  side,  then  the  other.  Rub  out  every  wrinkle 
and  blister  with  a  smooth-edged  paper  knife,  rubbing  from  back 
to  front.  Cut  the  corners  to  turn  very  neatly;  if  cut  too  close 
to  the  board  they  will  not  cover,  if  too  far  from  it  they  will  look 
bungling ;  paste  down  front  and  back  edges  first. 

Now  set  the  book  up  on  end.  pull  out  the  newspaper  pad 
and  clip  a  quarter  of  an  inch  or  so  down  into  the  little  end  sheet 
which  shows  between  the  boards  and  the  back  on  each  side. 
Paste  the  cloth  and  tuck  the  edge  into  these  clipped  places,  which 
allow  of  its  being  pasted  firmly  to  the  back  and  to  the  ends  of 
the  covers.  Repeat  on  the  other  end.  Lay  the  book  down,  and 
with  the  paper  knife  mark  strongly  the  ridge  between  the  edge 
of  the  pasteboard  and  the  back  to  form  a  groove  on  either  side. 
Carefully  tie  a  large  twine  around  this  groove  and  over  top  and 
bottom,  having  the  knot  always  at  the  end  and  the  top  and  bottom 
edges  of  the  book  which  come  under  the  cord  turned  inward.  In 
this  way  it  is  put  into  the  press,  the  cloth  covers  being  well  pro- 
tected by  a  perfectly  smooth  piece  of  cotton  cloth,  since  any 
wrinkle  or  raveling  will  make  its  permanent  mark  on  the  book. 
Two  pieces  of  smooth  pasteboard  may  be  placed  above  and  below. 
If  paper  is  used  to  protect  a  newly  pasted  surface  It  is  apt  to 
stick  in  drying,  but  cloth  peels  off  easily  even  though  it  should 


THE    BUSINESS    MAN  119 

stick  a  trifle.  Let  the  book  stay  in  the  press  over  night  or  until 
thoroughly  dry. 

In  the  morning  take  out,  remove  cloth,  take  off  twine  and 
open  covers  dear  back.  In  this  position  spread  the  first  loose 
sheet  with  paste  and  paste  down  to  line  the  cover.  This  leaves 
two  new  fly  leaves.  Rub  down  with  a  paper  knife  and  do  not 
allow  the  book  to  be  closed  at  all  until  these  are  dry.  This  com- 
pletes the  book.  The  title,  however,  is  a  matter  of  some  difficulty. 
For  a  paper  or  cheaply  covered  book  a  label  might  be  neatly 
printed  and  used,  but  for  a  better  book  other  means  have  been 
devised.  If  bound  in  a  leather  which  admits  of  tooling,  the  title 
is  easily  done  in  this  way.  After  the  impression  has  been  made 
with  a  cold  tool,  the  letters  may  be  brushed  over  with  thin  muci- 
lage or  gum  arable  solution ;  gold  powder  is  then  dusted  on  which 
adheres  only  to  the  gummed  letter  and  is,  when  dry,  rubbed 
down  to  a  burnished  surface  with  an  agate. 

Modifications  of  these  bindings  are  always  possible.  A  flexible 
binding  suggesting  the  "Roycroft"  is  easily  done,  the  book  being 
sewed  the  same,  but  a  soft  ooze  leather  cover  with  silk  lining 
being  here  employed.  Half  leather  bindings,  back  and  corners 
of  leather  and  the  rest  of  fine  paper  or  cloth,  are  made  practically 
in  the  same  way  as  the  hollow  back.  Portfolios,  letter  cases, 
magazine  covers  and  many  other  booklike  conveniences  are 
modeled  on  the  same  principles. 

There  is  an  interesting  experiment  to  be  worked  out  for  book 
or  portfolio  covers  in  coarse  water  color  paper.  This  is  first 
washed  over  with  a  light,  leather  colored  water  color  wash.  To 
apply  this  mix  a  fairly  generous  amount  of  the  color  in  plenty 
of  water.  Use  a  large  brush  and  sweep  quickly  across  the  top 
of  the  paper ;  dip  the  brush  again  and  make  a  second  sweep, 
picking  up  the  drops  which  are  running  down  from  the  first 
application.  In  the  same  way  go  over  the  entire  surface,  never 
brushing  back  and  forth  or  in  spots.  When  this  is  thoroughly 
dry,  draw  whatever  design  or  title  is  desired  and  color  as  taste 
suggests.    Now,  with  a  piece  of  yellow  beeswax,  slightly  warm, 


120  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

go  over  the  whole  surface.  Last,  rub  this  down  well  with  the 
bare  thumb.  This  makes  a  surface  so  closely  resembling  pig- 
skin as  to  deceive  the  very  elect. 

Block  Printing.  The  study  of  textiles  is  worthy  of  a  larger 
place  in  private  consideration  than  is  commonly  awarded.  Weav- 
ing, designing,  coloring,  printing,  all  these  interests  are  involved 
in  a  carpet  or  hanging.  The  hand-printed  Java  cottons  are  prized 
highly.  There  is  no  reason  why  equal  merit  may  not  be  bestowed 
on  fabrics  printed  in  one's  own  home.  Almost  any  one  can  learn 
to  make  a  good  block.  It  is  well  to  discriminate  among  woods 
a  little.  To  get  the  best  results  a  wood  of  medium  hardness 
only  and  of  comparatively  fine  grain  will  be  chosen.  Perhaps 
the  best  is  the  sweet  gum  of  the  Southern  states.  This  may  be 
obtained  at  the  cabinet  makers'  or  wherever  Sloyd  stock  is  kept. 
It  is,  however,  by  no  means  necessary,  and  good  blocks  are  made 
from  white  wood,  sycamore  and  many  other  woods.  In  ele- 
mentary grades  the  children  cut  blocks  on  bottle  corks,  which, 
of  course,  are  easily  cut  but  usually  print  unevenly,  owing  to  the 
irregular  taking  up  of  paint.  A  very  good  block  may  be  cut 
from  a  thick,  even  slice  of  raw  sweet  potato.  This  dries  in  time, 
but  if  kept  moist  will  work  very  well.  Good  blocks  may  be  cut 
on  the  ends  of  common  spools,  leaving  the  other  end  for  a  handle. 
The  design  here  must  be  chosen  so  that  the  hole  in  the  center 
comes  in  the  space  around  the  design. 

To  make  a  block  one  first  decides  upon  the  design,  which  is 
traced  upon  thin  paper  and  closely  pasted  to  the  surface  of  the 
block.  It  is  well  to  have  the  block  only  a  trifle  larger  than 
the  design  and  to  have  the  edges  of  uniform  width,  as  it  is  an 
aid  in  printing.  With  a  pocketknife  or,  if  obtainable,  a  Sloyd 
knife,  cut  down  all  around  the  outline,  allowing  the  paper  to 
remain  on.  Next  to  this  the  space  between  the  fines  is  scooped 
out,  not  requiring  special  smoothing,  but  taken  out  so  as  to  leave 
the  design  raised  and  clear  of  surrounding  surface,  the  design 
being  left  perfectly  level.  The  wood  surrounding  the  design  on 
the  edges  is  also  scooped  out  so  that  when  the  block  i?  pressed 


THE    BUSINESS    MAN  121 

face  down  on  any  surface  the  design  alone  will  touch.  Avoid 
choosing  designs  with  very  fine  lines,  especially  those  which  run 
across  the  grain. 

The  paper  may  now  be  soaked  off.  The  object  in  leaving  it 
on  during  the  cutting  is  twofold ;  first,  to  apply  the  pattern  and 
second,  because  there  is  much  less  danger  of  splitting  if  cut 
through  paper.  Wood  engravers  cut  on  the  end  of  the  grain, 
but  either  this  or  the  lengthwise  surface  may  be  used.  There  is 
danger  in  sandpapering  a  block  that  the  level  surface  may  be 
impaired ;  if  cut  well  there  will  be  little  need  of  this. 

You  have  now  a  tool,  a  block  which  may  be  used  indefinitely 
in  many  combinations.  This  is  the  superiority  which  it  bears  to 
a  stencil  pattern.  To  print,  one  first  needs  a  perfectly  level  sur- 
face, as  a  broad  board.  On  this  spread  a  half  dozen  thicknesses 
of  newspaper  and  cover  with  blotting  paper,  tacking  securely. 
On  this  stretch  the  fabric  to  be  printed,  linen,  cotton,  silk,  etc. 
The  color  may  be  oil,  tube  paint,  dry  color,  Higgins'  inks  or  even 
water  color.  "Easy  Dye"  may  also  be  used.  Oil  paint  from  the 
tube  is  mixed  with  the  same  medium  as  that  used  in  stenciling, 
namely,  turpentine  with  acetic  acid  and  oil  of  wintergreen,  one 
ounce  each  of  the  last  two,  the  remainder  of  one  pint  being  tur- 
pentine. Kerosene  even  may  be  used  in  place  of  turpentine  with 
very  good  results.  Higgins'  inks  have  been  recommended  for 
very  delicate  fabrics,  as  chiffons,  etc.  Water  color  is  least  de- 
sirable, requiring  the  mixing  with  mucilage  and  spreading  on  a 
pad.  It  is  always  wise  to  mix  enough  color  for  the  whole  piece 
of  work  at  once,  it  being  difficult  to  match  the  shades  at  different 
mixings. 

The  colors  being  ready,  the  face  of  the  design  is  now  covered, 
care  being  taken  that  the  paint  is  not  filled  in  between  the  lines 
of  the  design.  For  this  purpose  make  a  pad  of  cotton  wool  in  a 
hard,  smooth  ball  covering  it  with  a  piece  of  an  old  kid  glove 
and  tying  this  around  it  very  tightly  so  that  it  will  make  a 
perfectly  smooth  padded  surface.  Apply  the  paint  to  this  pad 
and  thence  to  the  block ;  mix  the  color  quite  thick,  so  that  it 


122  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

may  not  run  down  into  the  block.  Now  apply  the  block  to  the 
fabric  straight  downward  without  possible  slide,  and  press  firmly. 
A  block  cannot  be  replaced,  as  a  stencil  may  be,  so  that  the  first 
imprint  must  be  perfect.  Much  will  depend  upon  the  consistency 
of  the  paint.  This,  however,  must  be  learned  by  experience. 
Always  test  on  a  sample  bit  of  goods.  It  is  possible  to  deepen 
or  strengthen  the  print  by  touching  up  with  the  brush,  but  this 
is  not  strongly  recommended.  Practice  will  bring  its  rewards, 
and  beautiful  effects  may  be  obtained.  Many  good  stencil  de- 
signs are  equally  applicable  for  block  printing.  Fine  motifs 
may  be  obtained  from  Mexican  rugs,  couch  covers,  etc. 

Pyrography.  In  a  somewhat  limited  sense  the  use  of  pyrog- 
raphy  will  be  worth  encouraging.  This  is  said  cautiously,  as 
the  market  is  so  flooded  with  bad  products ;  but  employed  as  a 
delicate  etching  might  be  used,  there  is  much  to  attract. 

A  Birthday  Cake  Board.  This  consists  of  a  large,  round 
plaque  having  a  double  row  of  holes  bored  half  through,  each 
hole  being  large  enough  to  admit  a  cake  candle.  There  is  an 
attractive  border  illustrating  a  Mother  Goose  story.  This  is  very 
lightly  outlined  by  burning  and  colored  with  water  color.  The 
central  space  is  left  for  the  cake,  which,  by  this  arrangement, 
need  not  have  its  surface  marred  by  sticking  in  candles.  The 
double  row  of  holes  provides  for  a  long  series  of  birthdays. 
The  inner  row  is  close  to  the  cake,  the  outer  near  to  the  extreme 
edge,  while  the  border  fills  the  space  between.  The  board  should 
be  lightly  shellacked  to  prevent  grease  spots.  This  board  sells 
for  five  dollars,  but  may  be  made  for  less  than  one.  When  the 
cake  is  in  place  and  the  candles  lighted  the  effect  may  be  enhanced 
by  adding  a  few  little  white  mice,  made  by  pinching  a  rather 
cheap  marshmallow  into  this  shape.  Add  white  paper  ears, 
braided  white  silk  tails,  ink  eyes  and  broomstraw  whiskers.  These 
are  left  to  dodge  in  between  the  candles  and  forage  for  the 
crumbs. 

One  of  the  most  impressive  pieces  of  invalid  work  has  come 
in  the  form  of  some  Miniature  Fowls.    Two  brown  Leghorns, 


MINIATURE    FOWLS 


Page  J  22 


THE   BUSINESS   MAN  123 

cock  and  hen,  and  "an  old  Dominique  hen  who  has  lost  all  her 
chickens,  poor  thing!"  represent  this  triumph  over  adversity  by 
a  man  laid  low  by  serious  accident.  This  man  was  a  college 
student  who,  while  tobogganing,  received  great  injury  to  one  leg. 
For  seven  or  eight  years  he  lay  in  bed  in  the  hope  of  saving  that 
leg.  During  this  time  he  refused  to  be  unemployed  and  con- 
ceived this  original  way  of  earning  his  money.  He  had  living 
fowls  brought  to  his  room,  studied  their  every  point  and  became 
able  to  reproduce  to  wonderful  perfection  the  very  breeds  before 
him.  The  body  of  the  fowl  he  whittled  from  wood;  next  the 
legs  were  made  from  very  fine  wire  and  thread,  boiled  in  yellow 
glue  and  firmly  inserted  into  the  wooden  body.  The  feathering 
came  next,  and  in  this  he  reached  consummate  skill.  No  tiniest 
shade  of  color  or  form  was  lost;  the  feathers  were  applied  with 
flour  paste  and  put  on  in  overlapping  rows  from  tail  to  head. 
The  tiny  bills  and  eyes  are  painted,  the  combs  cut  from  red 
flannel  and  adjusted  with  precisely  the  right  wag.  No  feature 
is  lacking.  These  brought  a  good  price;  and,  although  the  poor 
leg  had  to  go  in  the  end,  with  new  apparatus  its  indomitable 
owner  pushes  with  success  a  good  business  and  is  relieved  of  the 
necessity  of  making  miniature  fowls;  but  all  who  study  these 
gems,  not  more  than  an  inch  or  even  less  in  length,  will  join 
with  the  professor  who,  when  he  saw  them,  said,  "Well,  that 
man  would  win  under  all  circumstances." 

It  is  worth  while  trying  to  keep  man's  work  manly.  Invalid- 
ism does  not  make  it  necessary  for  its  subject  to  become  effemi- 
nate in  effort.  Beauty  must  truly  hold  sway  here  as  elsewhere, 
but  let  there  be  strength  and  stability  combined,  and  strive  for 
that  appreciated  by  the  healthy  subject  as  well  as  by  the  invalid. 


CHAPTER    XII 

WITH    WANING    POWERS 

There  is  little  room  for  doubt  that  the  old  man  presents  the 
most  difficult  subject  in  our  study.  Just  why  an  old  man  should 
be  more  helpless  in  finding  work  adapted  to  his  declining  strength 
than  is  a  woman  of  the  same  age  is  not  made  plain  to  us,  except 
for  the  fact  that  the  average  man's  work  takes  him  away  from 
home,  while  the  average  woman's  work,  being  in  the  home,  is 
aided  by  its  suggestions.  The  man  comes  home  to  rest.  Having 
done  this  all  his  active  life,  the  suggestions  are  still  in  that  direc- 
tion, and  one's  first  duty  may  be  to  teach  the  old  gentleman  that 
home  is  also  a  place  for  work. 

The  mistake  is  sometimes  made  by  affectionate  children  of 
saying  to  an  aged  parent:  "Why,  you  do  not  need  any  money, 
you  are  provided  for  in  every  way.  Don't  you  have  everything 
you  want?"  When  a  person  feels  that  he  no  longer  needs  any 
money  his  self-respect  is  surely  impaired.  It  may  be  little,  but 
that  little  he  surely  needs.  One  wise  daughter  realized  this  and 
provided  her  bedridden  and  thoroughly  cared  for  mother  with 
one  hundred  dollars  in  cash.  This  the  old  lady  kept  safely 
between  the  mattresses  and  counted  unfailingly  every  night  and 
morning,  giving  thanks  that  she  was  not  without  personal  re- 
sources. To  the  mind  of  a  man  much  more  than  to  that  of  a 
woman  this  fact  of  being  set  off  from  the  financial  world  is 
repugnant.  It  is  indeed  pathetic  to  note  how  an  old  man  prizes 
a  dollar  or  even  less  if  earned  since  his  forced  retirement.  This 
retirement  may,  of  course,  be  brought  about  by  a  great  variety 
of  causes.  Many  times  a  valvular  heart  trouble,  varying  in 
severity  but  never  disappearing,  forbids  any  but  the  gentler 
forms  of  exercise.  Arteriosclerosis,  renal  affections,  with  lame 
backs  and  periods  of  acute  pain,  more  or  less  extensive  paralyses 

124 


WITH    WANING    POWERS  125 

and  often  just  a  sense  of  lessening  strength.  Perhaps  the  last 
is  worst  of  all,  the  consciousness  of  growing  old.  To  really  be 
old  is  nothing ;  to  feci  old  makes  the  hand  tremble,  the  eye  dull, 
the  mouth  droop.  Now  find  something  the  old  man  can  still  do 
and  see  how  much  pride  may  be  stimulated  for  a  small  effort. 

What  would  he  like  to  do  best  of  all?  Go  back  to  business, 
of  course.  Very  well,  what  was  his  business?  If  he  has  been 
a  carpenter  he  may  be  able  to  make  some  little  thing  which 
involves  the  employment  of  a  principle  learned  and  used  in  early 
activities.  The  thing  he  makes  may  be  trivial,  a  little  wooden 
box,  a  towel  rack,  a  knife  tray.  He  will  take  such  pride  in  a 
neat  joint ;  the  very  feeling  of  the  tools  in  his  hands  fosters 
renewal  of  self-respect.  Search  diligently  to  find  in  all  trades 
that  which  may  be  carried  over  into  old  age. 

Old  men  are  often  fond  of  Whittling.  A  group  of  veterans 
used  to  meet  daily  around  a  little  stove  in  a  store.  Their  un- 
varying occupation  was  whittling.  When  the  next  man  came 
in  the  one  before  him  cut  his  stick  in  two  and  passed  half  of  it 
on  to  the  latest  comer.  Little  or  nothing  was  said;  their  ambi- 
tion seemed  to  be  fulfilled  in  meeting  together  regularly  and 
whittling,  although  they  did  not  make  a  single  thing.  Why  not 
turn  this  whittling  tendency  to  account  ?  Several  men  have  done 
this  by  sawing  a  stick  from  an  elm  tree  into  blocks,  leaving 
the  bark  on.  The  center  is  scooped  out  and  smoothed  up  and 
rubbed  down  with  sandpaper  and  the  whole  shellacked.  These 
make  very  convenient  napkin  rings  for  summer  cottages  and 
camps.  A  short-breathed  old  man  will  not  be  able  to  saw, 
although  he  may  whittle. 

The  frames  made  by  the  Indians  of  heavy  birch  bark,  punched 
with  holes  around  the  edge  through  which  raffia  or  grass  is  laced 
over  a  bundle  of  sweet  grass  which  forms  the  edge,  make  good 
work  for  one  with  limited  strength.  There  is,  moreover,  a  very 
good  sale  for  these. 

One  delicate  invalid  took  great  comfort  in  Braiding  Straw 
for  hats.     The  straw  was  obtained   from  the   hat   factories  in 


126  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

Milford,  Massachusetts.  With  a  glass  of  water  beside  him 
in  which  to  moisten  his  fingers,  he  braided  large  quantities  of 
this  useful  product.  This  might  easily  be  managed  by  a  bed 
patient. 

A  good  deal  may  be  made  of  man's  well-nigh  universal  interest 
in  the  newspapers.  A  poor  wreck,  a  paralyzed  professor,  spent 
many  happy  hours  in  making  Scrapbooks  on  various  subjects  of 
local  historic  interest  for  a  public  library.  This  may  be  worked 
out  along  varying  lines.  Such  a  compiler  becomes  of  true  value 
to  the  community.  There  should  be  good  supervision  that  no 
heterogeneous  material  be  collected,  but,  held  to  definite  subjects, 
there  is  room  for  much  valuable  work.  One  old  man  who  had 
suffered  amputation  of  the  tongue  as  result  of  cancer  was  given 
a  quiet  place  in  the  top  of  a  studio  building,  where  with  great 
precision  he  mounted  and  filed  photographs  and  prints  illustrating 
a  series  of  lectures  on  the  history  of  art. 

In  discussing  the  subject  of  occupation  for  men  with  one 
enthusiastic  professor,  he  remarked  that  the  only  thing  which 
was  presented  to  him  as  a  means  of  entertainment  during  slow 
convalescence  from  typhoid  fever  was  a  bit  of  string  which 
chanced  to  hang  within  his  reach.  This  seems  like  a  truly  meager 
provision,  but  even  this  may  have  its  possibilities.  Multiply  it  by 
two  or  three  and  the  field  widens  greatly.  The  sailor's  art  of 
Tying  Knots  is  varied  and  valuable.  It  affords  problems  and 
may  be  turned  to  good  account  on  land  or  sea.  A  few  years 
ago,  when  a  party  visited  the  receiving  ship  at  Charlestown  Navy 
Yard,  an  interesting  collection  was  shown  by  the  captain's  cook, 
who  had  in  his  chest  a  fine  array  of  ornaments  of  black  silk 
and  white  cord  made  to  decorate  the  costumes  of  both  sexes.  To 
give  directions  for  the  tying  of  all  these  knots  would  be  very 
difficult.  To  one  sufficiently  interested  the  following  books  will 
be  a  great  help:  "Knotting  and  Splicing,"  fifty  cents,  published 
by  Cassell  and  Company,  New  York,  and  "  The  Rigger's  Guide  or 
Seaman's  Assistant,"  by  Charles  Bushell,  published  by  Griffin 
and  Company,  Portsmouth,  England.     The  directions   for  two 


WITH   WANING   POWERS 


127 


knots  were  admirably  given  in  Harper's  Bazaar  for  October, 
1909.  A  kind  sea  captain  of  Ellsworth,  Maine,  has  generously 
supplied  models  to  the  classes  of  this  school. 

A  patient  in  this  institution  brought  a  curious  little  frame  on 
which  she  made  Cords  for  Eyeglasses  and  Watches.  (Fig.  50.) 
She  said  that  an  aunt  who  had  lived  in  the  Azores  learned 
the  method  from  a  sailor.    A  slip  noose  is  first  tied,  leaving  the 


Fig.  50 

end  a  little  long;  slip  this  over  one  side  of  the  frame  A  and, 
holding  the  knot  in  the  center  B,  carry  the  thread  around  the 
end  C,  turning  the  frame  in  the  left  hand.  The  left  thumb  and 
finger  should  hold  the  thread  at  B  all  the  time.  Pull  up  the 
lower  thread  of  silk  as  you  turn  and  slip  it  over  the  upper  one 
and  over  the  end;  then  holding  the  cord  firmly,  draw  the  silk 
thread  very  evenly  and  closely  down  to  the  cord.  Continue  this 
process  until  long  enough,  winding  the  cord  as  made  around 
the  lower  end  D.  These  frames  are  of  light  wood :  if  heavier, 
a  large  cord  could  be   made    for   lanyards,   curtain  pulls,   etc. 


128  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

It  is  a  cord  having  decided  angles  and  is  very  handsome  when 
evenly  made. 

Many  old  men  like  to  know  how  to  make  good  stout  Baskets. 
They  would  not  care  to  fuss  with  raffia,  but  a  basket  of  splints 
or  twigs  appeals  to  them.  A  most  beautiful  flower  basket,  which, 
when  filled  with  red  roses,  won  the  first  prize  at  a  North  Shore 
flower  show,  was  made  in  melon  shape  from  the  natural  brown 
birch  twigs,  which  were  laid  side  by  side  and  wired  together 
at  intervals,  gathered  up  at  the  ends  closely  and  finished  with  a 
handle  over  the  top  from  end  to  end.  An  old  French  Acadian 
makes  baskets  of  all  sizes  from  roots  which  he  gathers,  cleans 
and  scrapes ;  the  spokes  are  shaved  from  heavy  splint  and  the 
smaller  baskets  made  on  the  melon  pattern,  bringing  one  strong 
spoke  around  and  joining  in  an  oval,  thus  forming  the  mid-spoke 
and  handle  all  together.  To  this  the  side  spokes  are  added  and 
the  weaver  of  scraped  roots  intertwined.  The  largest  of  these 
baskets  is  without  a  handle  over  the  top,  but  has  two  openings 
left  at  the  sides  to  serve  as  such.  It  resembles  closely  the  Scotch 
''creel."  The  illustration  on  the  opposite  page  shows  this  basket 
with  its  royal  contents  of  Nova  Scotia  water  lilies.  One  inter- 
esting basket  was  made  with  spokes  of  reed  and  a  weaver  of 
common  blackberry  vine.  This  was  yellow  and  shining  and  pos- 
sessed real  charm.  Another  had  seaweed  used  for  the  weaver 
and,  when  dry,  showed  a  beautiful  deep  purple  tone. 

There  seems  to  be  an  instinct  in  old  people  for  Mending. 
Perhaps  it  springs  from  an  unconscious  sympathy.  Their  own 
bodies  are  wearing  out  and  they  see  in  a  disabled  piece  of  furni- 
ture, a  broken  dish,  a  battered  metal  cup  or  an  old  lamp  some- 
thing which  stimulates  effort  towards  its  renewal.  There  are 
many  examples  of  old  men  who  seem  "possessed"  to  solder  tin- 
ware. They  stump  into  the  kitchen  at  unseemly  hours  and  stick 
a  soldering  iron  into  the  fire  just  when  it  is  most  needed  for 
broiling.  They  appear  in  the  living  room  when  a  cheerful  fire 
in  the  grate  is  inviting  some  caller  to  linger  and.  to  the  dismay 
of  the  hostess,  stir  up  ill-smelling  fumes  from  soldering  fluids. 


RAKE    KNITTING 


Paffe  48 


AN    OLD    ATAniAN    TiASKET 


Pa_^c  13S 


WITH    WANING    POWERS  129 

They  stubbornly  refuse  to  take  a  walk  as  ordered  by  the  family 
physician  as  an  aid  to  digestion,  and  persist  in  soldering  some 
old  lamp.  But  why  oppose  them?  Why  not  make  a  place  for 
this?  An  old  man's  place  is  by  the  fire  just  as  truly  as  is  the 
cat's.  Given  a  chance  much  good  may  come  of  it.  Kitchen  ware 
mended  in  the  house  makes  for  thrift.  Agate  ware  may  be 
soldered  as  well  as  tin.  One  man  took  great  pains  to  make  a 
nice  tin  dipper  for  the  school  exhibit.  He  put  in  a  double  bottom 
and  added  a  final  touch  in  a  stamped  plate  bearing  his  own 
name  and  place  of  residence. 

Occasionally  an  old  man  is  found  who  likes  to  darn  stockings. 
Why  not?  This  is  only  another  form  of  weaving  and  much  hand 
weaving  is  done  by  old  men.  One  rather  eccentric  old  gentle- 
man found  his  chief  interest  in  darning  socks  and  flying  kites 
of  his  own  construction.  In  both  arts  he  excelled,  save  that  he 
darned  the  socks  before  they  were  washed,  possibly  for  economic 
reasons. 

Some  old  men  like  to  make  Rugs,  braided  or  hooked  in.  If 
able  to  weave  on  a  hand  loom  the  sphere  widens  greatly.  Any 
one  can  cut  the  rags  and  ball  them  up.  There  is  a  trick  learned 
from  an  old  man  in  making  a  twisted  stripe  for  weaving  which 
is  worth  remembering.  Take  two  strips  of  contrasting  colors 
together;  holding  the  end  in  the  left  thumb  and  forefinger  wind 
up  around  these  and  when  all  wound  pull  on  both  ends,  i.  e.,  the 
ends  in  the  left  hand  and  those  outside  in  the  right.  The  result 
will  be  a  self-twisted  stripe. 

A  German  strung  rug  is  made  by  putting  a  stout  warp  on  a 
frame  which  is  of  four  strips  of  wood,  the  end  strips  being  nailed 
across  the  side  strips  so  that  they  are  higher  as  the  frame  lies 
on  a  table.  The  size  of  an  ordinary  door  mat  is  good.  Across 
the  end  strips  drive  wire  nails  close  together,  leaving  an  inch 
standing  up  above  the  frame.  The  warp  is  stretched  back  and 
forth  from  end  to  end.  The  filling  may  be  of  rags  cut  a  finger 
long  and  a  finger  wide.  Lay  such  a  strip  over  the  first  two  warp 
threads  and  tuck  the  ends  under  and  pull  up  through  the  center. 


130  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

The  next  one  is  put  over  the  inner  thread  of  the  first  pair  and 
the  third  warp  thread.  Continue  in  this  way  until  the  warp  is 
filled  and  a  strong,  tufted  rug  results.  The  very  best  of  these 
rugs  are  made  of  coir  yarn,  which  is  made  of  cocoanut  fiber, 
and  more  fully  described  in  the  chapter,  "Without  Sight." 

A  group  of  men  in  fairly  comfortable  physical  condition  fell 
into  the  habit  of  gathering  by  the  fire  in  a  hospital  sitting  room 
and  resting  their  feet  on  its  best  mahogany  center  table.  The 
suggestion  was  adopted  of  providing  something  for  these  feet  to 
do,  and  a  foot-power  jig  saw  was  placed  by  the  fire  and  the  men 
interested  by  the  persistent  efforts  of  the  head  nurse  until  they 
fell  to  making  Picture  Puzzles.  This  they  did  all  winter  and 
even  into  the  warmer  weather,  when  the  jig  saw  was  moved  to 
the  piazza.  At  the  rate  that  these  puzzles  sell,  namely,  a  cent 
a  piece,  a  puzzle  of  one  hundred  pieces  bringing  one  dollar,  etc., 
they  must  have  made  a  very  large  sum.  The  whole  institution 
was  provided  and  there  were  also  some  to  send  to  other  invalids 
outside. 

One  soaring  soul  carried  out  his  ambition  to  learn  lace  making 
at  eighty.  He  had  married  a  woman  many  years  younger  than 
himself  and  when  she  attempted  this  delicate  work  he  followed, 
nothing  daunted,  and  soon  produced  a  Battenberg  bureau  scarf 
which  claimed  real  admiration.  Another  old  man  learned  to  play 
the  fiddle  at  eighty.  This  may  not  seem  an  occupation,  but  it  is 
a  thing  which  people  want  and  will  often  pay  for. 

A  very  good  suggestion  for  an  old  man's  work  is  the  making 
of  leather  Moccasins.  If  one  sends  to  Mr.  William  A.  Hall, 
119  Beach  Street,  Boston,  Massachusetts,  he  can  obtain  these  all 
cut  and  stretched  upon  any  size  last.  The  leathers  are  of  fine 
quality  and  color  and  the  work  consists  in  piercing  and  lacing 
the  moccasins  together  with  leather  thongs.  The  price  of  the 
whole  will  be  something  less  than  seventy-five  cents. 

The  training  of  animals  is  often  undertaken  with  joy  and 
pride  by  an  old  man.  Its  usefulness  may  be  questioned,  but  it 
may  be  placed  alongside   of  the   fiddle.     An   extreme   example 


WITH   WANING    POWERS  131 

o£  this  is  vouched  for  in  the  case  of  an  old  man  whose  infirmi- 
ties were  accompanied  by  great  corpulence.  He  sat  in  an  enor- 
mous chair  outside  the  back  door  in  the  summer  evenings  and 
by  a  given  signal  summoned  a  select  company  of  toads  whom 
he  trained  to  do  tricks  which,  if  described,  might  jeopard  the 
sale  of  this  volume  on  account  of  their  seeming  impossibility. 

Strange  to  say,  if  left  to  their  own  devices,  and  able  to  walk 
far  enough,  old  men  often  seek  old  burying  grounds  and  collect 
epitaphs.  The  memories  awakened  are  strangely  significant.  An 
old  man  walked  with  his  daughter  in  such  a  burial  place  in  the 
town  of  his  birth,  and  noting  a  name  on  an  old  stone  he  ex- 
claimed, "I  knew  that  boy;  he  slept  with  me  one  night,  and 
before  he  went  to  bed  he  ate  an  apple!"  By  even  such  deeds 
shall  the  aspirant  to  fame  be  remembered. 

If  only  a  few  fragments  of  wits  remain  the  old  man  can  sell 
postage  stamps.  The  fact  that  he  makes  no  money  by  no  means 
indicates  that  he  receives  no  profit.  He  is  a  public  servant  and 
he  feels  the  little  rub  of  the  pennies  as  they  slip  into  his  hands 
and  a  faint  flicker  stirs  the  old  brain  paths  of  finance.  He  is 
again  in  business  and  his  uncertain  little  life  flame  is  worth 
tending. 


CHAPTER   XIII 

IN   WAITING   TIME 

There  is  perhaps  no  more  trying  period  in  the  experience 
of  a  household  than  the  weeks  which  sometimes  intervene  between 
the  time  of  calculated  and  actual  confinement.  The  time  has 
seemed  quite  long  enough  at  best,  and  to  have  it  vaguely  extended 
will  have  either  a  depressing  or  an  irritating  effect,  according 
to  the  temperament  involved.  During  this  time  the  nurse  is 
usually  in  the  house,  not  by  any  means  because  she  is  wanted, 
but  because  it  is  possible  that  even  a  worse  calamity  than  that 
of  her  presence  might  be  visited  upon  the  family  in  her  absence. 
In  all  this  there  is  no  personal  grudge,  but  something  very  closely 
allied  to  this  is  really  felt  when  the  question  of  money  is  con- 
sidered. At  first  this  is  not  so  apparent ;  the  first  twenty-one  or 
twenty-five  dollars  does  not  loom  so  large ;  but  as  it  goes  on  to 
fifty,  seventy-five,  one  hundred — a  whole  month  gone  and  noth- 
ing has  happened !  The  situation  is  getting  desperate.  The 
husband  appeals  wildly  to  medical  authority  and  medical  authority 
shakes  its  head  and  smiles.  To  send  the  nurse  away  now  seems 
absurd;  to  keep  her  at  this  rate  ruinous.  No  one  prays  more 
devoutly  for  a  fortunate  termination  to  this  seemingly  intermi- 
nable period  than  does  this  same  nurse. 

It  is  the  province  of  every  nurse  to  relieve  distressed  condi- 
tions wherever  she  may  find  them.  Here  is  real  distress ;  not  of 
the  sort  which  she  was  called  to  relieve,  but  none  the  less  genuine. 
Is  she  equal  to  the  demand?  What  has  her  training  given  her 
over  against  this  need  ?  It  has  taught  her  that  she  must  be  cheer- 
ful under  all  circumstances,  so  she  smiles  and  waits,  but  her  smile 
and  her  waiting  are  alike  maddening.  It  is  not  enough  to  say 
that  she  is  kept  from  earning  her  money  in  active  nursing  in 
some  other  home ;  she  must  in  some  way  contrive  to  earn  it  right 

132 


IN    WAITING   TIME  133 

here.  She  must  know  how  to  treat  depression,  apprehension, 
fatigue.  If  she  can  effectually  handle  these  most  subtle  symp- 
toms the  husband  will  pay  her  and  add  his  hearty  thanks. 

Depression  is  successfully  treated  many  times  by  the  stimu- 
lation of  a  new,  and  preferably  involuntary,  interest.  The  vol- 
untary attention  of  this  woman  has  been  intensely  focused  on 
the  expected  event  through  long  preceding  months ;  ready  for 
a  culmination  which  is  apparently  absent.  The  attention  becomes 
fatigued;  the  subject  cannot  be  dismissed,  but  is  gone  over  and 
over  in  wearying  procession  of  thought.  The  mind,  left  to  itself, 
drops  inevitably  into  the  nine  months'  groove.  The  first  require- 
ment, then,  in  treating  this  case  is  a  nezv  object  of  attention. 
A  new  occupation  requires  a  new  physical  attitude  as  well  as 
mental.  Let  a  tired  body  be  presented  with  a  piece  of  work 
which  calls  for  the  exercise  of  new  muscles,  of  new  positions, 
and  overworked  muscles  rest  involuntarily.  There  is  usually  a 
sense  of  completed  preparation  which  renders  the  time  more 
irksome.  Let  the  new  interest  be  directed  towards  a  thing  which 
may  well  cover  considerable  time  and  so  be  itself  the  subject  of 
interruption.  Let  nothing  in  the  way  of  work  be  despised  pro- 
vided these  conditions  be  fulfilled.  To  add  to  an  already  satis- 
factory layette  is  unwise  from  more  than  one  point  of  view. 
There  is,  however,  one  sort  of  extension  of  this  idea  which 
possesses  sufficient  novelty  to  make  it  worth  while  to  attempt  a 
trial.  This  is  the  making  of  toys,  and  is  best,  of  course,  in 
a  heretofore  childless  home. 

Take,  for  instance,  the  Stuffed  Cloth  Animals.  Mental 
depression  will  retreat  as  this  woman  stuffs  her  first  elephant. 
It  takes  time  and  some  physical  strength  to  do  this  and  is  inevi- 
tably funny  and  a  good,  wholesome  piece  of  work.  It  may  pos- 
sibly be  in  line  to  say  that  any  possible  objection  on  the  part  of 
unscientific  minds  as  to  the  danger  of  "marking"  an  infant  by 
w^orking  on  such  figures  may  be  effectually  dispelled  by  the  strong 
assurance  that  at  this  stage  all  development  is  far  too  complete 
to  admit  of  the  remotest  danger.    This  may  be  considered  good, 


134  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

wholesome  work :  still,  all  things  considered,  the  work  which 
opens  the  way  to  a  distinctly  new  accomplishment  will  be  best. 

Perhaps  no  better  thing  than  Bookbinding  could  be  inaugu- 
rated. The  patient  has  never  thought  of  this?  So  much  the 
better.  The  materials  can  be  quickly  assembled;  the  directions 
given  in  the  chapter  on  "The  Business  Man"  hold  good  here. 
Beautiful  portfolios,  picture  frames,  letter  cases  and  blotters  are 
made  in  much  the  same  way  as  are  the  covers  of  a  book.  Let 
her  bind  up  some  of  her  old  music  or  her  magazines.  Gather 
up  the  loose  kodak  pictures,  make  an  album  and  then  color  the 
photographs ;  the  chances  are  that  before  all  have  been  arranged 
in  the  book  it  will  have  to  be  laid  aside  for  a  time  until  the  later 
sitting  up  calls  it  out  again. 

Has  this  patient  ever  learned  to  use  Pastels  ?  It  may  be  that 
long  ago  she  took  a  few  lessons  in  oil  painting.  This  involves 
the  use  of  certain  odorous  oils  which  are  many  times  peculiarly 
disagreeable  to  a  pregnant  woman ;  pastels,  on  the  contrary,  are 
much  more  manageable,  and  so  truly  charming!  One  may  pur- 
chase a  little  unpainted  wooden  box  marked  "France"  for  about 
sixty  cents.  In  this  is  found  several  rows  of  delicately  tinted 
crayons  carefully  laid  in  fine  sawdust  and  covered  with  a  cotton 
wool  blanket.  They  break  almost  with  a  touch,  these  precious 
pastels,  but  never  mind,  every  fragment  may  be  used ;  the  little 
fractured  edge  is  just  what  will  serve  you  best  for  your  finest 
lines. 

A  few  more  explicit  directions  may  be  a  help.  English 
crayon  paper  is  sold  in  many  tints.  This  has  one  smooth  side 
and  one  slightly  rough.  This  will  work  better  than  the  paper 
sold  especially  for  pastels,  which  takes  up  a  large  amount  of 
color  in  its  rather  woolly  surface.  Common  cartridge  paper  used 
for  wall  hangings  may  be  used  as  previously  suggested.  Cut 
from  any  of  these  papers  a  piece,  say  six  by  eight  inches,  not 
too  large  at  the  start ;  fasten  this  to  a  piece  of  board  or  a  square 
of  very  heavy  pasteboard,  using  four  thumb  tacks. 

If  you  start  by  copying  a  choice  foreign  post  card,  for  in- 


IN    WAITING    TIME  135 

stance,  there  will  need  to  be  little  drawing  done.  To  be  set  to 
"draw"  a  thing  is  apt  to  suggest  a  serious  task,  while  rubbing 
in  color  is  play — magic  play.  With  just  a  stroke  or  two  with 
neutral  tinted  crayon  block  in  the  most  striking  forms  and  let 
that  suffice  for  drawing.  Then  do  a  sky.  If  it  is  fair  weather 
rub  over  your  sky  space  with  the  very  palest  yellow,  then  put 
on  sky  blue  in  patches  and  streaks.  Now,  with  your  finger,  rub 
these  tints  into  the  paper — never  mind  the  color  on  your  hands, 
have  a  clean  rag  handy  to  rub  them  off.  In  this  way  mottle 
your  summer  sky.  Clouds  may  be  taken  out  by  a  little  wipe 
with  cloth  or  a  dry  sponge,  and  their  edges  touched  with  delicate 
mauve  which  is  already  prepared  in  pastels.  The  distance  is  next 
put  in.  The  principle  here  to  be  observed  will  be  to  stick  to 
gray  tones,  blue-grays,  blue-greens  and  purples,  remembering 
always  that  the  effect  of  distance  is  obtained  in  this  way,  inter- 
vening space  making  always  some  haze  or  at  least  less  clarity. 
If  your  shore  or  house  or  anything  in  the  middle  distance  seems 
too  near,  gray  it  and  thus  send  it  back.  It  is  easy  to  do  this 
in  pastel  where  so  many  lovely  grays  are  already  prepared.  In 
using  water  colors  one  needs  to  remember  that,  given  the  three 
primary  colors,  red,  blue  and  yellow,  the  gray  tone  is  produced 
by  the  addition  of  the  third  primary  to  any  two ;  as,  for  example, 
blue  and  yellow  make  green,  and  red  being  added  grays  the  tone. 
People  will  start  at  different  points  to  make  a  picture.  It  was 
a  habit  with  Whistler  to  seize  first  upon  the  chief  point  of  in- 
terest whether  near  or  far;  then,  after  drawing  this,  he  would 
expand;  but  in  this  way  he  had  always  a  true  picture  before 
him,  so  that  if  arrested  at  any  time  in  the  painting  it  was  still 
a  complete  picture.  Little  by  little  the  foreground  will  be  devel- 
oped. The  affection  felt  by  a  woman  for  her  first  picture  is  a 
very  real  thing.  She  never  knew  she  could  do  it.  In  working 
in  pastels  do  not  hesitate  to  paint  much  with  the  fingers.  They 
are  one's  best  tools.  These  pictures  are  rich  in  color  and  should 
almost  always  be  framed  or  matted  in  gold.  They  will  rub  with 
the  slightest  touch  and  must  be  jealously  guarded  until  covered 


136  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

by  glass.  Pastel  fixatif  is  a  French  preparation  which  is  rather 
expensive,  but  if  used  carefully  saves  the  picture  if  not  immedi- 
ately glazed.  A  blower  is  purchased  for  a  few  cents  and  a  very 
fine  spray  sent  from  some  distance  over  the  whole  surface  of 
the  picture.  This  is  thought  by  some  artists  to  impair  the  delicacy 
of  texture,  while  others  advocate  a  liberal  application.  It  can  be 
obtained  only  at  the  best  art  stores.  The  ordinary  charcoal 
fixatif  will  not  answer.  The  quickest  and  best  way  is  to  cover 
with  glass  and  use  passe  partouf  binding  until  ready  to  frame. 

But,  some  one  will  say,  suppose  this  patient  does  not  want 
to  do  any  of  these  things.  Probably  she  does  not.  Depressed 
people  rarely  want  to  do  anything.  Herein  Hes  the  test  of  the 
fine  art  of  nursing:  so  to  present  a  thing  that  a  patient,  tired 
and  often  petulant,  is  involuntarily  stimulated  to  follow  as  a  wise 
and  well-equipped  nurse  may  surely  lead. 

Find  out  if  this  woman  knows  how  to  knit  a  pair  of  mittens. 
So  many  women  knit  fancy  shawls  but  would  be  at  a  loss  to  knit 
mittens.  It  is  well  worth  the  learning.  Dressing  a  doll  is  not 
bad  work,  but  try  to  keep  the  element  of  novelty  uppermost  and 
do  not  kill  time.  Time  was  never  intended  for  slaughter.  Teach 
something  in  that  waiting  time  which  will  prove  a  valuable 
possession  for  all  time. 

There  is  one  article  in  the  exhibit  of  these  classes  which  has 
excited  considerable  interest  and  can  be  placed  here,  although 
it  is  best  for  the  most  part  to  steer  clear  of  special  preparation. 
This  is  a  Baby's  Cap  made  from  a  single  handkerchief,  uncut. 
Select  a  fine  hemstitched  handkerchief  with  dainty  embroidered 
border,  fold  evenly  through  the  center  with  edges  together,  then 
fold  from  each  corner  to  the  center  of  handkerchief.  (Fig.  51.) 
This  brings  all  the  hemstitched  edges  together,  A  A.  Now,  hold- 
ing the  center  corners  B  together  and  to  the  thickness  immedi- 
ately beneath  them,  let  the  lower  thickness  drop  down  as  you  pick 
the  upper  ones  up,  and  allow  the  cap  to  form  by  folding  through 
the  crease  in  top.  Turn  back  the  two  center  corners  like  little 
revers   (Fig.  52),  leaving  the  edge  underneath  C  to  go  around 


IN    WAITING   TIME 


137 


the  face.  Tack  the  corners  at  the  top  and  decorate  with  a  tiny 
rosette.  Make  a  Uttle  box  plait  in  the  back  to  fit  in  the  neck 
and  put  on  ties  of  lawn  from  a  second  handkerchief,  or  ribbons. 
A  narrow  lace  is  frilled  around  face,  revers  and  neck.  This  fits 
a  very  tiny  baby  and  may  be  easily  laundered. 

It  must  be  reiterated  that  few  patients  will  take  the  initiative, 
while  they  will  usually  follow  a  truly  intelligent  and  enthusiastic 


Fig.  51 

leader.  During  this  period  you  are  caring  for  a  mental  case, 
perhaps  unconsciously ;  few  women  are  absolutely  normal  in  their 
thought  and  feeling  while  under  this  strain.  When  you  fail  it 
will  generally  be  found  to  result  from  lack  of  personal  interest, 
lack  of  intelligent  appreciation  or  lack  of  training.  You  may 
waken  personal  interest;  intelligent  appreciation  comes  by  mak- 
ing a  thing  the  object  of  thought,  and  a  lack  of  training  may 
be  met  by  the  improvement  of  every  opportunity  and  the  habit 
of  recording  and  classifying  all  the  suggestions  which  constitute  a 
part  of  each  day  when  viewed  aright. 


CHAPTER    XIV 

WITHOUT    SIGHT 

The  aim  of  this  chapter  will  be  to  offer  suggestions  more 
especially  adapted  to  such  cases  of  blindness  as  occur  incidentally 
during  the  course  of  acute  disease,  after  operative  treatment 
upon  the  eyes  or  as  the  accompaniment  of  other  physical  dis- 
turbance. For  congenital  cases  or  for  those  who  have  been 
deprived  of  sight  at  an  early  age,  schools  for  the  blind  have 
formulated  an  educational  system  which  is  so  finely  developed 
that  little  is  left  to  suggest.  All  this,  however,  is  practically 
unknown  to  the  nurse  who  is  called  to  help  a  patient  suddenly 
precipitated  into  a  darkness  which  cannot  be  described.  This 
may  be  in  the  general  hospital,  in  the  sanitarium,,  in  the  asylum 
or  in  any  private  home.  At  any  moment  a  nurse  may  be  sum- 
moned to  care  for  a  patient  in  a  dark  room  or  one  who,  although 
sitting  in  a  flood  of  sunlight,  knows  only  darkness.  "There  is 
no  blackness  like  it"  were  the  words  of  one  whose  sight  had 
been  suddenly  destroyed. 

What  is  the  nurse's  equipment  for  service  in  darkness? 
Many  years  ago  a  wise  superintendent  said  to  her  class,  "Never 
fail  to  grasp  every  opportunity  for  storing  your  memory  with 
examples  of  choice  literature  which  may  be  used  in  a  room  where 
darkness  forbids  reading."  This  has  never  been  forgotten  by  at 
least  one  member  of  that  class.  Sometimes  the  patient's  hands 
must  be  tied  to  prevent  any  slightest  possible  disturbance  of  an 
eye  dressing  which  would  jeopard  the  success  of  an  operation. 
If,  however,  during  this  time  the  patient's  thoughts  be  led  out 
into  "fresh  fields  and  pastures  new"  by  the  grace  of  a  beautiful 
poem,  a  story  or  a  word  picture,  rich  in  colors  which  the  sur- 
rounding darkness  fails  to  obscure,  much  of  the  weary  way  will 
be  traveled  with  good  courage.     Surely  no  nurse  is  truly  quali- 

138 


WITHOUT    SIGHT  139 

fied  until  she  learns  how  to  give  to  her  patients  in  her  own 
words,  or  from  her  own  memory,  some  part  of  the  treasures 
found  in  literature. 

The  first  thing  which  such  a  patient  will  need  to  do  will  be 
to  get  her  bearings  geographically.  Try  to  recall  the  sensation 
which  you  used  to  experience  when  playing  Blindman's  Buff 
when,  after  being  blindfolded,  you  were  turned  around  three 
times  and  then  told  to  find  your  own  way.  Multiply  this  sensa- 
tion a  thousandfold  and  you  will,  perhaps,  feebly  approach  the 
bewilderment  of  one  really  deprived  of  sight.  It  is  possible, 
according  to  the  actual  testimony  of  patients,  to  be  lost  in  one's 
own  bed.  If  the  patient  be  brought  into  new  surroundings  this 
sensation  is,  of  course,  increased.  It  may  be  a  help  to  employ 
some  plastic  substance,  as  plasticene  or  modelene  or  common  clay 
or  even  a  box  of  clean  sand.  With  this  plastic  substance  make 
a  raised  plan  of  the  whole  floor,  suite  or  grounds.  This  will 
be  done  roughly,  but  will  give  such  a  patient  some  connected 
idea  of  her  environment.  Paper  pulp,  which  has  been  fully  de- 
scribed in  the  chapter  on  contagious  work,  may  well  be  used 
for  this  purpose.  As  the  patient's  condition  permits  she  may 
be  taken  out  to  verify  this  plan. 

Next  to  finding  out  where  one  is  comes  the  practice  in  help- 
ing one's  self.  If  the  common  furnishings  of  a  room  were  always 
put  in  the  same  places  this  difficulty  would  be  diminished,  but 
what  of  other  places  where  all  is  differently  arranged?  The 
tactile  sense  must  be  trained  to  take  the  place  of  vision.  No 
matter  what  the  age  of  the  patient  may  be,  this  is  essentially 
a  new  lesson.  In  this  we  deal  with  the  very  beginnings  of  a 
study.  Observe  closely  the  hands  of  a  person  who  has  been 
blind  for  a  long  period  and  you  will  notice  that  they  seem  to 
hover  over  rather  than  to  touch  the  objects  beneath  them.  Accus- 
tomed to  using  the  hands  for  grasping,  the  first  thing  to  be 
taught  is  that  in  proportion  to  the  lightness  of  touch  the  sense 
of  feeling  will  be  developed. 

An  interesting  method  for  training  the  tactile  sense  is  used 


140  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

in  the  School  for  Feeble-minded  Children  at  Waverley,  Massa- 
chusetts. A  large,  stout  bag  is  partly  filled  with  all  sorts  of 
small  objects.  These  vary  in  texture,  form,  hardness,  smooth- 
ness, etc.  The  child's  hand  is  thrust  into  the  bag,  the  draw- 
string is  pulled  up  around  his  arm  and  he  is  then  required  to 
describe  what  he  finds  as  the  objects  are  picked  up  one  by  one. 
These  articles  are  in  one  confused  heap  and  it  will  be  readily 
perceived  that  considerable  discrimination  will  be  needed  to  learn 
them  entirely  without  sight.  It  constitutes,  however,  a  sort  of 
grab-bag  game  which  is  not  without  interest  and  which  might 
well  be  incorporated  into  the  training  of  the  blind  patient.  If 
a  tray  filled  with  unfamiliar  dishes  is  placed  before  a  trained 
blind  person  it  will  be  noticed  that  instead  of  groping  among 
them  she  will  barely  touch  their  tops  and  locate  every  one.  To 
get  the  sense  of  relationship  one  needs  to  use  more  than  the 
finger  tips ;  the  palmer  surface  will  also  be  used.  Merely  to 
allow  the  finger  tips  to  run  over  a  surface  does  not  establish 
the  idea  of  a  whole. 

In  prescribing  occupation  for  these  cases  of  sudden  loss  of 
sight  it  is  usually  necessary  to  take  into  careful  consideration 
the  physical  condition  which  has  produced  the  blindness,  and 
adapt  the  work  to  the  degree  of  weakness  and  shock  to  the 
nervous  system.  First  of  all  let  there  be  no  haste  in  the  teach- 
ing. The  patient  has  to  find  herself  before  she  can  find  her 
work,  although,  taken  quietly,  the  work  may  help  her  to  find 
herself  to  a  great  measure. 

In  the  beginning  of  any  sense  training,  the  element  of  size 
is  important.  Whatever  work  is  placed  in  the  hands  of  such  a 
patient  should  be  large  enough  to  be  free  from  fussy  detail.  Do 
not  at  first  set  such  a  patient  to  stringing  small  beads  or  counting 
small  spaces.  In  all  good  teaching  the  first  principle  is  to  learn 
what  the  pupil  already  possesses  before  adding  new  facts  or 
experiences.  If  the  subject  of  this  blindness  be  an  adult  she 
will  doubtless  have  learned  many  things  and  the  rational  effort 
will  be  towards  the  preservation  of  this  already  acquired  skill. 


WITHOUT    SIGHT  141 

One  of  the  great  deprivations  will  be  in  not  being  able  to 
attend  to  her  own  correspondence.  The  patient  knows  how  to 
write,  but  feels  the  lack  of  simple  sight  guidance.  The  best  aid 
here  is  a  sheet  of  lightly  corrugated  cardboard  giving  uniform 
lines  and  spaces,  which  is  placed  under  the  letter  paper.  Holding 
a  pencil  in  the  right  hand,  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  follow 
the  ridge  and  keep  track  of  the  spaces.  Because  of  this  action 
of  the  left  hand  the  pencil  works  better  than  the  pen.  It  may, 
however,  be  an  indelible  pencil.  These  pressed  pasteboards  may 
be  had  free  of  cost  by  applying  to  the  Massachusetts  Commis- 
sion for  the  Blind.  Application  may  be  made  to  Miss  Lucy 
Wright,  15  Ashburton  Place,  Boston.  A  blind  person  can  learn 
to  use  a  common  typewriter  without  much  difficulty.  Very  old 
men  have  learned  this  readily.  This,  of  course,  opens  the  way 
for  large  correspondence  and  other  forms  of  work. 

Referring  again  to  what  the  patient  already  knows,  sewing 
will  probably  come  next,  providing  the  patient  be  a  woman  or 
young  girl.  If,  however,  it  becomes  a  question  of  teaching  a 
child,  it  has  been  found  wiser  to  teach  Knitting  before  sewing. 
At  the  Perkins  Institution  for  the  Blind  in  South  Boston,  Massa- 
chusetts, this  plan  is  followed :  To  teach  knitting  a  large  cord  is 
used.  The  pupil  is  first  taught  to  make  a  coarse  chain,  using 
his  fingers  alone  without  needles.  Starting  with  a  loop  he  pulls 
a  second  through  this  and  continues  until  able  to  make  an  evenly 
spaced  chain.  These  chains  made  of  white  cord  serve  as  curtain 
tiebacks,  etc.  Next  a  loop  of  cord  is  slipped  over  the  child's 
left  thumb,  the  cord  being  held  in  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand 
and  the  large  knitting  needle  with  the  right  thumb  and  fore- 
fingers. He  is  now  directed  to  slip  this  one  needle  along  his  left 
thumb  and  so  under  the  loop,  and  is  told  that  his  left  thumb 
is  his  othej'  needle.  There  is  great  advantage  in  this,  as  it  is  a 
needle  possessing  feeling  and  by  this  he  learns  the  process.  As 
the  true  needle  slips  under  the  loop  the  cord  is  passed  around 
it  and  the  stitch  knitted.  After  this  has  been  learned,  two  needles 
used  together  as  one  are  substituted  in  place  of  the  single  needle. 


142  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

This  is  done  to  secure  a  more  elastic  edge  than  that  given  by 
the  use  of  one  needle,  but  is  used  only  for  the  first  row,  after 
which  the  single  needle  is  resumed.  In  this  way  the  pupil  learns 
to  cast  on  or  knit  on  stitches  as  is  desired.  Later  two  needles 
are  used,  as  is  customary. 

In  the  case  of  an  adult  who  knows  how  to  knit  the  problem 
is  far  simpler.  Watching  such  a  patient  one  notices  that  the 
left  thumb  finds  the  upper  stitch  on  the  left  needle  and  slips  it 
up  slightly  away  from  the  others  before  taking  it  up  by  the 
right-hand  needle.  There  is  scarcely  any  form  of  fancy  knit- 
ting but  may  be  done  by  the  blind.  One  elderly  lady  spends 
her  evenings  in  knitting  dolls'  sweaters  without  using  her  eyes 
at  all.  She  is  not  blind,  but  having  had  serious  trouble  with  her 
eyes  in  former  years,  has  learned  how  to  save  them.  One  of 
the  very  first  articles  knitted  by  the  blind  pupils  is  a  bag  made 
of  the  heavy  cord  knitted  in  a  strip,  sewed  up  and  hung  by 
one  of  the  hand  crocheted  chains  around  the  pupil's  neck  for  the 
purpose  of  holding  his  knitting.  The  knitting  classes  at  Perkins 
Institution  are  made  up  of  boys  as  well  as  girls.  Crocheting 
is  taught  more  exclusively  to  the  girls.  In  connection  with  knit- 
ting the  rake-work  previously  described  is  well  adapted  to  the 
work  of  the  blind. 

Sewing.  To  teach  sewing,  carefully  graded  steps  are  fol- 
lowed. Strips  of  leather  are  punched  with  round  holes  in  lines ; 
these  are  used  in  teaching  running  stitch,  back  stitch,  overhand- 
ing  and  other  plain  stitches.  The  needle  used  is  the  "Calyx 
Needle,"  which  is  threaded  by  pressing  the  thread  into  a  groove 
in  the  top  which  opens  and  admits  the  thread  to  the  eye  of  the 
needle.  Germantown  wool  was  used  for  thread.  The  next  step 
was  the  substitution  of  coarse  canvas  for  the  leather.  In  this 
the  holes  must  be  counted  and  the  labor  results  in  some  definite 
article  when  completed.  Darning  is  taught  by  cutting  out  a 
square  in  the  canvas  and  requiring  the  pupil  to  weave  in  thread 
to  fill  the  space.  This  is  done  with  great  regularity.  The  work 
from  now  on  does  not  differ  from  that  of  any  seamstress.     All 


WITHOUT    SIGHT  143 

sorts  of  garments,  household  suppHes,  etc.,  are  made  quite  as 
well  as  by  seeing  pupils.  Ordinary  sewing  machines  are  oper- 
ated without  difficulty,  no  difference  being  made  except  that  a 
clever  little  needle  threader  is  used  which,  however,  is  not  made 
for  the  blind  alone.  Before  finishing  the  course  the  pupil  learns 
to  draft  a  pattern  and  cut  a  dress  for  herself. 

Leather  Bags.  Early  in  the  sewing  lessons  good  leather 
bags  may  be  made  by  cutting  these  from  colored  suede  or  finished 
leathers,  and  punching  the  holes  around  the  edges.  These  are 
then  laced  together  with  a  leather  thong  which  runs  at  first 
over  the  edge  in  plain  overhand  and  is  then  reversed  so  as  to 
form  a  series  of  crosses.  A  plain  running  stitch  is  also  added. 
Many  useful  and  handsome  articles  may  be  made  from  leather 
in  the  same  manner.  Sometimes  large  beads  are  strung  on  the 
thongs  and  give  a  suggestion  of  Indian  work.  The  frames  of 
birch  bark  described  in  the  chapter,  "With  Waning  Powers," 
are  equally  suited  to  this  subject. 

Weaving.  The  method  employed  in  teaching  a  blind  child 
to  weave  is  novel  and  interesting.  In  the  Kindergarten  for  the 
Blind  in  Jamaica  Plain  a  game  is  played  in  which  the  children 
stand  in  a  row  while  one  child  weaves  in  and  out  between  them ; 
thus  the  children's  own  bodies  are  used  to  illustrate  the  warp 
threads,  while  the  one  child  is  the  weaver  or  filling  thread.  After 
this  a  common  chair  is  used.  The  uprights  of  the  back  are 
used  as  the  warp  and  the  child  weaves  in  and  out  with  coarse 
cord.  From  this  they  go  to  slat,  tape  and  cloth  weaving.  A 
rectangular  frame  is  filled  with  strips  of  tape  tacked  on  at  two 
sides,  leaving  the  edges  of  the  tapes  close  together.  Wooden 
slats  of  similar  width  are  used  as  weavers  in  this  example. 
Weaving  offers  great  opportunities  to  the  blind  and  has  been 
well  developed. 

It  is  possible  to  obtain  strips  of  stiff  colored  felt  which  are 
left  over  from  the  manufacture  of  women's  felt  hats.  These 
may  be  cut  into  strips  of  uniform  width  and  are  then  ready  for 
weaving.     A  rectangular  frame  is  used,  the  warp  strips  being 


144  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

tacked  on  as  described  in  the  tape  weaving.  Simple  in  and  out 
weaving  of  these  flat  strips  results  in  strong  rugs  of  firm  texture. 
These  can  be  cleaned  with  soap  and  water  and  a  brush  as  they 
lie  on  the  floor.  The  edge  has  one  row  of  flat  machine  stitching 
to  prevent  fraying. 

All  the  simple  handmade  looms  described  in  the  chapter  on 
"Restricted  Positions"  may  be  used  in  working  with  the  blind, 
Superior  work  is  done  by  the  women  in  the  employ  of  the  Massa- 
chusetts Commission  for  the  Blind  in  Cambridge.  Portieres, 
window  hangings,  sofa  pillows  and  many  smaller  pieces  are 
woven  in  designs  and  colors  which  are  truly  beautiful.  The 
hand-woven  rugs  made  by  the  men  are  sold  in  many  cities. 
They  sell  at  the  rate  of  three  dollars  and  seventy-five  cents  per 
square  yard.  The  last  two  kinds  of  weaving  can  be  done  only 
on  large  looms  and  are  not  so  practical  for  the  needs  indicated 
in  this  chapter. 

Pretty  bags  are  woven  of  two  contrasting  shades  of  dress 
braid.  These  are  made  much  as  the  raffia  bags  are  woven  which 
are  described  on  page  54.  A  piece  of  pasteboard  of  about  nine 
and  one-half  by  five  inches  is  covered  on  one  side  by  a  contin- 
uous strip  of  braid.  This  runs  lengthwise  of  the  pasteboard 
back  and  forth,  and  the  edges  just  meet.  At  the  ends  the  braid 
is  turned  each  time  so  as  to  form  an  even  point  through  which 
it  is  basted  to  the  pasteboard.  When  wholly  covered,  double  the 
board  so  that  the  two  ends  come  together  and  the  fold  is  just 
across  the  center.  With  the  other  color  begin  weaving  over  and 
under  right  around  the  folded  board  once,  close  to  the  folded 
edge.  Cut  off  the  braid  each  time  on  the  same  side,  leaving  a 
half  inch  or  so  to  join.  Continue  in  this  way  weaving  and  cut- 
ting until  within  one  width  of  braid  of  the  top.  In  this  last  space 
weave  a  row  of  braid,  leaving  the  ends  longer  for  a  draw  string, 
and  again  in  the  same  space,  but  starting  at  the  opposite  side, 
run  a  second  row  of  braid  for  the  second  draw  string.  Now  clip 
the  stitches  holding  the  braid  to  the  board  and  carefully  draw 
it  out,  leaving  the  bag.     Turn  in  the  cut  ends  and  join  with  a 


WITHOUT    SIGHT  145 

neat  overhand  stitch.  Tie  the  ends  of  the  draw  strings  and  ravel 
for  a  Httle  depth  to  form  a  tassel.  It  will  be  an  additional 
security  if  a  line  of  featherstitch  or  other  stitching  be  put  in 
just  below  the  draw  string.  A  lining  adds  to  the  attractiveness 
of  the  bag. 

Chair  Caning.  A  good  deal  of  emphasis  is  placed  upon 
this  work  for  the  blind.  Many  chairs  are  so  made  that  the  seat 
may  be  taken  out  and  fastened  to  a  bench  by  hand  screws  or  a 
vise.  It  is  then  far  less  clumsy  to  manage.  The  cane  is  obtained 
from  the  rattan  factories  and  basket  supply  shops,  also  at  school 
supply  places.  After  the  old  cane  has  been  cleaned  away  the 
start  is  made  by  bringing  the  cane  up  at  one  front  corner  and 
across  from  front  to  back,  repeating  until  the  holes  are  full.  A 
few  wooden  pegs  will  be  required  to  drive  in  to  hold  the  cane 
while  drawing  through  the  next  holes.  The  second  set  of  canes 
run  straight  over  the  first  but  from  side  to  side.  The  third 
set  run  diagonally,  going  under  the  canes  running  from  front 
to  back  and  over  those  which  run  from  side  to  side.  The  fourth 
row  run  straight  from  front  to  back  over  the  others  with  no 
weaving.  The  fifth  run  diagonally  under  two  and  over  one. 
The  sixth  run  diagonally  under  those  running  from  side  to  side 
and  over  those  running  from  back  to  front.  To  bind  the  edge 
use  larger  cane,  laying  it  flat  over  the  holes  around  the  edge 
and  bringing  a  smaller  cane  up  through  each  hole  and  over 
the  wide  cane,  then  down  through  the  same  hole  again.  This 
completes  the  process.  The  boys  at  Perkins  Institution  do 
the  caning  for  a  chair  factory  which  ships  the  seats  alone 
to  the  institution  for  this  work. 

Rush  Bottom  Chairs.  The  rush  bottoming  of  chairs  is 
particularly  interesting.  This  is  done  with  the  common  bulrush 
or  cat-tail  leaves,  which  should  be  gathered  before  the  twelfth  of 
August  or  before  the  heads  turn  brown.  These  flags  are  then 
dried  in  the  shade  and  are  to  be  soaked  for  several  hours  before 
using  and  kept  wrapped  in  a  damp  cloth  while  in  use.  If  neces- 
sary to  buy  these,  they  may  be  obtained  from  Lang  and  Jacobs, 


146  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

24  India  Square,  Boston,  Massachusetts.  This  is  a  cooperage 
supply  place  and  the  flags  are  sold  to  pack  between  the  staves 
of  barrels  to  make  them  tight.  For  this  reason  there  is  a  good 
deal  of  waste  when  purchased  for  chair  work. 

To  teach  rush  bottoming,  any  small  rectangular  frame  may 
be  used,  but  a  chair  is  done  in  this  way:  A  few  of  the  hard 
butts  of  the  rush  are  tied  to  the  inside  of  the  chair  frame  to 
make  a  little  padding  next  to  the  frame.  Twist  the  green  rush 
to  a  smooth,  round  cord,  hold  it  over  one  corner  of  the  frame, 
bring  it  around  the  side  and  up  through  the  center,  over  the 
next  side,  then  over  the  left-hand  side  of  the  frame  close  to 
the  corner,  around  and  up  through  the  center,  then  directly 
across  to  the  opposite  lower  right-hand  corner,  over  and  up 
through  the  center,  over  the  lower  side  and  up  through  the 
center.  In  this  way  follow  around  the  frame,  always  bring- 
ing the  rush  up  through  the  center,  over  one  side  of  the  corner, 
up  and  over  the  other  side  of  the  same  corner  before  cross- 
ing to  the  next.  In  this  way  fill  the  entire  rectangle.  If  oblong 
rather  than  square,  the  last  rush  will  run  from  side  to  side, 
omitting  the  other  two  sides  until  the  space  is  filled.  All  the 
time  this  is  going  on  the  flags  are  constantly  twisted  to  form 
an  even  rope.  When  necessary  to  splice,  the  thick  end  of  the 
new  rush  is  stuck  down  between  the  lower  ropes  and  then  twisted 
in  with  the  first  one.  Should  the  cord  be  too  large,  a  rush 
may  be  dropped  out  in  the  same  way  by  sticking  it  down  between 
the  lower  cords,  and  when  the  seat  is  finished  all  these  ends 
cut  ofif  short.  This  makes  a  very  handsome  and  durable  chair 
seat. 

Coir  Yarn  Rugs.  Coir  yarn  is  a  stiflf,  coarse  yarn  made 
from  cocoanut  fiber  and  very  useful  in  making  outside  door- 
mats. It  is  imported  from  India  and  costs  about  five  and  one- 
third  cents  per  pound.  It  may  be  obtained  from  the  Boston 
Mat  and  Basket  Company,  62  Fulton  Street,  Boston,  Massachu- 
setts :  also  of  Darragh  and  Smail,  177  Water  Street,  New  York 
City ;  but  from  the  latter  firm  only  in  large  quantity. 


WITHOUT    SIGHT  147 

To  make  these  rugs  a  rectangular  frame  of  common  strip 
wood  or  even  an  old  window  frame  or  other  fairly  heavy  frame 
will  answer.  The  size  should  be  that  of  the  rug  desired.  Across 
the  two  narrow  ends  drive  wire  nails  at  a  distance  of  three- 
eighths  of  an  inch  apart,  driving  in  securely.  On  these  the 
warp  is  strung,  keeping  the  yarn  as  taut  as  possible.  It  is  quite 
possible  that  a  different  rope  or  heavy  cord  would  work  better 
for  the  warp,  as  the  yarn  is  uneven  and  chafes  somewhat.  It 
is  used,  however,  at  Waverley,  and  is  the  best  which  these 
workers  have  yet  found.  Wind,  after  tying  the  first  loop  to  the 
first  nail,  straight  up  to  opposite  end  around  two  nails,  down 
and  around  two  lower  nails  and  so  back  and  forth  until  the 
space  is  filled.  Now  cut  short  lengths  of  the  yarn;  about  five 
inches  will  answer.  Many  lengths  may  be  cut  at  one  time  by 
using  a  paper  cutter  such  as  is  used  to  cut  mounts  for  photo- 
graphs. Put  one  short  length  yarn  over  two  warp  threads,  bring 
the  two  short  ends  down  outside  the  warp  threads  and  then  up 
between  them  in  the  center  toward  you.  With  the  two  short 
ends  held  evenly  together,  pull  up  tightly  so  that  the  cut  ends 
stand  up.  In  this  way  continue  across,  tying  over  each  pair  of 
warp  threads.  Begin  the  next  row  by  omitting  the  first  warp 
thread  and  tying  over  the  second  and  third  threads.  This  divides 
the  first  pairs  and  leaves  one  unused  thread  at  the  end.  The 
third  row  is  like  the  first.  Alternate  these  until  the  whole  space 
is  filled.  Make  a  braid  of  the  yarn  and  sew  around  the  base  of 
the  mat  after  taking  from  the  frame.  The  braid  is  set  up  on  its 
edge  and  sewed  on  with  a  sail  needle.  This  method  of  tying 
or  stringing  is  capable  of  much  variation.  The  short  strips 
may  be  of  cut  rags,  of  wool  or  any  finer  material.  The  method 
is  identical  with  that  used  in  making  the  fine  Oriental  rugs  which 
command  such  fabulous  prices.  From  coir  yarn  is  also  made 
the  sort  of  zigzag  pattern  rope  rugs  often  seen.  These  are 
made  of  the  braid  and  sewed  with  a  sail  needle. 

Baskets.  The  coarser  baskets  are  well  suited  to  the  work 
of  the  blind  patient,  as  those  of  reed  or  reed  and  raffia  combined. 


148  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

One  charming  basket  was  melon  shaped  and  made  by  joining 
two  oval  hoops  of  heavy  reed  at  right  angles.  One  hoop  thus 
formed  the  handle  and  the  midrib  of  the  bottom  and  the  other 
the  top  of  the  basket.  They  were  joined  by  winding  around  the 
crossed  reeds  so  that  the  raffia  used  to  wind  formed  a  square 
on  the  outside  at  the  junction  of  basket  and  handle.  This  wind- 
ing was  continued  until  the  square  was  an  inch  and  one-half 
in  diameter.  Four  other  reeds  were  then  cut  of  the  right  length 
to  spring  in  on  either  side  of  the  midrib  at  regular  intervals, 
being  held  by  the  ends  against  the  woven  squares.  A  weaver 
was  then  used  of  common,  uncolored  raffia  braid.  This  was  first 
wound  round  and  round  the  handle  and  then  woven  in  and  out 
across  the  basket.    All  this  might  be  done  by  one  without  sight. 

Netting  is  fairly  well  adapted  to  non-seeing  patients.  A 
netting  needle,  a  mesh  stick  and  macrame  cord  will  be  required. 
Hammocks,  net  bags  for  laundry,  shopping  bags,  etc.,  are  made 
quite  easily.  Good  directions  for  this  may  be  found  in  the 
Manual  Arts  books  for  elementary  schools.  The  book,  "Occu- 
pations for  Little  Fingers,"  by  the  Misses  Sage  and  Cooley, 
gives  good  directions  for  netting. 

Beadwork  can  be  done  with  great  accuracy  and  success  by 
the  blind.  The  little  Apache  looms  can  be  bought,  but  a  great 
variety  of  strung  necklaces  need  nothing  but  needle  and  thread 
for  stringing  the  beads.  Colors  are  managed  by  keeping  the 
beads  in  different  boxes. 

Braiding.  Many  materials  may  be  improved  and  rendered 
more  useful  by  being  braided.  From  the  old-fashioned  rag  rug 
to  fine  straw  for  hats,  raffia  for  baskets,  rush  for  the  larger 
baskets  and  furniture,  rope  for  rugs,  tape  for  belts,  this  principle 
will  apply.  This  has  the  advantage  of  suiting  almost  all  domestic 
environment. 

In  one  schoolroom  for  blind  children  one  end  was  occupied 
with  cases  of  stuffed  animals  of  many  sorts.  The  stuffing  of 
cloth  animals  might  well  be  done,  provided  they  were  cut  out 
by  a  seeing  worker. 


WITHOUT    SIGHT  149 

Stitching  up  books  according  to  the  rules  given  in  the  chapter 
on  "The  Business  Man"  seems  to  come  within  the  range  of 
these  patients. 

A  large  order  business  in  the  making  and  making  over  of 
hair  mattresses  is  carried  on  by  blind  operatives.  While  this 
is  out  of  the  range  of  the  private  invalid,  its  principles  might 
easily  be  applied  in  the  making  of  comforters  or  pufifs  for  beds. 
The  device  used  to  insure  evenness  in  the  tufting  of  mattresses 
by  the  blind  is  a  wooden  frame  the  top  of  which  is  divided  into 
square  openings.  The  mattress  lies  on  this  frame.  One  tuft 
goes  in  the  center  of  each  square  hole.  A  frame  across  which 
strips  of  stout  tape  were  fastened  so  as  to  divide  it  into  squares 
could  be  used  in  tacking  the  puffs. 

In  many  instances  professional  work  can  still  be  followed. 
We  have  blind  teachers,  piano  tuners,  musicians  and  masseuses. 
One  who  has  learned  the  Braille  characters  can  make  a  great 
variety  of  books  of  fine  selections  for  the  blind.  Raised  books 
are  always  expensive,  but  these  can  be  easily  and  cheaply  made. 

The  recently  blind  are  apt  to  dwell  upon  the  loss  of  color 
which  they  experience,  but  who  having  seen  a  rose  can  ever 
forget  its  pink?  Who  having  looked  into  deep  summer  sky  can 
ever  escape  from  the  spell  of  its  blue?  Color  has  become  a 
thing  of  the  mind  rather  than  the  eye,  and  a  word  may  quicken 
it  anew,  for  it  has  in  it  a  true  immortality. 

Should  the  great  misfortune  of  loss  of  sight  overtake  a  man 
or  woman  of  active  and  ambitious  life,  the  occupation  suggested 
should,  if  possible,  be  in  some  way  connected  with  their  chosen 
work,  otherwise  it  may  seem  so  pitiably  small  as  to  be  actually 
repugnant.  This  has  been  inimitably  set  forth  by  one  who  said 
that  after  her  loss  of  sight  all  her  friends  had  set  her  down  to 
braiding  rag  rugs,  and  the  picture  of  herself  in  some  "Home" 
garbed  in  a  crushed  strawberry  forty-nine  cent  cotton  wrapper 
making  a  rag  rug  was  inexpressibly  distasteful  to  her.  There 
is,  however,  a  fairly  good  variety  of  lesser  talents  which  may  be 
developed,  only  let  them  stand  as  lesser  talents  and  do  not  pre- 


150  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

sume  to  replace  a  full,  active  life  work  with  a  rag  rug  or  any 
activity  other  than  the  best  of  which  the  patient  is  or  may  be 
capable. 

An  acknowledgment  is  due  to  the  following  institutions  for  their  great 
courtesy  in  explaining  methods  of  work  and  their  mutual  interest  in  the  subject 
of  this  chapter : 

The  School  for  Feeble-minded  Children  at  Waverley,  The  Perkins  Institution 
for  the  Blind  at  South  Boston  and  Jamaica  Plain,  The  Massachusetts  Commission 
for  the  Education  of  the  Blind  at  Cambridge. 


CHAPTER    XV 

THE    CLOUDED    MIND 
BY   E.    STANLEY   ABBOT,    M.D.^ 

The  term  occupation  is  here  used  in  its  broad  sense  of  any 
purposeful,  orderly  activity  of  mind  or  body.  Neither  can  be 
used  alone,  though  sometimes  one  will  greatly  predominate  over 
the  other.  In  polishing  a  floor  the  body  chiefly  is  active ;  in 
reading,  the  mind ;  but  neither  exclusively.  The  activities  may 
be  directed  to  work,  whether  constructive  (as  in  any  of  the 
handicrafts)  or  destructive  (as  in  making  certain  alterations 
and  repairs),  or  to  mere  pastimes  for  pleasure  and  enjoyment 
(such  as  games  of  all  sorts),  or  to  physical  culture  (such  as 
various  gymnastic  exercises  and  some  dances),  or  to  various 
combinations  of  these  objects. 

In  this  sense  the  occupation  of  persons  with  mental  deficiency 
or  perversion,  whether  developmental  or  acquired,  presents  its 
own  peculiar  difficulties,  which,  though  due  chiefly  to  the  mental 
condition  of  the  patient,  are  also  partly  due  to  certain  physical 
limitations.  One  has  to  deal  with  persons  who  have  a  lower 
grade  of  intelligence,  as  in  the  feeble-minded ;  or  whose  interest 
is  difficult  to  arouse  and  sustain,  as  among  certain  demented 
patients ;  or  whose  mental  processes  are  slow,  or  who  get  very 

1  To  the  Secretary  of  the  Chicago  School  of  Civics  and  Philanthropy,  which 
has  given  for  the  last  three  years  to  nurses  and  attendants  a  course  on  Occupa- 
tions for  the  Insane,  and  to  Drs.  Walter  E.  Femald,  William  Mabon,  R.  H. 
Hatchings,  Henry  A.  Cotton,  George  A.  Zeller,  Frank  P.  Norbury,  C.  H.  Ander- 
son, O.  C.  Willhite,  and  Fred  W.  Terflinger,  I  am  indebted  for  data  and  sug- 
gestions of  many  kinds,  and  I  wish  to  express  here  my  appreciation  of  their 
kindness.  But  to  Dr.  Mary  L.  Neff,  whose  paper  on  "Occupations  for  the 
Insane,"  read  before  the  American  Society  of  Superintendents  of  Training 
Schools  in  New  York  in  May,  1910,  was  a  valuable  contribution  to  the  subject, 
and  of  which  she  gave  me  free  use  before  its  publication,  I  am  especially 
indebted. 

«5i 


152  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

easily  fatigued,  or  to  whom  even  such  slight  tasks  as  buttoning 
a  coat  or  putting  on  shoes  seem  very  difficult,  or  whose  tenden- 
cies to  suicide  set  narrow  limits  to  possible  occupations,  as  among 
the  depressed.  Some  of  the  problems  which  the  nurse  must 
strive  to  solve  will  tax  her  ingenuity,  tact  and  patience  to  the 
utmost. 

No  one  questions  the  benefit  and  value  to  the  patient  of 
occupation.  What  Dr.  Fernald  says  of  the  feeble-minded  — 
"a  busy  boy  is  a  good  boy" — is  equally  applicable  to  persons 
of  all  ages  and  both  sexes,  provided  the  "business"  can  be  well 
adapted  to  the  individual.  The  problem  is  to  fit  the  occupation 
to  the  patient's  capacities  and  needs — to  find  what  he  can  best 
and  most  profitably  take  up;  to  find  adequate  motives;  to  stim- 
ulate interest,  and  to  keep  it  sustained.  It  is  easier  of  solution 
the  more  nearly  normal  the  patient ;  it  is  hardest  when  one  has 
to  deal  with  patients  who  have  lost  either  temporarily  or  per- 
manently the  power  of  continuous  application  or  attention,  or  the 
capacity  to  be  interested.  In  the  limits  of  one  chapter  only 
the  main  principles,  precautions  and  suggestions  necessary  for 
the  occupation  of  some  of  the  great  groups  of  the  insane  can 
be  outlined;  their  application  to  the  particular  person  must  be 
left  to  the  judgment,  skill  and  tact  of  the  nurse.  It  must  be 
remembered  that  at  best  there  is  a  large  percentage  of  patients 
who  cannot  be  occupied  at  all,  but  with  effort,  persistence,  in- 
genuity, patience,  moderate  expenditure  of  money  and  much 
of  time  this  percentage  can  be  greatly  reduced. 

Those  whose  minds  are  clouded  comprise  not  only  the  insane, 
properly  so  called,  but  also  the  feeble-minded  of  all  grades  and 
the  epileptic.  There  is  a  growing  tendency  to  bring  the  criminal 
also  into  this  group,  but  these  will  not  be  considered  here.  The 
other  two  groups  will  be  taken  up  briefly,  and  then  the  insane 
proper  at  somewhat  greater  length. 

The  Feeble-Minded.  These  are  children,  in  development 
if  not  in  years.  Their  age,  so  far  as  occupation  is  concerned,  is 
measured,  not  by  the  calendar,  but  by  their  interests,  intelligence 


THE   CLOUDED    MIND  153 

and  capacity  as  compared  with  the  various  grades  of  normal 
children.  They  are  all  characterized  by  slowness  to  learn,  re- 
quiring many  repetitions  of  the  same  lesson  before  it  is  learned ; 
by  shortness  and  uncertainty  of  memory,  requiring  more  fre- 
quent reviews  and  practice ;  by  lessened  persistence  and  power 
of  application  or  sustained  attention,  requiring  shorter  lessons 
and  more  frequent  changes  of  occupation;  by  diminished  judg- 
ment and  defective  power  to  draw  conclusions  or  to  reason  a 
thing  out,  requiring  simpler  and  more  explicit  directions,  and 
object  teaching  rather  than  didactic  instruction;  by  less  capacity 
to  be  interested  except  spontaneously,  requiring  special  effort  to 
stimulate  interest,  as  by  rewards,  competitions,  appeals  to  simple, 
elemental  desires ;  by  greater  vanity,  requiring  praise  and  com- 
mendation; by  a  tendency  to  slipshod,  careless  zvork,  requiring 
long-continued,  patient  drilling;  by  a  tendency,  especially  among 
the  less  highly  developed,  to  monotonous  mechanical  repetition 
of  acts,  which  can  sometimes  be  utilized  in  sawing  wood,  turn- 
ing a  grindstone,  polishing  floors,  ironing  and  other  simple  to- 
and-fro  occupations ;  and  physically  by  more  or  less  imperfect 
development,  with  poor  muscular  coordination,  requiring  physical 
drill,  training  and  oversight. 

Besides  ordinary  games,  both  indoor  and  outdoor,  such  as 
any  normal  child  or  youth  would  enjoy,  the  feeble-minded  can 
with  benefit  take  up  more  formal  occupations  under  instruction. 
These  vary  from  such  very  simple  things  as  stringing  spools  or 
large  beads,  sorting  blocks  of  two  or  three  colors,  picking  up 
bits  of  torn  paper,  etc.,  to  more  complex  activities,  such  as  lace 
making,  weaving,  basketry,  carpentry  and  Sloyd  work,  and  any 
of  the  simple  handicrafts.  Even  very  defective  persons  may 
sometimes  become  fairly  efficient  helpers  in  domestic  occupations 
and  the  trades,  such  as  kitchen,  dining  room  and  bedroom  work, 
nursery  work,  washing,  ironing,  sewing;  or  carpentry,  plumbing, 
painting,  boot  and  shoe  repairing,  mattress  making,  broom  mak- 
ing, furniture  repairing,  etc.  The  farm  and  garden,  with  their 
varied  needs,  furnish  work  adapted  to  quite  wide  variations  of 


154  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

intelligence.  All  work,  however,  must  be  under  guidance  and 
direction. 

The  feeble-minded  do  better  in  classes  than  in  purely  indi- 
vidual work,  though  even  in  classes  each  individual  needs  much 
careful  oversight.  Not  only  on  this  account  is  a  school  for  the 
backward,  deficient  or  feeble-minded  better  than  a  private  tutor 
in  the  home,  but  also  because  the  institution,  with  its  many  activi- 
ties, can  furnish  greater  variety  of  occupation  of  about  the  same 
degree  of  complexity  than  the  home  can  be  made  to  supply. 
And  it  is  a  great  advantage  to  have  as  large  a  variety  as  pos- 
sible of  such  occupations,  in  order  that  a  change  may  be  made 
from  one  to  another  before  interest  lags  or  the  work  grows 
monotonous.^ 

The  Epileptic.  Many  of  these  are  somewhat  backward 
mentally,  and  all  are  liable  to  sudden  convulsions  or  periods  of 
unconsciousness,  coming  usually  without  warning.  After  the 
attack  the  patient  is  often  sleepy  or  irritable  for  a  longer  or 
shorter  period   (from  ten  or  fifteen  minutes  to  several  hours). 

Epileptics  can  take  up  any  occupation  that  others  of  their 
own  age  or  mental  development  can,  except  that  they  should  not 
work  on  high  places  or  where  they  cannot  be  observed  by  some 
one  who  can  help  them  instantly  if  they  fall  into  machinery, 
water,  etc.  It  is  better  if  they  do  not  use  sharp-pointed  or 
sharp-cutting  instruments,  lest  they  injure  themselves  or  others 
during  or  following  the  seizure.  There  is  also  danger,  always 
possible  though  not  very  often  occurring,  that  after  the  convul- 
sion or  seizure  the  patient  may  make  a  violent,  unexpected  and 
unprovoked  attack  on  some  other  person. 

The  mode  of  onset  and  the  character  of  successive  seizures 
are  very  apt  to  be  about  the  same  in  any  one  patient,  though 
quite  different  in  different  patients,  so  that  occupations  highly 
inadvisable  for  one  might  be  allowable  to  another.     Any  occu- 

1  The  annual  reports  of  the  Massachusetts  School  for  the  Feeble-Minded,  at 
Waverley,  for  the  years  1908  and  1909  contain  very  informing  descriptions  of  the 
methods  in  use  there.  A  visit  to  the  school  itself  will  well  repay  the  time  and 
trouble  spent. 


THE    CLOUDED    MIND  155 

pation,  whether  work  or  play,  not  contraindicated  by  these  limi- 
tations is  suitable  for  the  epileptic,  except  that  too  great  emotional 
excitement,  as  in  a  closely  contested  game,  may  precipitate  an 
epileptic  seizure. 

The  Insane.  There  are  so  many  forms  of  mental  disease, 
and  so  many  manifestations  of  each  form,  that  in  a  chapter  of 
this  extent  only  the  crudest  generalizations  can  be  used  for 
grouping  cases.  In  all  patients  there  is  an  abeyance  of  some 
of  the  mental  powers  or  activities,  even  though  at  first  sight  it 
may  not  appear  so  (as  in  the  case  of  mildly  excited  patients  who 
often  superficially  seem  to  have  heightened  powers)  ;  and  in  many 
patients  there  is  a  permanent  loss  of  mental  activity  in  one  field 
or  another.  Here  they  will  be  grouped  roughly  into  those  whose 
most  obvious  characteristic  is  (i)  depression  of  spirits — sad- 
ness, despondency,  gloominess,  discouragement;  or  (2)  excessive 
activity,  perhaps  with  good  spirits,  perhaps  only  irritability — 
even  to  violence  and  destructiveness ;  and  (3)  dementia  —  a  per- 
manent loss  of  some  of  the  power  to  adapt  one's  self  to  the 
conditions  of  life. 

Before  taking  up  the  occupations  best  suited  to,  or  most 
feasible  for,  each  of  these  groups,  certain  elements  of  the  prob- 
lem, applicable  to  all  the  groups,  will  first  be  considered.  Some 
of  these  concern  the  individual,  others  his  circumstances  and 
surroundings. 

In  health,  persons  have  their  vocations  and  their  avocations. 
It  is  natural  that  we  should  seek  among  the  latter — among  those 
occupations  which  fill  the  leisure  moments,  the  pastimes  which 
spontaneously  interest — for  hints  as  to  what  the  patient  may 
take  up  when  the  mind  is  clouded.  These  avocations  will  be 
modified  or  determined  by  some  of  the  same  elements. 

One  of  these  elements  is  sex.  In  health,  when  not  actually 
engaged  at  their  vocations,  men,  when  in  the  house,  loaf,  lounge 
about,  smoke,  read  the  daily  paper,  while  women  keep  their 
hands  busy  at  knitting,  crocheting,  embroidery ;  men  go  out  to  the 
club,  theater  or  other  place  of  entertainment,  such  as  ball  games, 


156  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

billiard  and  pool  rooms,  or  even  the  bar,  while  women  tend  more 
to  sit  and  sew  or  read,  or  go  to  the  neighbor's  and  play  cards, 
drink  tea  and  chat.  When  men  do  occupy  themselves  with  work, 
it  is  more  apt  to  be  with  tools  —  hammer,  chisel,  saw,  rule,  spade, 
hoe  or  axe,  while  women  are  more  apt  to  take  up  lighter,  more 
aesthetic  and  decorative  tasks.  These  differences  hold  to  a  large 
extent  when  the  mind  is  clouded.  They  are  indicated  in  Chapters 
XII  and  XIII. 

Another  element  is  age.  Young  persons  like  more  active 
pursuits  than  the  middle-aged  or  elderly.  Youth  plays  tennis, 
baseball,  basket  ball ;  runs,  skips  and  dances,  while  middle  age 
walks,  plays  golf  or  games  of  cards,  checkers  and  chess,  and 
old  age  sits  and  smokes,  knits,  chats  and  dozes. 

The  degree  of  intelligence,  amount  of  education,  the  natural 
interests  and  the  occupation  when  well  are  still  other  elements, 
and  will  have  their  influence  in  helping  devise  occupations,  or 
setting  limitations  to  them.  The  professor  or  the  clergyman 
will  differ  in  these  respects  from  the  carpenter,  the  day  laborer 
or  the  office  clerk. 

There  are  environmental  elements,  as  well  as  the  personal 
ones  just  mentioned,  which  will  partly  determine  the  occupations 
of  mental  patients.  Among  these  are  the  size  of  the  patient's 
income.  Materials  or  facilities  easily  obtainable  by  the  patient 
of  large  means,  such  as  automobiles,  yachts  or  even  lathes  or 
woodworking  implements  or  rug  or  carpet  weaving  looms,  would 
be  out  of  the  question  for  the  person  of  moderate  means, 
and  quite  impossible  for  the  poor  in  their  own  homes.  Besides, 
the  size  of  the  income  often  sets  standards  for  normal  occu- 
pations in  many  other  ways  as  well. 

Different  activities  are  open  to  the  patient  who  is  in  the 
country,  where  farming  and  gardening  operations  are  going  on, 
from  those  available  in  the  city,  where  occupations  outside  the 
house  must  be  more  artificial  and  are  less  in  variety  and  number, 
and  less  well  adapted  to  the  mentally  beclouded.  For  they  make 
more  demands  on  the  mental  and  less  on  the  physical  energies, 


THE   CLOUDED    MIND  157 

whereas  it  is  usually  most  helpful  to  rest  the  former  and  exercise 
the  latter. 

Large  institutions  like  the  state  hospitals,  with  a  daily  average 
population  ranging  from  one  to  five  thousand  patients,  have 
certain  advantages  which  the  smaller  ones  lack.  Among  so  large 
a  number  a  larger  or  smaller  group  of  patients  can  be  got  to- 
gether whose  interests  and  capacities  are  enough  alike  to  form 
classes,  in  which  all  learn  to  do  the  same  thing,  such  as  leather 
work,  at  the  same  time.  In  the  smaller  hospitals,  if  enough 
patients  cannot  be  got  together  for  class  work  in  the  same  occu- 
pation, group  work,  in  which  several  patients  work  at  different 
things  simultaneously  in  the  same  room,  is  possible.  The  advan- 
tages of  class  or  group  work  lie  in  the  stimulation  of  interest 
(one  of  the  difficult  problems  to  solve)  through  imitation  of 
others  or  seeing  others  work;  companionship  with  others  in  one 
common  aim,  as  in  the  sewing  room ;  cooperation  with  others  in 
the  making  of  one  finished  product,  as  in  dressing  dolls ;  com- 
petition and  rivalry  with  others,  to  see  who  shall  make  the  most, 
or  the  best,  or  the  most  artistic  thing;  and  conference  or  dis- 
cussion with  others,  serving  to  bring  out  new  ideas. 

Another  advantage  of  the  large  institution  is  that  there  is 
a  large  variety  and  considerable  amount  of  work  useful  and 
necessary  to  its  maintenance  and  running,  in  much  of  which  the 
patients  can  take  part.  And  again,  the  installation  of  special 
apparatus,  like  looms,  is  more  economical,  and  beneficial  to  more 
persons,  in  the  large  than  in  the  small  hospital.  On  the  other 
hand,  it  is  often  possible  to  give  much  more  time  and  individual 
effort  to  a  single  patient  in  a  small  hospital  or  sanitarium,  and 
certainly  it  is  in  the  home.  The  small  private  hospital  is  not 
much  different  from  the  patient's  own  home,  in  the  facilities 
usually  afforded  by  special  apparatus. 

So  much  for  the  patient  and  his  environment.  Another  large 
element  in  the  problem  of  occupation  is  to  find  a  sufficient 
motive.  It  is  easier  to  find  something  that  the  patient  can  do 
than  to  find  something  he  zvill  do.     One  needs  to  be  resourceful, 


158  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

with  a  large  variety  of  appeals,  for  it  goes  without  saying  that 
even  in  health  what  appeals  to  one  person  will  not  to  another. 
The  difference  is  even  more  marked  among  the  insane.  Appeals 
may  be  made  through  praise,  competition,  rewards;  to  the  sense 
of  the  beautiful  or  of  the  useful ;  through  affection  for  relatives, 
home  needs,  gifts  to  friends,  or  more  diffuse  altruism,  as  help- 
ing other  patients,  making  preparations  for  special  entertain- 
ments, such  as  Christmas  gifts  and  decorations,  work  for  chil- 
dren, especially  orphans,  or  for  cripples,  the  blind,  the  poor 
and  needy;  or  for  persons  in  specially  isolated  or  exposed  posi- 
tions, such  as  lighthouse  and  lightship  keepers ;  or  for  sailors' 
missions,  Dr.  Grenfell's,  and  other  foreign  and  home  missions, 
prisoners,  invalids,  other  patients ;  or  through  imitation,  or  by 
seeing  others  work. 

As  examples,  many  patients  became  interested  in  making 
clothes  for  a  near-by  orphan  asylum — the  interest  was  enhanced 
by  the  children  visiting  the  wards  afterwards  wearing  the  things 
that  had  been  made.  One  elderly  woman,  nearly  eighty,  with 
cataract  of  both  eyes  so  that  she  could  no  longer  read,  knitted 
helmet  toques  for  the  men  stationed  on  a  lightship  not  far  from 
her  home  town.  Another  woman,  in  bed  a  large  part  of  the 
time,  over  seventy  years  of  age,  makes  many  scrapbooks  for 
missions.  Some  men  mend  broken  golf  sticks,  make  frames 
for  pictures  to  hang  in  their  rooms  or  in  the  ward,  cut  picture 
puzzles  for  themselves  or  others  to  put  together.  These  are  but 
a  few  of  the  many  things  that  can  be  done  for  others.  The 
most  lasting  incentive  is  usually  an  altruistic  one,  and  hence 
"the  personal  note  should  be  used  repeatedly,"^  that  is,  the 
patient  asked  to  do  this  particular  thing  for  this  particular 
person.  But  other  motives  may  be  sought  in  the  patient's  daily 
work  when  well,  or  among  the  things  he  does  for  recreation  and 
pleasure. 

As  for  the  occupation  itself,  if  one  is  trying  to  interest  the 
patient  in  constructive  work,  it  should  be  if  possible  "interest- 

1  Unpublished  paper  of  Dr.  Mary  L.  Neff. 


THE    CLOUDED    MIND  159 

ing,  more  or  less  familiar,  easily  clone,  soon  finished  and  of 
obvious  use,"  ^  and  "the  product  should  have  color  and  form  to 
give  aesthetic  value,  and  should  not  require  very  fine  muscular 
coordination"^  in  the  making,  especially  for  those  who  are  just 
beginning  to  be  occupied  with  work. 

In  trying  to  occupy  patients,  "the  most  desirable  plan  is  to 
have  occupation  an  integral  part  of  the  daily  life,"  '  and  hence 
*'a  regular  schedule  of  occupations  which  accounts  properly  for 
every  hour  of  the  patient's  time"^  is  advisable.  The  occupa- 
tions should  be  varied,  not  too  long  a  time  devoted  to  any  one, 
and  work  should  be  interrupted  by  pastimes,  for  recreation, 
relaxation  and  variety.  Above  all,  "the  signs  of  fatigue  should 
be  looked  for  with  great  care,"  ^  especially  among  depressed 
patients.  These  may  be  the  ordinary  symptoms  of  wandering 
attention,  feeling  of  fatigue,  headache,  flushing  of  face,  feeling 
of  confusion,  carelessness  or  diminished  accuracy  of  work;  or 
other  less  readily  recognized  ones,  as  greater  speed,  quick,  nervous 
movements  in  doing  the  work,  restlessness,  impatience,  hilarity, 
talkativeness,  less  good  judgment  about  the  work,  greater  care- 
lessness and  even  a  tendency  to  keep  at  it  till  it  is  finished. 

Having  considered  these  general  elements  of  the  problem, 
we  come  now  to  the  special  occupation  of  the  first  group  of 
patients. 

I.  The  Depressed.  A  patient  with  depression  is  to  be 
considered,  first  of  all,  as  possibly  or  actually  suicidal — a  point 
never  to  be  forgotten  or  let  out  of  the  mind  of  the  nurse  for 
an  instant,  though  her  understanding  of  the  fact  is  to  be  as 
skillfully  and  tactfully  hidden  as  the  necessity  for  watching  the 
patient  will  allow.  Hence  sharp-pointed  or  sharp-edged  instru- 
ments, such  as  steel  knitting  or  crochet  needles,  embroidery  or 
other  sharp-pointed  scissors,  penknives,  sometimes  even  needles 
and  pins,  steel  nail  cleaners,  to  say  nothing  of  wood  carving  and 
other  cutting  tools,  must  either  be  kept  away  from  these  patients, 
or  the  patient  kept  under  close   and   unremitting  observation 

1  Dr.  Neff,  loc.  cit. 


i6o  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

during  work,  and  the  instruments  all  counted  and  put  away 
under  lock  and  key  as  soon  as  the  patient  has  finished  with  them 
for  the  time  being.  Large  wooden  or  celluloid  knitting  or  crochet 
needles  and  blunt-ended  scissors  may  be  used  more  safely. 

Most  depressed  patients  are  easily  fatigued,  mentally  espe- 
cially, but  also  physically,  even  though  they  say  they  cannot 
feel  tired,  wish  they  could,  and  are  constantly  walking  rest- 
lessly up  and  down,  apparently  never  tired.  Hence  the  more 
restless  ones  should  be  tried  only  with  coarse  work,  easily  done, 
and  not  kept  too  long  at  it.  It  sometimes  makes  a  difference 
to  the  patient  whether  the  work  is  light  or  heavy  in  weight,  and 
what  is  light  to  the  nurse  may  seem  to  be  heavy  for  the  patient. 
The  nurse  should  never  make  the  mistake  of  measuring  the 
difficult  or  fatiguing  qualities  of  the  work  to  the  patient  by 
what  is  difficult  or  fatiguing  to  herself  or  to  the  average  well 
person.  A  sort  of  nervous  haste,  in  which  the  patient  does  faster 
work  and  doesn't  complain  of  being  tired,  is  one  index  of  over- 
tire.  Work  should  be  done  leisurely  and  with  relaxation.  Tell 
your  patient:  "Don't  work  in  a  hurry.  Take  all  the  time  you 
want.  Don't  feel  as  though  you  must  do  a  certain  amount  in 
a  given  time.  You  have  all  the  time  there  is  for  doing  it.  Don't 
make  a  task  of  it.    Don't  drive  yourself." 

As  depressed  patients  are  emerging  from  such  depths  of 
depression  or  agitation  that  they  cannot  be  occupied,  a  beginning 
can  be  made  by  the  nurse  dressing  a  doll  for  a  child,  or  doing 
some  rather  easy  embroidery  for  a  friend  or  relative,  or  making 
an  apron  for  herself,  that  may  catch  and  hold  the  patient's  atten- 
tion and  interest  for  a  short  time.  It  may  start  the  patient  to 
helping  a  little  by  holding  the  work,  winding  yarn,  suggesting 
a  pattern,  basting  or  the  like — all  simple,  easy  things  requiring 
little  thought  or  holding  of  the  attention  or  careful  coordination. 
Pictures  in  a  magazine,  like  the  London  Illustrated  News,  can 
be  looked  at  for  a  few  moments  and  commented  on.  Simple 
one-pack  games  of  solitaire  in  which  no  combinations  or  calcu- 
lations have  to  be  made  can  be  tried ;  then  come  coarse  crochet- 


THE    CLOUDED    MIND  i6i 

ing  or  knitting  with  large  needles,  work  that  does  not  try  the  eyes 
or  require  much  planning.  The  easier  forms  of  reed  and  raffia 
basket  work,  with  plain  weave  and  design  and  one  or  two  colors 
in  bands,  may  next  or  at  this  time  be  tried.  Soon  the  patient 
can  try  water  color  painting,  at  first  copying  simple  things,  then 
from  nature. 

As  the  patient  becomes  capable  of  longer  continued  attention 
and  occupation,  increasingly  complicated  and  finer  work  and 
games  may  be  taken  up,  for  which  the  previous  chapters  give 
many  useful  suggestions.  One  point  that  the  nurse  should  never 
forget  is  that  splendid  physical  appearance — good  color,  firm 
flesh,  normal  or  above  normal  weight,  good  appetite — is  quite 
compatible  with  great  mental  and  physical  fatigability.  Planning 
work,  deciding  on  colors  or  patterns,  or  work  in  classes  where 
there  are  many  persons  may  be  very  difficult  for  a  patient  who 
may  look  the  picture  of  health.  Grave  injustice  is  sometimes 
done  to  such  patients,  with  delay  of  recovery,  by  the  nurse  or 
friend  not  recognizing  this  fact. 

With  many,  thinking  is  difficult  and  actions  are  slow;  so 
directions  must  be  clear  and  plain,  simple,  slowly  given  and 
sometimes  often  repeated,  and  the  patient  must  not  be  hurried 
or  put  in  competition  with  others  who  can  work  faster.  Indi- 
vidual work  is  better,  as  they  get  easily  discouraged,  though  they 
may  look  on  at  class  work  and  be  encouraged,  though  not  urged, 
to  try  some  simple  thing. 

Occupations  for  the  more  depressed  men  are  more  difficult 
to  devise,  because  men  when  idle  turn  less  to  hand  work  than 
women  normally — they  smoke,  read,  talk,  but  loaf.  Domestic 
and  altruistic  constructive  work  is  less  their  habitual  occupation. 
Pastimes  rather  than  constructive  work  have  to  be  relied  on.  On 
emerging  from  the  deeper  depressions  they  may  take  up  polish- 
ing a  floor,  dusting  a  wall,  shoveling  snow  or  tossing  a  baseball, 
football  or  medicine  ball,  or  looking  on  while  others  play  games. 
Then  comes  participation  in  games :  pool  is  an  excellent  starter, 
but  the  balls  and  cue  must  be  on  the  table,  inviting  the  patient — 


i62  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

checkers  and  backgammon  are  among  the  early  games,  with  per- 
haps simple  games  of  solitaire.  Men  are  less  easily  troubled  by 
the  confusion  of  many  around  them,  so  class  work  in  gymnasium 
exercises  can  often  be  taken  up  rather  early.  Glancing  at  the 
daily  papers  can  be  encouraged  rather  early  also.  For  younger 
men,  batting  and  catching  ball,  quoits,  later  billiards,  golf,  tennis 
and  bowling.  For  elderly  men,  walks,  drives,  reading,  cards — 
euchre,  whist,  bridge — and  for  all,  the  newspaper,  illustrated 
magazines,  books.  For  both  men  and  women,  drives  and  trolley 
rides  should  be  first  in  the  less  frequented  and  populous  districts, 
to  keep  them  out  of  bustle,  stir  and  noise.  Their  minds  are 
tired,  and  they  should  not  be  expected  or  urged  to  do  much 
with  them. 

2.  The  Excited.  Patients  of  this  class  belong  either  to  a 
usually  recoverable  group,  or  to  a  group  that  dements  and  be- 
longs partly  or  wholly  in  the  next  class.  Reserving  the  next 
section  for  the  quiet  dements,  I  will  speak  of  the  disturbed  cases 
of  the  dementing  group  together  with  the  recoverable  excited 
cases. 

The  recoverable  cases  usually  show  some  differences  from 
the  others,  in  that  they  are  freer  and  more  varied  in  their  activity 
and  are  more  distractible.  They  have  great  "pressure  of  activ- 
ity" and  cannot  keep  still  long.  Rough,  crude  work  requiring 
expenditure  of  considerable  energy,  and  in  which  the  result  is 
soon  apparent,  is  the  best  for  them.  They  are  incapable  of  fine 
or  finicky  work,  but  can  take  up  such  work  as  quarrying,^  road 
building,  clearing  ground  of  timber,  doing  concrete  work.  A 
state  hospital  in  Missouri  has  "transformed  the  men's  violent 
ward  ...  to  the  most  quiet  ward  in  the  hospital"  ^  by  such  work, 
and  the  superintendent  regrets  that  he  cannot  supply  similar 
occupation  for  the  women's  violent  ward.  Dr.  Cotton  (New 
Jersey  State  Hospital,  Trenton,  New  Jersey)  writes  privately 
that  since  1907  ninety  patients  have  been  taken  from  restraint, 

1  Rep.  Direct,  of  Poor  of  Chester  Co.,  Embreeville,  Pa.,  1908,  p.  13. 

2  Rep.  State  Hosp.  No.  3,  Nevada,  Mo.,  1907-08,  p.  16. 


THE   CLOUDED   MIND  163 

and  sixty  of  these,  who  were  "considered  destructive  and  violent, 
are  today  doing  very  good  work  on  the  wards,"  such  as  "sew- 
ing, mending,  embroidery,  helping  in  the  dining  rooms,  assisting 
other  patients  to  dress,"  etc.  Farm  and  garden  work,  clearing 
and  keeping  up  of  grounds,  building  of  recreation  and  industrial 
buildings,  and  outdoor  games,  such  as  pitching  baseball,  kicking 
football,  throwing  medicine  ball,  and  in  general  occupations  with 
a  good  deal  of  bodily  activity  and  comparatively  little  head  work, 
can  be  indulged  in  by  even  pretty  excited  and  excitable  patients. 

Even  patients  who  are  constantly  tearing  clothing  and  have 
to  be  kept  in  seclusion  because  they  will  not  keep  any  clothing 
on  can  have  their  destructive  tendencies  turned  toward  tear- 
ing up  newspapers,  illustrated  magazines  and  old  rags  that  are 
otherwise  useless ;  and  sometimes  they  will  play  for  a  time  with 
a  rag  doll.  The  graphophone  will  entertain  or  amuse  them  often, 
and  keep  them  from  destructive  activity.  Like  the  feeble-minded, 
their  attention  soon  lags,  and  no  one  thing  should  be  tried  for 
long  at  a  time. 

Some,  the  milder  cases,  are  very  fertile  in  designs  for  mis- 
chief, and  the  task  of  diverting  their  activities  into  harmless 
channels  and  diminishing  their  activity  are  the  chief  problems. 
They  seem  supernaturally  keen  at  first  glance,  but  their  judgment 
is  diminished,  both  as  to  the  fitness  of  things  and  as  to  the 
relations  of  mine  and  thine,  especially  thine.  They  are  usually 
incapable  of  fine  work,  such  as  fine  embroidery,  and  their  efiforts 
at  decoration  are  often  crude  and  lurid.  Nevertheless  it  is  better 
that  they  should  paint  water  colors  on  paper  even  if  they  splash 
themselves,  their  clothes  and  the  table  covers  with  paint  in  their 
efforts  to  make  portraits  or  landscapes,  or  that  they  should  cro- 
chet, knit  or  embroider  useless  and  impossible  things  with  the 
most  outrageous  color  combinations,  with  the  idea  that  they  are 
doing  something  useful  or  beautiful,  than  to  exercise  their  inde- 
fatigable energies  on  destructive  mischief,  or  grow  irritable  for 
lack  of  occupation. 

3.    The  Demented.    These  are  the  patients  that  make  up 


1 64  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

the  larger  part  of  the  population  of  our  hospitals  for  the 
insane,  and  among  whom  is  found  a  large  percentage  of  unoccu- 
pied persons.  They  have  permanently  lost  more  or  less  of  their 
capacity  to  adapt  themselves  normally  to  the  ordinary  condi- 
tions of  life,  either  as  the  result  of  gradually  failing  powers, 
as  in  senile  and  paralytic  patients,  or  by  reason  of  delusions 
whereby  in  some  respects  they  quite  misunderstand  their  en- 
vironment, or  by  reason  of  an  apparent  apathy  and  indifference 
or  both. 

Those  whose  mental  powers  are  failing  are  also  usually  fail- 
ing more  or  less  in  physical  strength  or  endurance,  so  their 
tasks  must  be  light  and  not  long  continued  at  a  time.  For  a 
while  some  of  them  may  be  occupied  with  such  things  as  they 
learned  in  their  younger  days,  as  knitting  or  crocheting,  but 
their  memory  for  recent  things  is  poor  and  their  power  to  take 
in  and  retain  new  ideas  is  diminished,  so  they  cannot  be  taught 
new  things.  Chapters  XI  and  XIII  give  excellent  suggestions 
for  occupations  that  may  be  tried  for  a  time,  but  it  is  to  be 
expected  that  the  time  will  come  when  no  efficient  or  sensible 
work  can  be  done,  though  the  hands  may  still  fumble  with 
crochet  or  knitting  needles. 

By  far  the  larger  portion  of  this  group,  however,  is  made 
up  of  patients  who  have  had  a  more  or  less  acute  attack  of 
mental  trouble  in  the  years  before  thirty  or  thirty-five,  and  are 
left  permanently  damaged,  usually  with  little  or  no  initiative, 
and  niany  of  whom  sit  all  day  in  silent,  idle  rows  on  the  wards, 
gazing  for  hours  at  the  floor  or  walls,  only  getting  up  to  go  to 
meals,  to  bed  or  for  a  short  walk.  Spontaneously  they  do  noth- 
ing, and  they  often  seem  incapable  of  being  interested  in  any- 
thing. Some  walk  monotonously  back  and  forth,  but  seem 
utterly  indifferent  to  those  about  them,  and  are  as  idle  as  those 
who  sit.     The  problem  is  to  arouse  and  sustain  their  interest. 

It  is  these  patients,  forming  a  numerically  large  class,  that 
special  eflForts  have  recently  been  made  to  occupy  or  re-educate. 
In  a  personal  letter  Dr.  Hutchings  writes,  "The  presence  of  a 


THE   CLOUDED    MIND  165 

profound  degree  of  deterioration,  even  of  long  standing,  .  .  . 
does  not  in  my  judgment  preclude  the  possibility  of  considerable 
improvement."  To  show  what  may  be  accomplished  by  per- 
sistent, intelligent,  painstaking  and  sympathetic  effort,  two  cases 
will  be  cited. 

A  man  of  twenty-seven,  in  Sauk  County  Asylum  in 
Wisconsin,  insane  four  years,  who  usually  sat  quietly  in  one 
position  with  eyes  closed,  taking  no  interest  in  his  surround- 
ings, never  making  any  effort  to  move  about  or  associate  with 
others,  never  answering  questions  addressed  to  him,  at  times 
irritable,  at  times  laughing  to  himself,  sometimes  tearing  his 
clothes  and  attacking  those  near  him  and  very  neglectful  of 
his  personal  appearance,  was  taught  to  do  pierced  brass  work 
and  make  raffia  baskets,  with  marked  improvement  in  appearance 
and  behavior.^ 

A  woman  of  twenty-three,  in  St.  Lawrence  State  Hospital, 
New  York,  insane  for  three  and  one-half  years,  who,  after 
some  months  of  destructiveness,  grew  dull,  stupid,  untidy  and 
careless  in  habits,  drooled  constantly,  did  not  speak  or  look 
about  her  and  rarely  moved  unless  required  to  do  so,  and 
whose  hands  were  stiff,  blue  and  cold,  first  had  for  three  days 
passive  movements  of  fingers  and  arms,  and  was  then  given 
a  pair  of  scissors  and  urged  to  cut  a  picture  out  of  a  paper. 
Several  days  were  required  before  she  could  do  this  without 
having  her  hands  held  and  guided.  At  the  end  of  two  weeks 
she  could  string  beads  and  catch  a  bean  bag.  A  week  later 
she  was  modeling  in  clay.  At  the  end  of  a  month  from  the 
beginning  she  had  ceased  to  drool,  sat  up  straighter,  liked  to 
be  dressed  better,  talked  voluntarily,  worked  on  raffia  baskets 
and  had  begun  to  draw.  Later  she  had  become  quite  industri- 
ous and  had  learned  to  sing.  She  had  become  interested  in 
her  progress.- 

It  is  true  these  are  exceptional  cases,  but  they  occur  often 

1  Reported  in  prospectus  of  the  Chicago  School  of  Civics  and  Philanthropy. 
^  Annual  Report,  St.  Lawrence  State  Hospital,  N.  Y.,  for  1909,  p.  30. 


i66  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

enough  to  make  effort  well  worth  trying  even  in  the  most 
unpromising  cases.  Of  the  previously  unoccupied  and  appar- 
ently unoccupiable  group,  about  400  out  of  an  average  hospi- 
tal population  of  about  2,200  at  Peoria,  Illinois,^  200  to  225 
out  of  an  average  population  of  about  5,000  at  Manhattan 
State  Hospital,  New  York,^  60  out  of  90  women  previously  in 
restraint  night  and  day  at  Trenton,  New  Jersey,^  about  100  out 
of  an  average  population  of  about  3,500  at  Dunning,  Illinois,* 
about  twenty  per  cent  of  those  previously  unoccupied  at  Menard, 
Illinois,'^  about  50  out  of  an  average  population  of  950  at 
Logansport,  Indiana,"  have  been  occupied,  the  numbers  depend- 
ing partly  on  the  number  of  teachers,  partly  on  the  things 
taught  and  partly  on  the  persistence  of  effort  of  medical  and 
nursing  staff. 

Occupations  for  these  patients  include  not  only  work  of 
many  kinds,  but  also  recreations  or  play.  For  example,  at  the 
Manhattan  State  Hospital,  New  York,  folk  dancing  is  taught  and 
learned  by  more  or  less  demented  patients,  with  much  increase 
of  enjoyment,  to  themselves  and  those  who  look  on.  Drills, 
marches  and  contradances,  simple  athletic  games,  like  bean  bags 
and  medicine  ball,  even  very  demented  patients  can  be  taught. 
Such  recreations  may  well  be  sandwiched  in  between  more  sed- 
entary pursuits,  such  as  sewing,  weaving,  basket  making,  cane 
seating,  broom  making,  etc. 

To  teach  a  large  proportion  of  patients  of  this  kind  often 
requires  a  great  deal  of  time  and  patient,  sympathetic  work  de- 
voted to  one  individual  patient.  In  a  hospital,  special  instructors 
in  different  branches  of  occupation  are  sometimes  employed,  such 
as  kindergarten,  Sloyd,  singing,  dancing  and  general  handicraft 
teachers.     But  it  is  the  nurse  on  the  ward  where  the  patients 

1  Dr.  George  A.  Zeller,  personal  letter. 

2  Dr.  William  Mabon,  personal  letter. 

8  Dr.  Henry  A.  Cotton,  personal  letter. 

4  Dr.  O.  C.  Willhite,  personal  letter.     Cok  C.  Int.,  II. 

^Dr.  C.  H.  Anderson,  personal  letter. 

®Dr.  F.  W.  Terflinger,  personal  letter. 


THE    CLOUDED    MIND  167 

live  who  has  the  best  opportunity  to  interest  them.  The  more 
she  knows  of  various  handicrafts  and  the  more  resourceful  she 
is,  the  more  of  the  demented  patients  can  be  occupied.  She  is 
the  one  who  sees  most  of  them,  and  perhaps  knows  their  per- 
sonahties  best,  and  she  is  in  daily,  hourly  contact  with  them. 
She  therefore  has  the  best  chance  to  find  what  special  thing  can 
make  an  appeal  to  the  individual  patient.  She  should,  however, 
get  the  previous  sanction  of  the  physician  to  any  given  plan  she 
may  have,  on  account  of  special  dangers  and  precautions  that 
may  have  to  be  considered. 

In  the  hope  that  it  may  prove  suggestive  to  those  who  may 
have  the  care  of  demented  patients,  either  in  hospital  or  private 
practice,  a  list  is  added  of  occupations,  both  work  and  play, 
which  have  actually  been  taken  up  and  pursued  by  patients  pre- 
viously thought  to  be  incapable  of  being  occupied.  It  is  not 
complete,  but  contains  several  examples  of  different  types  of 
occupation  for  both  men  and  women,  outside  of  the  routine 
domestic,  farm  and  garden  work  of  the  hospital.  Although  the 
occupations  are  grouped  under  those  for  men  and  those  for 
women,  there  are  many  which  can  be  taken  up  by  either.  Some 
require  no  apparatus,  some  a  little  inexpensive  apparatus ;  for 
some  considerable  outlay  is  needed.  Some  require  the  coopera- 
tion of  several  persons,  others  not.  It  would  take  many  chapters 
to  describe  these  occupations  and  their  application  to  individual 
patients,  so  that  will  not  be  attempted  here,  but  must  be  left  to 
the  ingenuity  of  the  nurse  or  caretaker. 

HANDICRAFTS 

Men 

Drawing :  pen  and  ink,  pencil,  crayon ;  copying  sketches ; 
illuminating. 

Punched  brass  work. 

Printing. 

Bookbinding ;  making  albums. 


i68  INVALID    OCCUPATION 

Sloyd;  carpentry;  cabinet  making;  wood  carving  (making 
pen  trays,  paper  knives,  paper  weights,  blotter  pads,  whist  count- 
ers, cribbage  boards,  picture  frames,  card,  glove  and  handker- 
chief boxes,  bookracks,  wall  brackets  and  cabinets,  footstools, 
plant  stands,  bellows)  ;  furniture  repairing. 

Cane  seating  chairs,  brush  and  broom  making;  coir  mat 
making;  mattress  and  pillow  making. 

Breaking  stone;  road  building,  ditching,  grading;  making 
cement  blocks ;  clearing  wild  land. 

Women 

Water  color  and  oil  painting;  china  painting;  stencil  work; 
drawing. 

Beadwork,  chains,  purses,  bags. 

Cutting  out  and  pasting  pictures. 

Passe-partouting. 

Clay  modeling ;  leather  work ;  hammered  brass  work. 

Reed  and  raffia,  and  other  forms  of  basketry. 

Hand  and  machine  sewing ;  embroidery  of  various  kinds ; 
Mexican  drawn  work  ;  crocheting ;  knitting ;  tatting ;  quilting ; 
lace  making. 

Weaving  cloth,  rugs,  carpets ;  tearing,  sewing  and  coloring 
carpet  rags ;  making  hammocks ;  netting. 

Making  mattresses,  pillows,  mats. 

Making  bandages. 

GAMES    AND   EXERCISES 

Men 

Cards :  solitaire,  single  and  double  pack ;  whist,  bridge,  euchre, 
poker,  etc. ;  checkers,  chess,  backgammon,  parchesi,  dominoes. 
Billiards,  pool,  bowling. 
Quoits,  shuffle  board. 


THE   CLOUDED    MIND  169 

Tennis,  golf,  baseball,  hand  ball,  basket  ball. 

Skating,  coasting,  snowshoeing,  skiing,  curling,  kite  flying. 

Women 

Piano  and  other  musical  instruments ;  singing. 

Bean  bags,  ping-pong,  medicine  ball,  battledore  and  shuttle 
cock,  ring  toss,  croquet,  bagatelle. 

Picture  puzzles. 

Swing. 

Calisthenics  with  and  without  apparatus ;  marching  drills ; 
square,  contra  and  round  dances ;  folk  dances. 


CONCLUSION 

In  all  the  varieties  of  invalidism  suggested  in  the  preceding 
chapters,  the  holding  of  the  mind  to  a  normal  pursuit  is  favor- 
able to  improvement  or  even  recovery.  Being  convinced  of  this 
fact,  the  physician  may  prescribe  occupation  in  a  somewhat 
general  sense,  indicating  only  by  larger  classification,  as  indeed 
he  might  prescribe  in  the  diet  more  protein  and  less  carbohy- 
drate ;  the  decision  as  to  whether  it  shall  mean  a  dropped  egg 
or  a  bit  of  beefsteak,  less  potato  or  less  toasted  bread,  falls  more 
naturally  to  the  province  of  the  nurse. 

Certain  activities  act  as  sedatives  to  some  subjects.  Knitting 
has  been  so  classified  by  some  invalids,  and  may  therefore  stand 
as  a  remedy  for  over-irritability.  Many  forms  of  depression 
are  dissipated  to  a  degree  by  the  sense  of  satisfaction  experi- 
enced in  a  piece  of  completed  work  or  the  consciousness  of  newly 
acquired  skill.  Many  strong  emotions  fatigue,  but  mirth  is  a 
safety  valve  and  does  not  exhaust,  and  no  end  of  merriment 
may  result  from  the  early  blunders  of  an  invalid  student.  One 
old  man  was  induced  to  try  to  stuff  birds.  He  got  as  far  as 
one  bluejay,  which  presented  a  most  distorted  and  melancholy 
appearance.  Despite  all  this  the  old  man  never  failed  to  point 
with  genuine  pleasure  at  the  bird  and,  rubbing  his  hands,  would 
exclaim,  "Well,  well,  if  there  isn't  my  thundering  old  bluejay!" 

Very  young  children  often  construct  a  thing  which  seems  to 
lack  both  shape  and  meaning  to  an  older  mind.  The  child  names 
this  thing  some  fanciful  but,  to  him,  significant  name  and  plays 
with  it  for  a  long  time.  One  child  kept  such  a  toy  consisting 
simply  of  a  roll  of  bits  of  chamois  skin  found  in  his  mother's 
workbasket.  This  he  named  "The  Disagreeable,"  and  played 
with  it  for  months. 

No  nurse  is  a  good  nurse  who  does  not  take  good  care  of 

170 


CONCLUSION  171 

her  patients'  thoughts,  and,  in  order  to  do  this,  she  will  need 
the  assistance  of  substantial  material.  For  a  considerable  period 
of  time  training  schools  for  nurses  have  taught  rigorously  the 
care  of  the  body.  Not  too  well  has  this  been  learned,  but  far 
too  exclusively.  The  complaint  of  the  general  public  in  regard 
to  trained  nurses  is  not  so  much  of  a  lack  of  knowledge  of  bath- 
ing, feeding,  administering  drugs  and  dressing  wounds,  but  of 
the  dearth  of  companionable  qualities  and  mutual  interests.  A 
great  multitude  of  invalids  are  clean,  fed,  dosed,  dressed  and 
miserable.  These  things  all  degenerate  into  mere  routine  duties 
while  the  real  patient  waits  for  true  aid. 

All  victims  of  disease,  either  acute  or  chronic,  suffer  from 
a  sense  of  a  loss  of  time.  They  feel  that  they  have  been  inter- 
rupted in  their  work.  Even  the  child,  whose  work  is  play,  feels 
this.  Some  accept  this  philosophically,  others  chafe  constantly, 
still  others  are  deeply  depressed,  while  a  fourth  and,  perhaps, 
most  pitiable  class  seem  to  take  a  certain  pride  in  their  disability. 
All  these  mental  attitudes  aggravate  existing  conditions  and 
retard  recovery.  The  physician  is  conscious  that  his  treatment 
is  not  fully  effective  because  of  the  pulling  down  by  various 
worries.  Even  the  philosophic  mind  may  result  in  too  full  an 
acceptance  of  conditions,  and  thus  prove  a  veritable  drag  weight. 

The  problem  of  the  nurse  consists  in  minimizing  these  periods 
of  complete  disability  and  unproductiveness.  She  has  to  prove 
by  actual  test  that  a  patient  may  be  rendered  physically  unable  to 
pursue  one  line  of  work  and,  by  that  very  condition,  may  be 
placed  in  a  position  to  develop  his  powers  in  another  and  here- 
tofore undiscovered  field.  If  a  nurse  can  prove  to  the  patient 
who  chafes  against  his  limitations  that  there  is  really  a  broad 
highway  of  usefulness  opening  before  him  of  which  he  knew 
not,  the  mental  friction  is  diminished  and  satisfaction  steals 
in,  while  the  whole  physical  organism  prepares  to  respond  by 
improved  conditions. 

In  this  connection  the  eiiFect  upon  the  nurse  herself  must  not 
be  overlooked.    She  too  will  forget  the  tiresome  routine  if  new 


172  INVALID   OCCUPATION 

ideas  and  methods  are  being  worked  out,  but  these  must  be 
mutually  shared.  Let  the  nurse  assume  the  role  of  dictator 
and  all  grace  is  lost.  She  is  then  no  companion  but  a  task 
mistress.  If,  however,  the  proposition  comes  in  the  form  of  a 
gracious  invitation  to  join  her  in  a  new  interest,  even  though 
she  may  at  first  be  compelled  to  carry  the  larger  part  of  the 
work,  as  it  goes  on  the  patient's  interest  increases,  and  it  soon 
becomes  more  and  more  his  own.  Take,  for  example,  an  irri- 
table little  child,  unwilling  to  make  any  advance  in  happiness. 
Let  the  nurse,  without  discussion,  sit  down  where  the  child's 
eyes  must  perforce  fall  upon  her,  and  begin  to  fashion  some 
trifle  which  a  child  loves.  The  patient  passes  from  opposition  to 
half  interest,  from  this  to  inquiry,  from  inquiry  to  actual  par- 
ticipation, and  is  thus  surprised  into  happiness.  The  child's  cry 
is  often,  "What  can  I  do?"  The  answer  consists  in  doing 
something  with  him  rather  than  for  him. 

Realization  of  resources,  initiation,  participation — as  an  aid 
to  the  acquirement  of  these  potent  factors  in  the  treatment  of 
abnormal  conditions  the  suggestions  of  this  book  are  offered. 
Again  and  again  will  we  find  individual  invalids  who  seem  to 
defeat  all  attempts  towards  the  establishment  of  normal  interests, 
but  the  fault  will  usually  be  found  to  lie  within  ourselves.  The 
great  Goliath  was  slain  by  five  smooth  stones  from  the  brook, 
but  little  David  knew  how  to  use  them ;  should  the  giant  Despair 
sit  grimly  down  within  our  sick-room,  his  stay  will  be  necessarily 
shortened  provided  we  have  learned  how  to  use  our  stones. 


LIST  OF  OCCUPATIONS 


Afghan,  Rake-work,  48 
Animals,  Cloth,  50,  133 

Cut  Paper,  24 

Fruit  and  Vegetable,  46,  77 
Apple-seed  Mousetraps,  41 

Baby's  Handkerchief  Cap,  136 
Bags,  Bean,  82 

Braid,  144 

Leather,  143 

Raffia,  54 
Basketry,  91,  128,  147 
Baskets,  May,  41,  43 

Raffia,  92 

Strong,  128 
Beads,  Sealing  Wax,  64 
Beadwork,  91,  148 
Bed-Desk,  48 
Bed  Puffs,  149 
Belts,  Tape,  61 
Birch-bark  Frames,  125 
Bird,  Flying,  35 
Birthday  Cake  Board,  122 
Blackberries,  90 
Black  Cat  Balls,  56 
Black  Dinah  Emeries,  86 
Block  Printing,  120 
Blue  Prints,  79 
Bookbinding,  24,  H2 
Books,  Scrap,  56 

Story,  24 
Buckles,  Sealing  Wax,  63 

Cake  Board,  Birthday,  122 
Calendar  Quilt,  97 
Candle  Penwiper,  56 
Cards,  Dinner,  69 
Chair  Caning,  145 
Chair,  Grandmother's,  99 
Charcoal  Drawing,  70 
Charlotte  Russe  Cases,  57 
Chatelaine  Pinballs,  82 
Chinese  Junk,  31 
Christmas  Stockings,  60 
Cloth  Animals,  50,  133 
Clothespin  Dolls,  45 
Coloring  Photographs,  68 
Cook  Stove,  Paper  Box,  45 
Cork  and  Pin  Furniture,  46 
Cottages,  Paper  Box,  44 


Cozy,  Egg,  loi 
Crocheted  Dolls,  52 
Cross-stitch  Embroidery,  72 
Cupboard,  Paper-box,  45 
Cut  Out  Pictures,  59 

Designing  Toilets,  71 
Desk,  Bed,  48 
Dinner  Cards,  69 
Dishes,  Eggshell,  45 

Leather,  45 
Dolls,  Clothespin,  45 

Crocheted,  52 

Nature,  45 

Nut,  52 

Rag,  52,  103 

String,  45 
Dory,  27,  28 
Drawing,  74 
Dyeing,  66 

Egg  Cozy,  loi 

Eggshell  Dishes,  45 
Embroidery,  Cross-stitch,  72 
Emery,  Black  Dinah,  86 

Heart-shaped,  86 
Envelope  Sachets,  70 
Eyeglass  Cords,  127 

Fans,  Turkey  Feather,  107 
Fish  Pinball,  87 
Flowers,  Ribbon,  88 
Flying  Bird,  35 
Frames,  Picture,  57,  125 
Frieze,  Cut  Paper,  24,  59,  134 
Frog,  Japanese,  38 
Fruit  and  Vegetable  Animals,  46,  77 
Furnishing,  House,  26 
Furniture,  Cork  and  Pin,  46 
Paper-box,  44 

Gardening,  no 
Go-cart,  44 
Gondola,  30 
Grandmother's  Chair,  99 

Hammock,  Doll's,  55 
Heart-shaped  Emery,  86 
Holders,  100 
House  Furnishing,  26 


173 


174 


INVALID    OCCUPATION 


House  Planning,  109 
Houses,  Paper,  23 

Paper  Box,  44 
Hug-me-tight  Jackets,  49 

Illuminating,  69 
Indian,  Wishbone,  80 

Jacket,  Hug-me-tight,  49 
Jack-o-Lantern,  80 
Japanese  Frog,  38 
Junk,  Chinese,  31 

Kites,  80 

Knitting,  96,  136,  141 

Rake,  48,  71 
Knots,  115,  126 

Lamb's-wool  Cushions,  83 
Lanterns,  Paper,  41 
Leather  Dishes,  45 
Leather  Tooling,  71 

McGinty,  100 
Masks,  Paper-bag,  64 
Match  Boxes,  88 
Mats,  Table,  66 
May  Baskets,  41 
Mending,  128 
Metal  Work,  62 
Miniature  Fowls,  122 
Moccasins,  130 
Modeling,  139 
Mousetraps,  Apple-seed,  41 

Nantucket  Sink,  32 
Nature  Dolls,  45 
Needlebooks,  Roll-up,  105 

Shaker  Bonnet,  84 
Needlecase,  Shamrock,  85 
Netting,  148 
Nut  Dolls,  52 

Painting,  Charcoal,  70 

Pastel,  70,  134 

Water  Color,  70 
Paper-bag  Masks,  64 

Box  Furniture,  44 

Cut  Animals,  24 

Cut  Frieze,  24,  59,  134 

Folding,  27 

Houses,  23 

Lanterns,  41 
Papier-Mache,  60 
Patchwork,  97 
Peas,  Sweet,  89 


Penwipers,  Black  Cat  Balls,  56 

Candle,  56 

Flag,  106 

Turtle,  57 
Photograph  Coloring,  68 
Picture  Frames,  57,  125 

Puzzles,  130 

Stories,  24 
Pictures,  Cut  Out,  59 
Pinballs,  Chatelaine,  82 

Fish,  87 
Pincushions,  Lamb's-wool,  83 

Roller  Bandage,  83 
Pins,  Sealing  Wax,  63 
Flans,  House,  109 
Printing  Block,  120 
Prints,  Blue,  79 
Puffs,  Bed,  149 
Pyrography,  122 

Quilt,  Calendar,  97 

Raffia  Bags,  54 

Baskets,  91,  128,  147 
Rag  Dolls,  54,  103 
Rake  Knitting,  48,  71 
Ribbon  Flowers,  88 
Roller  Bandage  Cushions,  83 
Roll-up  Needlebooks,  105 
Roses,  Ribbon,  89 
Rugs,  106,  129,  146 
Rush  Bottoming,  145 

Sachets,  Envelope,  70 
Sailboat,  29 
Santa  Claus,  79 
Scrapbooks,  56 
Sealing  Wax,  Beads,  64 

Buckles,  63 

Hatpins,  63 
Sewing,  142 

Shaker  Bonnet  Needlebook,  84 
Shamrock  Needlecase,  85 
Signs,  Street  Car,  77 
Sink,  Nantucket,  32 
Spatterflies,  78 
Stencil,  65,  77 
Stockings,  Christmas,  60 
Stories,  Picture,  24 
Stove,  45 

Straw  Braiding,  126 
Street  Car  Signs,  77 
String  Doll,  45 
Sweet  Peas,  Ribbon,  89 

Table  Mats,  66 
Tape  Belts,  61 


INVALID   OCCUPATION  175 

Toilets,  Designing,  71  Watch  Cords,  127 

Tooling,  Leather,  71  Water  Color  Painting,  70 

Turkey  Feather  Fans,  107  Wax,  Sealing,  63 

Turtle  Penwiper,  57  Weaving,  53,  74,  143 

Whittling,  125 

Vegetable  Animals,  46,  77  Wishbone  Indian,  80 

Violets,  Ribbon,  88  Writing  for  the  Blind,  141 

The  various  addresses  of  supply  places  have  been  given  in  the  text  to 
facilitate  the  vrork  of  individual  students.  Doubtless  many  others  of  equal 
standing  will  be  found  in  all  large  cities. 


Ip. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


MAY27  1961 

MAY  1 3  1961 
OCT  10  1968 

OCT  1  0  19G8  18 


mat 


•r?«f» 


rjP 


LD  21-100w-7,'52(A2528sl6)476 


i 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 

University  of  California 

Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made 
4  days  prior  to  due  date 


DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

DEC  0  9  2004 


DD20  6M  9-03 


